X7.

4 Series
Operator's Manual

ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS SECTION

Valid for the following tractor mod- TABLE OF CONTENTS
TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION
els:
INTRODUCTION, WARRANTY
1
X7.440 Tier 4 interim
SAFETY NOTES
X7.450 Tier 4 interim
X7.460 Tier 4 interim 2
CONTROLS
CAB
3
INSTRUMENTS AND PROGRAMMING

4
OPERATION

5
TYRES, WHEELS, BALLASTING

6
REGULAR SERVICE INTERVALS

7
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

8
SPECIFICATIONS
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
9
Argo Tractors S.p.A.
42042 Fabbrico [RE] Italy
via G. Matteotti, 7
t. +39.0522.656111- f. +39.0522.656476
webmaster@argotractors.com Publication N. 6521 717M1
www.argotractors.com Release 02/2014

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 1-1

This manual was compiled in compliance with the the ISO 3600 standards and the here contained instructions
comply the requirements of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and Directive 2010/52/EC in force in the European
Union. For tractors sold or used outside the European Union, local laws will prevail.

Main protections on the tractors discussed in this manual. [4.1.o][4.1.p][4.1.q][4.5.b][4.5.3]

CAB

ROPS (protection against overturning) YES

FOPS (protection against objects falling from above) YES

OPS (protection against penetration of objects from sides) NO

Protection against hazardous chemicals CLASS 2*

* Complying to EN 15695-1:2009

This Operator's Manual is valid in all countries in the world and for all models. The photos, warnings and instruc-
tions it contains concern both standard and optional equipment. Therefore you might find details on parts that
are not installed on your own tractor, depending on national laws and ordered optionals.
The tractor is provided of safety features complying to national and international laws. For your own safety, such
features should be correctly used at any time and checked for operation. Ask your dealer if you have any doubts
about their operation or their use.

Units of measurement
All units of measurement used in this manual are metric
unless otherwise stated.
Use the following table to convert from metric to impe-
rial units.

mm x 0.03937 = inches
kg x 2.2 = pounds
Bar x 14.5038 = PSI
Litres x 0.22 = British gallons
Litres x 0.264 = US gallons
N (Newton) x 0.225 = pound/foot
Nm x 0.738 = pound/foot

WARNING: Any warranties for modified operation Nm x 8.85 = pound/inch

units (safety frame, electric and hydraulic systems °C x 1.8 (=32) = °F
a.s.o) expire if cabs are mounted that are not ap-
proved by the tractor's maker. Moreover, noise levels km/h x 0.62 = MPH
and compliance with the approvals cannot be verified
in this case.

CALIFORNIA
Statement 65 Warning

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents

are known to the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

1-2 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Table of contents Page n.

Section 1 Contents................................................................................................ 1-3
Tractor identification.............................................................................. 1-8
Introduction........................................................................................... 1-9 1
Warranty, pre-delivery inspections and installation.............................. 1-9
Warranty claim..................................................................................... 1-10
Spare parts warning............................................................................ 1-10
If you move.......................................................................................... 1-10
Post-warranty service.......................................................................... 1-10
Safety................................................................................................... 1-10

Section 2 Safety notes.......................................................................................... 2-1

Regular use............................................................................................ 2-1
Alarm and safety texts and symbols..................................................... 2-2
Safety - Tractor and implement............................................................. 2-2
Safety - Introduction.............................................................................. 2-2
Safety - Advice for the operator............................................................ 2-2
Safety - Danger, Warning and Caution.................................................. 2-3
Safety - Decals....................................................................................... 2-3
Safety - Following a safety program..................................................... 2-3
Safety - Cab........................................................................................... 2-4
Safety precautions................................................................................ 2-5
Personal protection devices (DPI)......................................................... 2-5
Check your equipment.......................................................................... 2-8
Cleaning the tractor............................................................................... 2-9
Save the environment........................................................................... 2-9
Safety - Tractor maintenance................................................................ 2-9
Safety - Starting up.............................................................................. 2-10
Working in safety................................................................................. 2-12
Follow the rules when using your tractor............................................ 2-12
Working in safety................................................................................. 2-12
Beware of other people...................................................................... 2-13
Risk of overturning.............................................................................. 2-14
To avoid side overturning.................................................................... 2-14
To avoid back overturning................................................................... 2-16
Dangerous operations......................................................................... 2-18
To engage the power take-off............................................................. 2-18
Implements and attachments............................................................. 2-20
Road transport..................................................................................... 2-21
Highway Code regulations.................................................................. 2-21
Safety - After use................................................................................. 2-22
Further notes....................................................................................... 2-23
Tractor stability.................................................................................... 2-25
Tractor's lifting points.......................................................................... 2-27
Tractor access..................................................................................... 2-28
Fuel tank filling.................................................................................... 2-29
Filling with AdBlue™ or DEF................................................................ 2-29
Wedges............................................................................................... 2-30
Risks from noise.................................................................................. 2-31
Positions of the safety decals............................................................. 2-32
Positions of safety decals - Only North American markets................ 2-36

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 1-3

 Table of contents Page n.

Section 3 Controls - Cab........................................................................................ 3-1
Cab........................................................................................................ 3-2
Operator's seat...................................................................................... 3-3
Seat belt.............................................................................................. 3-16
Instructor seat..................................................................................... 3-17
Operator present sensor..................................................................... 3-18
Cab controls........................................................................................ 3-20
Controls on the left-hand side of the instrument turret...................... 3-20
Front Right Hand Controls................................................................... 3-23
Right-hand console controls............................................................... 3-24
Controls in cab roof............................................................................. 3-26
Armrest controls.................................................................................. 3-32
AUTO function control buttons........................................................... 3-33
Potentiometers.................................................................................... 3-33
Joystick controls................................................................................. 3-34
Steering column adjustment............................................................... 3-35
Cab ventilation..................................................................................... 3-36
Electronic Climate Control.................................................................. 3-38
Radio.................................................................................................... 3-42
Additional Cab Features...................................................................... 3-48
External controls on fenders............................................................... 3-50

Section 4 Instruments and Programming............................................................. 4-1

Instruments - Instrument panel............................................................. 4-2
Indicator lights....................................................................................... 4-5
Display operation................................................................................... 4-6
Alarm notifications................................................................................ 4-9
Main display.......................................................................................... 4-9
Clock/Work timer................................................................................... 4-9
Rear hitch............................................................................................ 4-10
Engagement/disengagement threshold of auto PTO......................... 4-10
Wheel Slip .......................................................................................... 4-11
Setup of limits for auto PTO engagement/disengagement
and slip values..................................................................................... 4-12
Air Trailer Brake System Pressure...................................................... 4-13
AdBlue™ or DEF level.......................................................................... 4-14
Service interval ................................................................................... 4-18
Operator Presence Alarm.................................................................... 4-18
Transmission shuttle modulation........................................................ 4-19
Counters.............................................................................................. 4-21
AVC - Auxiliary control valves.............................................................. 4-22
Engine controller menu....................................................................... 4-27
Adjustment of screen, lamps and indicators brightness.................... 4-28
Front axle suspension adjustment...................................................... 4-29
Fully Automatic Shifting...................................................................... 4-30
Constant engine RPM......................................................................... 4-32
My function......................................................................................... 4-33
PTO Drive Engagement....................................................................... 4-35
Error Codes/Alarm Messages............................................................. 4-36
Transmission display area .................................................................. 4-37
Power Take Off Menu.......................................................................... 4-40
Accessories menu............................................................................... 4-42
• Implement width.............................................................................. 4-44
• Euro/NAO market............................................................................. 4-45
• Clock................................................................................................. 4-46
• Service interval................................................................................. 4-47
• Functionality (indicator lights/indicators/display on LCD)................ 4-48
• Instrument Cluster Alarms And Error Displays................................ 4-54

1-4 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Table of contents Page n.

• Machine Working Hours.................................................................. 4-54
• Operator Presence Control Function............................................... 4-55
• Counters........................................................................................... 4-56 1
• Headland Management Function (HMF) . ....................................... 4-57

Section 5 Operation............................................................................................... 5-1

General Operation................................................................................. 5-2
Run In Procedure................................................................................... 5-2
Starting procedure................................................................................. 5-3
Cold Temperature Operation................................................................. 5-4
Turning off the engine........................................................................... 5-6
Parking the tractor................................................................................. 5-6
Battery master disconnect switch........................................................ 5-7
Operating the transmission................................................................... 5-8
Creeper Operation............................................................................... 5-17
Tractor transport.................................................................................. 5-18
Drawbar............................................................................................... 5-20
Towable weights................................................................................. 5-21
Height adjustable hitch....................................................................... 5-25
Auto Hitch............................................................................................ 5-30
Dimensions of the towing devices for trailer/implements................. 5-32
Trailer air brake terminals.................................................................... 5-33
Hydraulic trailer brake.......................................................................... 5-35
Stationary............................................................................................. 5-36
Engine Set Point ................................................................................. 5-37
My Switch (selection of preset functions).......................................... 5-38
Use of the front suspension................................................................ 5-39
Operating the four-wheel drive........................................................... 5-40
Diff lock control................................................................................... 5-42
Field Operation.................................................................................... 5-44
Rear power take-off............................................................................. 5-44
PTO shaft replacement........................................................................ 5-46
PTO speed........................................................................................... 5-47
Rear power take-off engagement....................................................... 5-48
External PTO controls.......................................................................... 5-49
Auto PTO............................................................................................. 5-50
Front power take-off............................................................................ 5-51
Rear Three-Point Hitch........................................................................ 5-52
Rear hitch............................................................................................ 5-59
• Use of the hitch control selector..................................................... 5-59
• Hitch activation................................................................................. 5-60
• Hitch lock.......................................................................................... 5-60
• Hitch Switch Operation.................................................................... 5-61
• Quick lower...................................................................................... 5-61
• Hitch damping function.................................................................... 5-63
• Drop speed control.......................................................................... 5-63
• Maximum height setting.................................................................. 5-63
• Hitch Operating Mode..................................................................... 5-64
• Hitch position control knob.............................................................. 5-65
• Floating mode.................................................................................. 5-65
• External hitch controls..................................................................... 5-66
Front hitch (if equipped)...................................................................... 5-67
Auxiliary control valves (AVC).............................................................. 5-75
• System enabling........................................................................................... 5-76
• Use of the controls on the armrest.............................................................. 5-77
• Buttons 2nd and 3rd hydraulic function (if the diverter valve is provided)..... 5-78
• Using the levers............................................................................................ 5-79
Quick couplers.................................................................................... 5-81

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 1-5

 Table of contents Page n.

Connecting Remote Hoses................................................................. 5-81
Disconnecting hoses and implements............................................... 5-82
Check valve within auxiliary control valves......................................... 5-82
Power Beyond Fittings........................................................................ 5-83
Suspended Cab................................................................................... 5-84

Section 6 Tyres, wheels, ballasting....................................................................... 6-1

Tyre Inflation Specifications.................................................................. 6-3
Tyre pressures, Load Capacities And Service....................................... 6-4
Tyre inflation procedure......................................................................... 6-6
Tyre and wheel service.......................................................................... 6-7
Tyre installation...................................................................................... 6-7
Wheel removing procedure................................................................... 6-8
Setting The Front Wheel Toe-In............................................................. 6-9
Front axle - steering stops................................................................... 6-10
Track adjustment................................................................................. 6-11
Front wheel bolt torques..................................................................... 6-18
Rear wheel bolt torques...................................................................... 6-19
Front To Rear Tyre Size Combinations................................................. 6-20
• wheels with bolted rims................................................................... 6-20
• with welded rims.............................................................................. 6-21
• with rear dual wheels....................................................................... 6-21
Bar axle adjustment............................................................................. 6-22
Front wheel fenders............................................................................ 6-24
Tractor ballast...................................................................................... 6-25

Section 7 Regular service intervals....................................................................... 7-1

Routine maintenance table................................................................... 7-2
Recommendations before you service................................................. 7-5
Lubrication and maintenance................................................................ 7-6
Running in............................................................................................. 7-6
Fuel tank filling...................................................................................... 7-8
Access for inspection and maintenance............................................. 7-11
10 hours or daily service..................................................................... 7-13
Maintenance every 50 hours............................................................... 7-20
Maintenance every 100 hours............................................................. 7-25
Maintenance every 250 hours............................................................. 7-28
Maintenance every 500 hours............................................................. 7-32
Bleeding air from the fuel system....................................................... 7-35
Maintenance every 1000 hours........................................................... 7-40
Maintenance every 1500 hours........................................................... 7-52
Maintenance every 2000 hours........................................................... 7-53
Maintenance every 3600 hours........................................................... 7-54
Air conditioned cab............................................................................. 7-55
• Safety notes..................................................................................... 7-55
Preparing for long idle periods............................................................ 7-58
Fire prevention..................................................................................... 7-59

Section 8 Electrical system................................................................................... 8-1

Electrical system - Battery..................................................................... 8-2
Battery system servicing....................................................................... 8-4
Connecting a booster battery............................................................... 8-5
Headlights............................................................................................. 8-7
Lamp replacement................................................................................ 8-8
Fuses and relays.................................................................................... 8-9
7-pin power socket for trailer.............................................................. 8-19
Auxiliary electrical power sockets....................................................... 8-19
Preparing for long idle periods............................................................ 8-21

1-6 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Table of contents Page n.

Section 9 Specifications - Alphabetical index....................................................... 9-1
Weights and dimensions....................................................................... 9-2
Radio specifications.............................................................................. 9-8 1
Noise levels........................................................................................... 9-9
Vibration levels.................................................................................... 9-10
CE Declaration of Conformity............................................................. 9-11
Issue of authorization.......................................................................... 9-12
Weights............................................................................................... 9-12
Lubricants and fuels chart................................................................... 9-13
Implement attachment points............................................................. 9-14
Alphabetical index............................................................................... 9-15
Contents Directive 2010/52/EU........................................................... 9-17

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 1-7

Tractor identification
Machine identification data
The tractor and its main components are identified by se-
rial numbers and/or manufacturing codes. Here under the
positions of the various identification data are illustrated.
Tractor identification number
The vehicle identification number is punched both on the
data plate and on the right-hand front side of the weight
frame. (2-Fig.1-2.)

NOTE: Identification data should be communicated to your Tractor identification data

Dealer for requests of spare parts or service. The engine has its own serial number stamped on the
engine data plate (3-Fig.1-2).
Machine identification plate
The manufacturer's plate is placed outside the cab, on
the left-hand side of the machine.

Fig.1-1

The manufacturer's plate shows the following data:

- Manufacturer
- Machine type
- Number of authorization for road circulation
- Frame number
- Manufacturing year
- Weights
- Rated engine power in kW
- CE mark
Other data are indicated on the authorization certificate.

Fig. 1-2
Position of plates and tractor identification references: 1 - Machine identification
plate; 2 - Chassis serial number; 3 - Engine identification plate.

1-8 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


INTRODUCTION
NOTE: This manual is distributed with tractors all over the
world. The equipment indicated as standard or optional
may vary according to the country where the tractor oper-
ates. Please ask your Dealer for full details of the equip-
ment available in your country.
The purpose of this book is to enable the owner and driver
to operate the tractor in a safe manner. Provided that the
instructions are followed carefully, the equipment will give
years of service in our tradition.
Introduction - Warranty
For the correct operation, service and maintenance of this
tractor you need to be fully acquainted with its specific
features and any associated safety hazards to prevent any
personal injury or damage.
Customers should use an authorised Dealer in connection
with any problem regarding service and adjustments.
1
WARRANTY, PRE-DELIVERY INSPEC-
TIONS AND INSTALLATION

If you should not understand any part of this booklet,
please do not hesitate to ask your Dealer for advice, as
these instructions must be correctly understood and com-
plied with. It is advisable to perform a daily maintenance
routine and to keep a register to record the work hours
of the machine.
When new parts are required it is important that only
genuine service parts are used. Authorised Dealers supply
genuine parts and can give advice regarding their fitness
and use. Customers are therefore required to buy their
service parts only from an authorised Dealer.
The Company, when selling new goods to their Dealers,
gives a warranty that, subject to certain conditions, guar-
antees that the goods are free from defects in material and
workmanship. As this manual is published for worldwide
distribution, it is impossible to give a precise and detailed
description of the terms and clauses of the warranty
granted in each country for retail sale. The buyers of new
tractors should therefore ask their Dealer for full details.
According to the Company's policy of continuous improve-
ment to its machines, changes in their technical features
may be made at any time without notice. The Company
accepts no responsibility for discrepancies which may
occur between the specifications of its machines and the
descriptions thereof contained in its publications.

A Dealer is required to carry out certain activities when

The tractor is designed exclusively for general agricul- supplying a new tractor. These consist of a full pre-delivery
tural operations, follow the instructions outlined in inspection to ensure that the tractor supplied is ready for
this manual for correct and safe operation. immediate use, and full instruction in the basic princi-
THE TRACTOR IS UNSUITABLE FOR USE IN ples of operation and maintenance of the tractor. These
instructions will cover instruments and controls, routine
FORESTRY OPERATIONS. maintenance and safety precautions. All persons who
It may become suitable for such use if a forestry kit is
will be concerned with the operation and maintenance
installed which is CE marked and approved and whose
of the machine should be present for these instructions.
installation is approved by the manufacturer.
The installation and modification of the tractor must
NOTE: The Manufacturer will not accept responsibility for
be carried out with the highest technical standards by
any claim resulting from the fitment of non-approved parts
specialised workshops with qualified personnel. Such
or attachments, or unauthorized modification or alteration.
workshops must be able to guarantee and attest the
risk analysis provided for in the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC concerning the foreseen and predictable
use of the tractor for forestry work and environment,
in order to carry out all required adaptations of the
tractor. This specific forestry kit must protect the
driver's seat from falling and penetrating objects.

Use in any other way as described hereunder is consid-

ered as contrary to the intended use. The Manufacturer
of the tractor accepts no liability for any damage or injury
resulting from misuse; any resulting risks must be borne
solely by the user.

Also compliance with and strict adherence to the opera-

tion, service and maintenance conditions specified by the
Manufacturer are substantial part of the intended use.

If the tractor must be used in very heavy-duty conditions

(e.g. deep water or extremely muddy soils), you should ask
your Dealer for specific instructions, to avoid invalidating
the guarantee.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 1-9

Introduction - Warranty
WARRANTY CLAIM
A correct installation, followed by a regular maintenance,
can do much to prevent malfunctions or breakdowns. If
operation problems should be however encountered dur-
ing the warranty period, the warranty should be claimed
with the following procedure.
The Dealer by whom you purchased the tractor should
be promptly informed, stating model and serial number.
It is very important that no time is lost as no warranty is
granted if the malfunction is not promptly corrected, even
if the warranty covered the original failure.
You should give your Dealer as many information as pos-
sible, for instance work hours, current type of work and
warning signs.
It should be noted that normal maintenance services such
as tuning, brake/clutch adjustments, and the supply of
materials used to service the tractor (oil, filters, fuel and
antifreeze) are not covered by terms of the warranty.
SPARE PARTS REPLACEMENT
Only genuine spare parts should be used as inferior qual-
ity parts may not only impair performance, but also be
dangerous for the operator's health and safety. The manu-
facturer of the tractor will not take any responsibility for
any loss, damage or liability resulting from the fitment of
such parts, and, if fitted during the normal warranty period
will invalidate the manufacturer's warranty.
IF YOU MOVE
The Dealer by whom you bought your tractor is sole re-
sponsible for the protection given by your warranty. We
recommend that any repair of your machine should be
made by the Dealer. If you move outside of your selling
dealers area of responsibility, you should enquire and
notify the relevant authorised Dealer in your new area
about your machine. This will ensure any remaining war-
ranty and servicing can be supported. If you moved from
the area of your original Dealer without any arrangements
with the new Dealer, the latter will give you assistance
for emergencies, but will charge normal prices, unless:
a. You make it clear that the warranty has not expired, and
b. the Dealer making the repair can make the due arrange-
ments with the original Dealer.
1-10
POST-WARRANTY SERVICE
During the warranty period it is advisable to let your Dealer
perform every repair and servicing. In this way the Dealer
is able to keep under control operation and performances
of your new tractor.
To maintain optimum performance from your tractor, it is
important to continue with regular checks and servicing
as outlined in this manual. Making use of your local Dealer
for all tractor services allows their trained engineers to
keep your machine running at its best.
Dealers engineers are manufacturer trained and updated
on the latest product and servicing techniques and have
access to dedicated service tools and up to date diag-
nostic equipment. They also receive regular technical
information and have access to Workshop Manuals to
ensure that the any repairs or service work are to the
required standards.
SAFETY
The safety of the operator is one of the main concerns
in designing and developing a new tractor. Designers
build in as many safety features as possible. However,
every year many accidents occur which could have been
avoided by a few seconds thought and a more careful
approach to handling farm machinery and implements.
Therefore you are required to read through and imple-
ment the safety instructions detailed in the Safety Notes
section of this book.
CAUTION: In some of the illustrations used
in this Operator Instruction Book, panels or
guards may have been removed for clarity.
Never operate the tractor without these com-
ponents in position. If the removal of panels
or guards is necessary to make a repair, they
MUST be replaced before operation.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1
 Introduction - Warranty
IMPORTANT: Keep with care this operation and mainte-
nance manual on your tractor. Before driving or operating
your tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual carefully,
with special attention to the chapter concerning safety
rules. Keep the manual always ready at hand in the manual
storage compartment for easier reference. If the tractor is
used also by persons that do not understand the language
1
of the Country, the employer (or the machine user) must
translate the operating instructions in the language under-
stood by these operators. (Fig. 1-3).

Fig.1-3 Document pocket

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 1-11

 Page left intentionally blank.

1-12 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

Section 2 2
Safety notes

REGULAR USE
This is an agricultural tractor, whose function consists essentially in traction power. It is therefore specially designed to
push, pull, carry or operate some interchangeable implements for agricultural purpose, or to tow agricultural trailers.

This machine must be driven and operated by an operator suitably instructed and, for countries where it is requested,
firmly seated and wearing a fastened seat belt.

This machine is NOT designed:

- To be driven or operated standing or from outside the cab or the operator's seat, or without a fastened seat belt.
- To lift persons.
- To transport persons, within or outside the cab or the operator's seat, in any condition (work or road transport).
- To be used in hazardous atmosphere.
- To be used in forestry.
- To be equipped with front loaders if the tractor is not provided with a suitable structure to protect the operator's seat
from falling and projected objects.

More basic rules

- Keep the cab doors closed while the machine is being used.
- The machine must be used only by a skilled and suitably instructed operator who knows perfectly controls and driving
technique.
- External controls of hitch and electro-hydraulic power take-off (if equipped) MUST BE OPERATED standing on one side
outside the tractor and keeping oneself out of the overall width of mudguards [4.2.b]. It is expressly forbidden to operate
the controls from the rear of the tractor or standing on the inner side of wheels.
- Before any operations, carefully analyze all risks and check that the user is skilled enough to safely operate the machine.

WARNING: Improper use of the machine, specially on rough terrain or slopes, can make it tilt over. Pay
particular attention in case of rain, snow, ice or anyway on slippery ground. It may be necessary to step
out of the tractor to check personally ground quality. In the described conditions, always keep the load as
close as possible to the tractor and the ground.

WARNING: Do not try to get off the moving tractor, even if it is overturning, to avoid being crushed under
it, but remain seated with the well fastened seat belt and hold firmly the steering wheel. [4.1.e]

WARNING: If the tractor is used as a fixed power unit without supervision (e.g. connection to a pump unit
for irrigation), put up warnings against this dangerous situation and barriers to keep off unauthorised
personnel.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-1

Safety notes

SAFETY ALERT SYMBOLS AND TERMS

This safety symbol means WARNING! BEWARE! YOUR SAFETY IS IN DANGER!

This alert symbol draws your attention on important warnings on the implement, in the manual or anywhere else. Pay
great attention whenever you see this symbol: there is a great danger of serious or deadly injuries. Follow the instruc-
tions given in the warning.

WHY IS SAFETY IMPORTANT FOR YOU?

 ACCIDENTS CAN DISABLE and KILL 
 ACCIDENTS COST A HIGH PRICE 
 ACCIDENTS can be AVOIDED 

SAFETY - TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT [4.2.a]

• The tractor is a source of mechanical and hydraulic power.
• This Operator's Manual is compiled to cover safe working practices that are associated with the base tractor
operation.
• It does not cover all operation and safety instructions relevant to all known implements and attachments that
may be fitted to your tractor in the future.
• All implements connected to the tractor must bear the CE mark (Europe only). All equipment to be connected
must be accompanied by a operation and maintenance handbook, to be read before assembling and using the
equipment.
• It is essential that operators use and understand the relevant Operator's Manual which accompany such im-
plements and attachments not treated in this book.

SAFETY - INTRODUCTION SAFETY - ADVICE FOR THE OPERA-

This safety section of your Operator Instruction Book is
intended to point out some of the basic danger situations
that may be encountered during the normal operation and
maintenance of your tractor, and to suggest possible ways
of dealing with these situations. This section is NOT a
replacement for other safety practices featured in other
sections of this book.
Additional precautions may be needed according to the
implements used and to work conditions in the field or
in repair or maintenance areas. The Manufacturer of the
tractor has no direct control over application, operation,
inspection, lubrication or maintenance of utility tractor.
Implementation of correct safety practices in such areas
is therefore YOUR own responsibility.
TOR
It is YOUR responsibility to read and understand the
safety section in this manual before operating your tractor.
You must follow these safety instructions that take you
step by step through your working day. DO NOT USE THE
MACHINE IF YOU HAVE ANY DOUBTS:
In reading this section, you will note that illustrations have
been used to highlight certain situations. Each illustration
is numbered and the same number appears in the text in
parenthesis. This reference number is at the end of the
written text concerning the picture and is composed of
two digits separated by a dash: the first digit before the
dash identifies the section, the second one the progres-
sive number of the picture in the section. (e.g. Fig.2-34 =
Figure 34 of Section 2).

Remember that YOU are the only key to safety. Good

safety practices not only protect you, but also the people
around you. Study the features in this manual and make
them a working part of your safety program.

2-2 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


Keep in mind that this safety section is written only for this
type of machine. Practice all other usual and customary
safe working precautions, and above all - REMEMBER -
SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. YOU CAN PREVENT
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
SAFETY - DANGER, WARNING AND
CAUTION
Whenever you see the words and symbols shown below,
used in this book and on decals, you MUST take note of
their instructions as they relate to personal safety.
DANGER: The symbol and the word DANGER
indicate an imminently hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, will result in DEATH OR
VERY SERIOUS INJURY.
WARNING: The symbol and the word WARNING
indicate a potentially hazardous situation. If the
instructions or procedures are not correctly
followed, it could result in DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY IN EXTREME CASES.
WARNING: The word CAUTION indicates a limited risk
situation which, if not avoided, will result in MATERIAL
DAMAGES AND/OR MINOR INJURIES.
IMPORTANT:The word IMPORTANT is used to identify
special instructions or procedures which, if not strictly
observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of
the machine, of the work carried out or its surroundings.
NOTE:The word NOTE is used to indicate points of par-
ticular interest for more efficient and convenient repair
or operation.
SAFETY - DECALS
WARNING: DO NOT remove or efface Danger,
Warning, Caution or Instruction decals.
Any lost or effaced Danger, Warning, Caution or Instruc-
tion decals must be replaced. Replacement decals are
available from your Dealer in the event of loss or damage.
The actual location of these Safety Decals is illustrated at
the end of this section.
If a second-hand tractor has been purchased, refer to
the illustrations at the end of this section to ensure that
all the safety warning decals are in the correct position
and readable.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Safety notes
SAFETY - FOLLOWING A SAFETY
PROGRAM
Safe use of the tractor
Only qualified and authorised operators are able to use
farming tractors in safety. To be qualified you must under-
stand the written instructions supplied in this Operator
Instruction Book, have training in the work area, and know
the safety rules and regulations for the job.
Some regulations stat, for instance, that no one younger
than 18 may use machines with engines (according to
European directives). Tractors are such machines. It is 2
your responsibility to know these regulations and comply
with them in the area or the situation in which the tractor
is used.
Such regulations include, without limitation, the following
instructions for a safe use of the tractor.
WARNING: The operator must not be under
influence of alcohol or drugs that can impair
his/her coordination or alert conditions. An
operator under prescription for narcotic drugs
needs a medical certificate stating if he/she is
able to use the tractor safely.
Take the following precautions:
• or
Do not allow children or unauthorised persons to drive
use your tractor. Keep others away from your area
of work.
• upright
Fasten your seat belt if the tractor is fitted with an
safety frame or a cab.
• ditches,
Whenever possible, do not operate the tractor near
pits or holes in the ground. Slow down when
steering, driving on slopes or driving over rough, slip-
pery or muddy terrain.
• Keep clear from slopes too steep to operate safely.
• aDrive carefully, specially on headlands, on road, near
ditch and around trees.
• implement.
Never let anyone else get on to the tractor or the
• hitch
Hitch only from the recommended hitch points. Never
above the central line of the rear axle.
• starts
Operate the tractor smoothly, with no sudden turns,
or stops. Apply the parking brake whenever
the tractor is stopped.
• the
Do not remove or alter any part of the equipment or of
guards. Do not use the tractor if the safety frame
is removed or damaged. Never use attachments that
are not designed for your tractor.
2-3
Safety notes

SAFETY - CAB [4.1.q]

The safety cab is designed on purpose for this tractor
series and complies with all law requirements concerning
safety and noise level.

The safety cab complies with international safety stand-

ards prescribed by laws in force. The cab MUST NEVER
be drilled or modified in order to install accessories or
implements. IT IS FORBIDDEN to weld components to
the cab or to repair damaged cab components. Never at-
tach chains or cables to the main framework of the cab
for towing purposes.

WARNING: Tractors equipped with cab have a

roof compliant with standard OCSE Code 10
that gives a limited protection against objects
and loads that might fall from above in typical
Fig.2-1
work conditions, but not against objects and
loads that might be projected into the area
normally occupied by the operator.

• Seat belts must always be worn and adjusted snugly

(Fig.2-2).
• From time to time, check the seat belt for damage and
replace it if worn or damaged (Fig.2-2).

WARNING: Always fasten your safety belt.

After an accident, let a specialised workshop check the

safety frame, the driving seat, the safety belts and the
anchor points of the safety belts. Replace all damaged
parts before using the tractor again.

Fig.2-2

2-4 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

PRECAUTIONS FOR WORKING IN

SAFETY
Protect yourself
NEVER take any risks. Wear all protective clothing and any
personal protection devices (DPI) called for by the work
conditions. (Fig. 2-3).

PERSONAL PROTECTION DEVICES

(DPI)
WARNING: Compulsory personal protection
2
devices (DPI)
While mounting, operating or servicing the
machine, always wear protective clothing and Fig.2-3
personal protection devices (DPI) as necessary
for the specific procedure. Personal protection
devices (DPI) that could be necessary include
safety shoes, eye and/or face protection, hard
hat, heavy gloves, airways and ear protection.
Failure to comply with these directions could
cause injuries or death.

The following PERSONAL SAFETY DEVICES are always

necessary:
- Hearing protection.
- Safety footwear.

As personal protection device (DPI) is intended any equip-

ment that the worker must wear and keep as protection
against one or several risks of the work operations that
could jeopardize the worker's safety or health, as well as
any complements or implements to this purpose.

DPI's must be used when, though reducing danger at

the source, a few risks cannot be eliminated in any way.
Such DPI's are therefore necessary and mandatory when
residual risks are present.

Fig.2-3a
WARNING: the tractor is not protected against
dangerous matters and emissions. If you are
working in an environment where there is a
danger of inhaling, ingesting or contacting
dangerous matters, the operator should wear
specific personal safety devices. [4.1.p][4.5.3]
DO NOT wear loose clothing, jewellery or other
items and tie up long hair that could get entan-
gled in controls or moving parts.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-5

Safety notes

A first aid kit should be available on any work site (Fig.2-

3b).

First aid kit

If the tractor's owner or the person responsible for safety
requires that a first aid kit should be on board, the kit
should be kept in a safe and suitable place, as the con-
tained material is highly perishable.

WARNING: The tractor is designed and built to avoid

risks from fire in normal use conditions: For this
reason it is not provided with a self-extinguishing
system or a fire extinguisher on board. The tractor is
anyway preset for the installation of a 1 kg dust-type
fire extinguisher complying with UNI EN 3/7 2004, that Fig.2-3b
should be placed in the space reserved and indicated
to this purpose (Fig.2-4a).
The fire extinguisher with its support can be bought
as a kit by our Dealers or authorised workshops. The
kit consists in a fire extinguisher, support, fastening
means, directions for its mounting and a decal to be
applied in the indicated area. The decal, when applied,
declares that the tractor may not be used if the fire
extinguisher is not in its place.
It is up to the owner of the farm or to the person
responsible for safety at the farm to judge the oppor-
tunity of using the tractor in areas at high fire risk.
They are also responsible for use of the tractor with
the extinguisher duly mounted.

Fig.2-4

2-6 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

Know your tractor

You should learn which are the features of your tractor. You
should also learn how to use all equipments provided on
your machine and all the implements and links that can be
used in connection with it. Learn use and function of each
control, indicator and instrument. You must know rated
load capacity, speed ranges, brake and steering features,
steering radius and handling spaces.

You should always keep in mind that rain, snow, ice, gravel
or muddy soil may affect the drive conditions of your trac-
tor. In heavy conditions, slow down and take utmost care.
2
Engage four-wheel drive, if provided.
Fig.2-5
You should also thoroughly study the DANGER, WARN-
ING and CAUTION signals on your tractor and all pertain-
ing information before beginning work (Fig 2.5).

READ THIS OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK BEFORE

STARTING THE ENGINE.

IF THERE IS SOMETHING YOU DO NOT UNDERSTAND,

ASK SOMEONE SPECIALISED (e.g. your Dealer) FOR
EXPLANATION.

IMPORTANT: This manual concerns general safety rules

for agricultural tractors. Always keep this manual in your
utility tractor. For further copies, contact your Dealer.

Always use all available protective and safety

devices.
Keep all protective devices in place and securely fastened.
Make certain all guards, shields and safety signs are
properly installed, as specified, and are in good condition.

To help keep yourself and others around you

safe, your tractor should be equipped and kept
in perfect service order with:

• Safety belts.
• Power take-off shields.
• Shields against heat.
• moving
Shields and guards against shearing, pinching and
parts.
• Rear view mirrors.
• Means
• Anti-deflagration shields on tubes, if required.
• Driver's
to access the driver's seat.
• Dust filters in the cab • Controls.
seat.
• Decals and pictograms. • Operator's and service manual.
• safety
Slow Moving Vehicle emblem (SMV). Additional
guards, lights or decals and a back-up alarm
(Fig.2-38 and 2-39) (North America).

Know which devices are required for safe operation of

your tractor. Use them at all times. Make sure they are in
place and in good condition. NEVER remove or disconnect
any safety device.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-7

Safety notes

Check your equipment WARNING: Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under

Check your tractor before beginning your workday. Make
sure that all systems are correctly operating.
WARNING: personal safety devices must be worn for
each check and maintenance operation.
• from
DO NOT smoke while filling the fuel tank. Keep away
any type of open flame (Fig.2-7). [4.1.l]
• sure that
Check for loose, broken, lost or damaged parts. Make
all safety devices are in place.
• Check safety frame and seat belt for damage. A dam-
aged safety frame or seat belt MUST be replaced.
• installed
Ensure that implements and attachments are properly
and that the tractor and implement PTO RPM
ratings match.
pressure can pierce the skin or eyes and cause
serious personal injury, blindness or death.
Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks.
Never use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles
for eye protection. If any fluid is injected into
the skin, it MUST be surgically removed within
a few hours by a doctor familiar with this type
of injury (Fig.2-8).
Before applying pressure to the fuel or hydraulic system,
be sure all connections are tight and that lines, pipes,
and hoses are not damaged. Before disconnecting fuel
or hydraulic lines, be sure to relieve all pressure.
Make sure that all hydraulic lines are correctly installed
and not crossed or tangled

• Replace
Check the tyres for cuts, bulges and correct pressure.
worn or damaged tyres.
WARNING: Liquid cooling systems build up
pressure as the engine gets hot. Before remov-
• Adjust
Check foot and parking brakes for proper operation.
if required.
ing the radiator cap, stop the engine and let
the system cool.

• for
Before filling up the tank, turn the engine off and wait
it to cool down.

• Check the engine oil level and top up if required.

• described
Carry out all maintenance and adjustment operations
in the proper section of this manual.

• Check that the PTO drive locking devices are latched.

• are
Check that the tractor PTO shield and driveline guards
in place and operating properly.

• Have
Check the tractor and implement hydraulic system.
any leaks or damaged parts repaired or renewed.

• HYDRODYNAMIC SYSTEMS: HOSES Hoses are an

important component in modern machines. Hoses
can change their characteristics in the course of time
because of pressure, vibrations, weather etc. Laws
in force prescribe that hoses are replaced within 6
years from their construction. WE RECOMMEND
COMPLIANCE WITH THIS RULE. [4.1.i]

Fig.2-7

WARNING: When using the auxiliary control

valves, quick couplings may reach high tem-
peratures. Therefore it is mandatory to use
suitable safety gloves when hitching or unhitch-
ing implements connected to these couplings.

Fig. 2-8

2-8 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


Cleaning the tractor
• Keep work surfaces and engine compartments clean.
• Before cleaning the machine, always lower imple-
ments to the ground, engage the first gear, engage
the parking brake, turn the engine off and remove
the key.
• Always use specific PERSONAL SAFETY DEVICES
for each service operation.
• Clean steps, pedals and floor. Remove grease or oil.
Brush away dust or mud. In winter, scrape away snow
and ice. Remember - slippery surfaces are dangerous.
• Avoid using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner etc. when
cleaning plastic parts, e.g.; console, instrument clus-
ter, monitors and gauges etc.
Use ONLY water, mild soap and a soft cloth when
you clean these parts.
Using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner etc., will cause
cracking or deformation of the part being cleaned.
• Remove and put away any tools, buckets, chains and
hooks.
Save the environment
• must
Polluting canals, watercourses or soil is illegal. You
use authorised drains, including communal areas
and workshops provided with suitable containers for
used up oil. If you have any doubts, contact your local
authority for information.
• Check with your local environmental or recycling
centre or your dealer for correct disposal information
on oils, filters etc.
• North American Tractors only:
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) provide informa-
tion about the chemical substances within a product,
safe handling procedures, first aid measures and pro-
cedures to be taken when the product is accidentally
spilled or released. In North America, Material Safety
Data Sheets (MSDS) are available from your dealer.
Before you service your machine, check the MSDS
for each fluid, lubricant, etc., used in this machine.
This information indicates what the risks are and how
to service the machine safely. Follow this information
when servicing the machine.
• Scraping the tractor: the tractor is composed of parts
whose scraping is subject to rules and laws. Therefore
is must be scraped at authorised Centres when it is
no longer used. Do not pollute the environment with
the tractor or its parts.
SAFETY - TRACTOR MAINTENANCE
[4.1.h]
WARNING: With exception of normal service, as ex-
plained in the Maintenance section, all other servicing
or reparations must be carried out by properly skilled
personnel in authorised workshops.
• DO NOT carry out maintenance operations while the
engine is hot or the tractor is moving.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Safety notes
WARNING: Hot parts of the machine are suit-
ably guarded, wherever possible. This does not
exclude, however, that great care should be used
when working on the machine, to avoid burns
or scalding. [4.1.n]
• system,
Before any adjustments or servicing on the electrical
disconnect the battery by operating the mas-
ter disconnect switch (if equipped) or disconnecting
the cables of the battery. See the section concerning
battery servicing.
2
• near
To prevent fire or explosion, do not go with free flames
the battery or cold starting device. Carefully fol-
low the directions for the use of coupling cables to
avoid sparks that may cause an explosion.
• tightened,
Check regularly that all nuts and bolts are securely
specially the nuts in wheel hubs, disks or
rims. Tighten to the prescribed driving torques.
• approved
Check the oil level at regular intervals and top up with
type oil, if required.
• and/or
Check the brakes regularly, top up the reservoir
adjust where necessary. Make sure that the
brakes are evenly adjusted, especially when using
a trailer.
WARNING: When it is necessary to carry out
service, filling up, cleaning or adjustment op-
erations in places at an height above 1.5 m (e.g.
engine coolant reservoir or cab air filters, work
light lamps etc.) a stable and safe mean (e.g. a
ladder) is required to reach the service point.
WARNING: Word and road lights can be very
hot and dangerous if on since a long time. Take
care to avoid contacts that could cause burns.
If work on these lights is needed, turn them off
and let them cool down.
Always use safety gloves suitable for high tem-
peratures.
• Carry out the following operations before any opera-
tion about the tractor: engage the first gear, engage
the parking brake, turn the engine off and remove
the ignition key.
Maintenance operations must be carried out when the
engine is cold. If the maintenance operation must be
carried out while the engine is hot (e.g. when changing
engine oil), start the engine and let it idle for the required
time, then turn it off before the maintenance operation.
If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure
indicated under "How to open the bonnet". In this case
beware the risk of burning and shearing.
Personal safety devices must be worn for each check and
maintenance operation.
2-9
Safety notes

If the tractor must be lifted for servicing, take it to a suit-

ably equipped workshop.
Carry out the following operations before any operation
about the tractor: engage the four-wheel drive, the first
gear and the parking brake and put chocks to the wheels
touching the ground.
Before lifting the tractor, avoid its swinging by means of
wooden wedges applied to the front axle (Fig.2-9a): the
chocks (1 - Fig.2-9a) must avoid any swinging of the tractor.
Use jack lifts of suitable capacity and apply them at the
centre of the front and rear axles (Fig. 2-9a and Fig.2-9b)
paying due attention to weight distribution. [4.1.k]
No decals for the lifting point are applied on the tractor, as
they would be too difficult to apply in the available spaces
and would be all too easily removed or effaced during
normal operation of the tractor. Apply the jack lift to the
lifting points (Fig. 2-10a ) according to the type of opera-
tion and following the safety procedures given before. Fig.2-9a

WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow

hook.

SAFETY - START [4.1.c]

Warn bystanders before starting the engine.
Before starting, walk around the whole tractor and any
attached equipment. Make sure that no one is under, on,
or close to the tractor or equipment. Let other workers Fig.2-9b
and bystanders know you are starting up and don't start
until everyone is clear of the tractor, implements and
towed equipment.

Make sure that everyone, particularly children, is in a

safe position before starting the engine.

Mount and dismount safely.[4.1.e]

Always use 'three point contact' with the machine, and
face the machine when you mount it. Three point contact
means both hands and one foot or one hand and both
feet are in contact with the machine at all times during
mounting and dismounting.

Clean your shoes and wipe your hands before climbing on.
Use handrails, grab handles, ladders or steps (as provided)
Fig.2-10a
when mounting or dismounting.

NEVER use control levers as a hand hold and NEVER step

on foot controls when mounting or dismounting. Before going off the tractor: engage the parking
brake, turn off the engine and take the ignition key out.

DANGER!
NEVER try to go on or off the moving tractor.

2-10 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

SAFE START [4.1.c]

WARNING: Make sure that there is enough ven-
tilation before starting the engine. Never start
the engine in an enclosed space. Exhaust fumes
may cause asphyxiation (Fig.2-10b).

Make sure that the tractor dual brake pedals are locked
together at all times unless you are making turns in the
field which require independent use of the brakes. Make
sure the brakes are properly adjusted so that both brakes
engage at the same time.
2
Adjust the seat and fasten your seat belt (if applicable, Fig. 2-10b
according the description in this book),

Always start the engine from the operator's seat, after

depressing the clutch pedal, with all the levers of transmis-
sion, PTO and auxiliary control valves in neutral.

DANGER: The engine must be started only

with the ignition key and exclusively from
the driver's seat. DO NOT attempt to start the
engine by shorting across the terminals of the
starter motor. If the starter circuit is bypassed to
neutral, the tractor could start with an engaged
gear, with danger of serious injury or death to
bystanders (Fig.2-11).

Follow recommended starting procedures.

Fig. 2-11
Follow the starting procedures recommended in the
Operation section of this Operator Instruction Book. This
includes normal starting, cold starting, and the use of
starting fluids.

Overhaul the controls.

After engine ignition, overhaul all instruments and lights.
Be sure that all are operating correctly. If the machine
does not respond properly to controls, DO NOT use it
until the fault is mended.

Make sure that the starter motor solenoid valve fuse is

always installed.
Fig. 2-12
Starting fluid

WARNING: Do not inject fluids (ether) to make the

engine easier to start in cold weather. The tractor is
equipped with a cold weather starting system (Fig.2-
12).

Before starting the tractor, make sure that there are no

persons or hindrances in its operating range (Fig.2-13).

Fig. 2-13

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-11

Safety notes

DIRECTIONS TO AVOID IMPROPER USE OF THE TRACTOR

WORKING IN SAFETY Before starting the tractor, ensure you have a sure control
over speed and direction controls (Fig.2-14).
WARNING: An unbalanced tractor could over-
turn and cause injury or death. If required,
put ballast weights on their front support and
on rear wheels as described in this section of
the Operation chapter. Ballast weights must be
used according to the manufacturer's directions.
NEVER add extra counterweights to compensate
for an overload. It is better to reduce the load.
WARNING: Keep all parts of your body inside
the operator's compartment while operating
the tractor.

Follow the rules when using your tractor.

Be sure the tractor is ready for the job on hand. Learn the
rated loads by heart and never exceed them. Make sure
that any implement or equipment you are going to use
does NOT exceed the load capacity of your tractor. Check
that the coupling PTO shaft/implement is correct (see the Fig.2-14
Technical Specifications section for mass data).
Take into account that the tractor operates normally on
bumpy, unpaved, rough or sloping surfaces. Operating
conditions might affect the maximum allowed load for •Before beginning work, inspect the area to be worked
to assess which is the best and safest work proce-
transport or towing. dure. Plan your work in order to drive straight forward,
whenever possible. Pay due attention to ditches,
pits, depressions in front of the tractor or on its side,
Working in safety slopes, tree logs and stumps, swamps etc. If you
• and
Operate the controls smoothly, avoid sudden turns
jerky operations with any controls.
are using a front loader, a collapsible implement or
an implement with very high components, check for
any hindrance on your path.
• with your
Keep a firm grip on the steering wheel at all times,
fingers clear of the spokes when driving
the tractor. WARNING: Contact with high voltage lines can
• Always use specific PERSONAL SAFETY DEVICES for
each service operation.
cause death. Should you contact conductor
lines, DO NOT leave the tractor, but drive the
• Make sure you have adequate clearance in all direc-
tions for tractor, cab, safety frame and implement.
tractor or loader so as to go a safe distance to
get rid of the contact (Fig.2-15).
• NEVER play games with a tractor or equipment.
• NEVER attempt to work the controls except from the
operator's seat.
• Before going off the tractor, always disengage the
power take-off, lower links and implements to the
ground, shift the gears lever into neutral, engage the
parking brake, turn the engine off and remove the key.
• Carry out the following operations before leaving the
tractor: engage the first gear, engage the parking


 


brake, turn the engine off and remove the ignition

key. 

As an alternative, if the tractor is to be used as a fixed



power unit, before leaving the tractor shift the gear

to neutral, engage the parking brake and use every
protection or perform every operation necessary to
make sure there are no people within the operating
range of the machine.

Fig.2-15

2-12 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

Beware of other people

• do.
You must be aware of the operations you are about to
NEVER allow unqualified or untrained persons
to operate your tractor. They could be a danger for
themselves or for others.

WARNING: Your tractor is designed to be oper-

ated by one person. DO NOT allow others to
ride on the tractor or the implement (Fig.2-16).
Never allow anyone to ride on the implements
or other equipment including trailers, unless
this use is specifically intended. Such equip-
2
ment must have provision for a safe riding area.
NEVER allow children on a tractor.

WARNING: Make sure you can safely control

speed and driving direction of the tractor before
moving it. Start slowly until you are sure every-
thing is operating regularly. After starting, turn
Fig.2-16
the steering right and left to check for correct
operation. Check steering and brake system
for operation. If differential is locked, DO NOT
operate at high speed or turn the tractor until
the differential lock is disengaged.

• low
Keep others away from your operation area. Never al-
anyone to stand or pass under a raised implement
(Fig.2-17).

• inDOtheNOT lift objects that cannot be contained safely

bucket, get the appropriate attachment. Never
allow anyone to stand on the safety frames or fenders.

• turns,
When using a loader, avoid sudden stops, starts,
or changes of direction. Keep loads as near
as possible to the ground during transport.

• under,
Never stand (or allow anyone else to stand) in front of,
or behind loaded or loading equipment. Never
drive a tractor up to someone standing in front of a
fixed object.

DANGER: NEVER lift a load over anyone (Fig.2- Fig.2-17

17).

• Keep others away from articulation joints, hitches,

drawbar, lift arms, PTO drives, cylinders, belts, pulleys,
and other moving parts. Keep safety guards in place. WARNING: Footstep tractors equipped with
[4.2.e] just a safety frame are never equipped with an
approved sun roof at the factory. If the owner
WARNING: NEVER stand, or allow anyone else
wants to mount a device as protection from sun
to stand between the tractor and implement,
or rain, such device must not be a danger dur-
or between the tractor and trailer, unless the
ing normal operation or in case of overturning.
engine is turned off and the parking brake is en-
Sun roofs normally available on the market are
gaged, a gear is engaged and all attachments or
no protection for the driver against falling or
implements are lowered to the ground. [4.2.m]
penetrating objects.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-13

Safety notes

Risk of overturning
For your safety, it is mandatory that all footstep tractors
are fitted with original Roll Over Protective Structures
and seat belts.

In the event of overturning with a tractor fitted with a cab

or ROPS, hold the steering wheel firmly and DO NOT at-
tempt to leave the seat until the tractor has come to rest.
If the doors are locked, leave the tractor through the duly
indicated emergency exits (Fig.2-18).

IMPORTANT: The safe working practices listed hereunder

concerns only a few cases of overturning risk. The list is
therefore NOT comprehensive of all possible cases.

CAUTIONS to avoid side overturning

• width
Adjust the wheels to the maximum possible track
for the type of work you are doing.

• road.
Lock both brake pedals together before driving on Fig.2-18

• IfReduce your speed according to work conditions.

the tractor is equipped with a front-end loader, carry
the bucket and load as low as possible.

• Reduce your speed before making wide turns.

• run
DON'T pull a load too heavy for your tractor. It could
away on the down slope or the tractor could
jack-knife around a towed load (Fig.2-19)

• gradually.
DON'T brake suddenly. Apply brakes smoothly and

• the
When going down a slope use the throttle to slow
tractor engine and use the same gear you would
use to up the slope. Shift into gear before you start
downhill.

• greater
Engage four-wheel drive (if equipped); this will give
stability.

WARNING: NEVER disengage the clutch or Fig.2-19

attempt to shift gear after you have started
downhill.

• Always go up and down slopes following a straight

upward or downward line.

• trailer.
Do not put any overloads on a front implement or a
Use suitable counter-weights to keep the tractor
stable.(Fig.2-20)

• NEVER use your tractor to round up farm animals.

Fig.2-20

2-14 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

• When operating near ditches and banks, always keep

your tractor behind the shear line (A, Fig.2-22). Avoid
ditches, embankments and river-banks which might
cave in (Fig.2-21).

Fig.2-22

DANGER!
A list of cases and advice to avoid side over-
turning of course cannot be a complete one:
Fig.2-21 it is up to YOU to consider whether the opera-
tion you want use your tractor for involve a
higher overturning risk. In this case the use
of the tractor is forbidden. [4.1.m]
• Ifbutyouslow
need cross a steep slope, do not steer uphill,
down and take a wide turn. Always drive
straight up or down a slope, never across it. When
travelling up or down a slope, keep the heavy end of
the tractor and the implement pointed uphill. (Fig.2-23)

• When driving across a slope with mounted imple-

ments, keep such implements on the uphill side
(Fig.2-24). Do not raise implements. Keep them as
low and near to the ground as possible.

• Avoid crossing steep slopes if possible. If you must

do so, avoid any holes or depressions on the downhill
side. Avoid any stumps, rocks, bumps or raised areas
on the uphill side. (Fig.2-25)

Fig.2-25

Fig.2-24

Fig.2-23

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-15

Safety notes

CAUTIONS to avoid back overturning

IMPORTANT: The safe working practices listed hereunder
concerns only a few cases of overturning risk. The list is
therefore NOT comprehensive of all possible cases.

WARNING: Hitching to the rear axle, or any

other point above the swinging drawbar, can
cause a rear overturn.

• or
DO NOT pull anything using the top link connection,
from any point above the centre line of the rear
axle. Always use an approved drawbar, and only use
a drawbar pin that locks into place.

• cause
High hitching can cause rear overturn, which may
serious injury or death. Hitch loads to the Fig. 2-26
drawbar only.

• when
Use front counterweights to increase tractor stability
towing a heavy load or to counter balance a
heavy rear mounted implement (Fig.2-26).

• itDObeyond
NOT overload your tractor and DO NOT ballast
its capacity. Never add ballast to counter-
weight an overload. Reduce the load (Fig.2-27).

WARNING: Overload is ALWAYS dangerous.

Check the load capacity of your tractor and
NEVER exceed it (Fig.2-28). See the Technical
Specifications section.

Fig.2-27

Fig.2-28

2-16 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

• NOT
Start slowly and increase your speed gradually. DO
rev the engine or drop the clutch. If the tractor
is attached to a heavy load, or immovable object,
improper clutching may cause overturn (Fig.2-30 and
2-31).

• the
If the front part of the tractor begins lifting, disengage
clutch at once (Fig.2-29).

• the
If your tractor is bogged down in mud or frozen to
ground, DO NOT attempt to drive forwards. The
tractor can spin around its rear wheels and overturn
(Fig.2-29). Lift any attached implement and attempt 2
to BACK OUT. If this is not possible, tow it out with
another vehicle.

• you
If you get stuck in a ditch, BACK OUT, if possible. If
must drive on, drive very slowly and carefully.
Fig.2-29
• should
When a trailer is hitched behind a tractor, the tractor
typically be driven in forward gear both uphill
and downhill.

• etc.)
A tractor with a loaded front-end (e.g. loader, bucket
and without a rear trailer should be backed down
the slope and travel forward uphill. Always keep the
loader bucket as low as possible. (Fig.2-31b)

• Never
Always keep the tractor in gear when going downhill.
let the tractor coast with clutch disengaged or
transmission in neutral.

Fig.2-30

Fig.2-31

Fig.2-31b

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-17

Safety notes

Warning:
Dangerous operations [4.2.e][4.2.b]
Safe use of power take off

• and
Make sure that the PTO shield (1) is in its positions
that the not rotating shaft cover (2) is mounted
when the power take-off is not used (Fig.2-32).

To engage the power take-off:

a. Make sure that all safety guards and shields of the
PTO shaft are in place and follow the directions of
the safety decals.
b. Make sure that everyone stands clear of the tractor
before engaging the PTO.
c. Make sure that the implement and the driveline uni-
versal coupling are suitable for the use, provided with Fig.2-32
specific guards, fully mounted and in perfect order.
d. Make sure that the power take-off rotation rate is
suitable for the mounted implement and for the work
to be carried out.
e. The power take off must be engaged only from the
driver's seat, carefully operating the specific control.
f. When the power take off is engaged, never leave
your seat. Before leaving the driver's seat, always
disengage the power take off shifting the control to
the idle position, wait for the drive transmission shaft
and the implement to stop, engage the parking brake
and turn off the engine.

DANGER: Before connecting, disconnecting,

cleaning, adjusting or carrying out any op-
eration on implements or machines operated
by the power take off, always disconnect the
power take off, turn off the engine, wait for the
implement to be stopped and to the ground,
remove the ignition key from the driving posi-
tion (Fig.2-34).

Stationary use of the tractor:

• well
You must always make sure that any bystander are
clear of the tractor and moving implement. Place
the tractor on a flat surface. Engage the power take
off as described previously. Before leaving the tractor,
always shift transmission, reverse shuttle and ranges
to neutral, then engage the parking brake acting with
enough force on the control lever. If soil conditions
so require, block the tractor and implement wheels
with suitable wedges.

DANGER: Do not go near the moving implement

or to the drive shaft, and do not allow other
persons to do so. (Fig.2-33)

2-18 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

• controls
If the front or rear power take off is provided with
outside the driver's seat, besides using the
above mentioned precautions, always operate the
controls from a safe position, far from implement
and drive shaft, standing beside the outer edge of
the front or rear tyres, as the case may be.

• DO NOT use adapters, reducers or extensions that

could extend the coupling shaft to the PTO or the
universal joint outside the protection of the PTO shield. 2
• the
The top link and lift rods must not be extended beyond
point where threads begin to show.
Fig.2-33
DANGER: NEVER attempt to unplug the hydrau-
lic connections, adjust or service an implement
with the engine running or the PTO drive in
operation. There is a great danger of serious
or deadly injuries (Fig.2-34).

• for
When using chemicals, carefully follow any directions
their use, storage and discharge. Also follow the
directions given by manufacturers of equipment for
applying chemicals. Always use specific PERSONAL
SAFETY DEVICES for each service operation.

• inWhen operating under poor visibility conditions, or

the dark, use your tractor field lights and reduce
your ground speed. (DO NOT use your field lights
when travelling on a roadway because rear pointed
white lights are illegal except when reversing and
Fig.2-34
may confuse following drivers).

• setting
Operate your tractor with the wheels set at the widest
possible, consistent with the particular task
you are performing. To adjust wheel settings refer to
Maintenance and Adjustment section.

• rain,
Slow down when working on rough or slippery ter-
and when visibility is reduced by bushes or
foliage.

• DO NOT make sharp turns at high speed.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-19

Safety notes

Implements and attachments [4.5.1.1]

WARNING: Use exclusively front loader ap-
proved by the tractor's manufacturer, with CE
mark and parallelogram type. The installation
and modification of the tractor must be carried
out with the highest technical standards by
specialised workshops with qualified person-
nel. Such workshops must be able to guarantee
and attest the risk analysis provided for in the
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC concerning the
foreseen and predictable use of the tractor with
front loader, in order to carry out all required
adaptations of the tractor. Use the front loader Fig.2-35
and all supplied equipment as prescribed by
the loader's operator manual.

IMPORTANT: Keep the loader's operation manual together

with the tractor's manual, always at hand in the storage WARNING: a tractor provided with 2-post frame
compartment of the tractor. Before driving or operation or cab, cannot be provided with a front loader
your tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual very care- if not also provided with a protection from fall-
fully, with special attention to the chapter concerning ing objects (FOPS). In such conditions there is a
safety rules. residual risk from lack of passive protection from
objects falling from above due to improper use of
DANGER: Use of the front loader and of the trac- the equipment.
tor equipped with front loader, if not correctly
carried out, and handling not secured loads or
with unsuitable equipment constitute a serious To reduce risks, the following precautions should be
danger for the operator and everyone standing used.
by, because of the danger of falling objects. - Only use loader equipped with a load self-leveling
(Fig.2-35) [4.5.a] system, i.e. of the parallelogram type.
- Only use specific implements for the operation to be
• aThree-point hitch and side mounted implements make
much larger arc when turning than towed equipment.
performed. Strictly follow the directions and warnings
Make certain to maintain enough clearance for safe in the loader's operation manual. [4.1.g]
turning. [4.2.b] - Use the machine and the implement with caution,
• To use mounted, semi-mounted and towed equipment
it is required to use exclusively CE marked implements,
drive on plane ground and avoid pits, excavations and
ditches. Do not turn, start or stop abruptly.
after reading their operation and service handbooks - If a front loader is mounted afterwards, it is advis-
carefully, giving maximum attention to risks connected
with their association to the tractor. [4.2.a] able to use a tractor with cab or with a 4-post frame
• If implements are hitched to the tractor by means of
the three-point linkage, check for compliance of the
with FOPS safety system. The loader installer should
carefully analyze all risks and make all required ad-
implements according to category. [4.2.a] justments.
The implement has to be fitted with suitable supports
in order to avoid tipping or accidental shifting during
hitching.
Always check three-directional fastening to the tractor
of the mounted or semi-mounted implement, to avoid
dangerous swinging and shaking during transport and
work that could jeopardize the stability of the tractor-
implement assembly.
• The cardan shaft must be always CE-marked and
suitable to tractor-implement coupling. Follow all
directions of the operation manual, concerning both
the fastening according to connection direction and
safety rules to avoid rotation of protections (chains)
and overlaying of the telescopic tubes. Also keep
articulation angles. [4.2.e][4.2.k]
• Hitch loads to the drawbar only. Towing or attaching
to other locations may cause the tractor to overturn
(Fig.2-36)
• Improper use of the drawbar, even if correctly posi-
tioned, can cause a rear overturn.

Fig.2-36

2-20 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

• trailer.
Check for correct coupling between tow hook and
See the Towing Attachments section.
• more
Use ballast weight as recommended. NEVER add
ballast to compensate a higher load than al-
lowed. Reduce load.
• control
Only North American markets. A safety chain will help
drawn equipment should it be accidentally
separated from the drawbar while transporting. Us-
ing the proper adaptor parts, attach the chain to the
tractor drawbar support or other specified anchor
location. Provide only enough slack in the chain to
permit turning. See your Dealer for a chain with a
strength rating equal to, or greater than the gross 2
weight of the towed machine (Fig.2-37).

Road transport Fig. 2-37

Before operating your tractor on a public road, a number
of precautions must be taken.

• and
Get to know - and comply with - all local bye-laws,
national laws appropriate to your tractor.
• Lock both brake pedals together.
• lock
Raise all implements to their transport position and
them in place.
• configuration.
Place all implements into their narrowest transport

• Disengage the PTO and differential lock.

• slow
Make sure tractor and equipment are equipped with
moving vehicle (SMV) signs or beacon if the law
requires them (Fig.2-38 and 2-39).
• lights
Make sure any required clearance flags or hazard
are in place and in working order.
• safety
Make sure you use a proper safety hitch pin with a
clip retainer.
• and
Clean off all reflectors and road lights, front and rear,
be certain they are in working order.
• the
Three-point hitch and implements jutting out from
sides make a much larger arc when turning than
Fig.2-38 - Use the symbol in force in your country

towed equipment. Make certain to maintain enough

clearance for safe turning.

Highway Code regulations

Before operating your tractor on a public road, a number
of precautions must be taken.

WARNING: DO NOT allow any passengers on the

tractor, trailer or towed equipment.

• Know the route you are going to travel.

• beacon,
Use the prescribed lights or, if required, the rotating
both in the daytime and in the night-time
(Fig.2-39).
• hazard
North America - Use regulation lights and flashing
lights when travelling on road. Fig.2-39
• especially
Use caution when towing a load at transport speeds
if the towed equipment is NOT equipped
with brakes.
• road
Observe all local or national regulations regarding the
speed of your tractor.
• covered
Use extreme caution when transporting on snow-
or slippery roads.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-21

Safety notes

• Wait for traffic to clear before entering a public road.

• have
Beware of blind intersections. Slow down until you
a clear view.
• DO NOT attempt overtaking at any intersection.
• Slow down for turns and curves.
• Make wide, gentle turns.
• Signal your intent to slow, stop or turn.
• (Fig.2-40)
Shift to a lower gear before going up or downhill.

• disengaged
Keep tractor in gear. Never coast with the clutch
or transmission in neutral (Fig.2-40).
• the
Check for correct coupling between power steering on
tractor and corresponding system on the tractor.
• STAY OUT of the path of oncoming traffic.
• asDrive in your correct lane keeping as near to the curb
possible.
• let
If traffic builds up behind you, pull off the road and
it go by.
• be
Drive defensively. Anticipate what other drivers might
doing.
• normal
When towing a heavy load, start braking sooner than
and slow down gradually. Fig.2-40
• etc.).
Watch out for overhead obstructions (bridges, trees

SAFETY - AFTER USE [4.2.c]

Always stop the tractor safely (DO NO park the tractor on

a slope). Engage the parking brake, engage the Park-Lock
(if equipped), disengage the PTO, engage the lowest gear,
lower any implement to the ground, stop the engine and
remove the ignition key BEFORE leaving the driver's seat
(Fig.2-41).

WARNING: To prevent accidents do not park

the tractor with equipment raised.

Fig.2-41

2-22 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


Further notes
The following notes are designed to complete the Opera-
tion and Maintenance Manual to ensure that your tractor
always works safely, reliably and efficiently.
Tractors are mainly designed for hitching implements
that are held by a three-point linkage, for towing them by
the tow-hooks or for driving implements using the PTO.
To obtain the greatest possible towing force, particularly
when using a tractor with dual rear wheels, you should
observe the following rules concerning axle loads and
wheel slip.
If an extra implement is attached, the extra loads must
conform to the specifications given in the Manual or by
your dealer.
1. Load on front axle: four-wheel drive tractors.
A front axle carries normally about 40% of the tractor
on road without implements. Therefore an additional
weight on the front and could be required to give the
front axle proper drive.
If an implement is mounted on the front end of the
tractor, check the weight of the fully loaded implement
by placing the front axle on a scale: the maximum
axle load must be less than the capacity of the front
axle.
Consult this manual or your Dealer to know maximum
load capacity of front axle (max. weight on front axle)
according to tyres mounted on your tractor.
2. Rear axle payload.
The maximum permissible payload for the rear axle
depends on whether or not the tractor is carrying a
weight or towing a load.
When the tractor is only carrying a load, without tow-
ing, the wheels must have sufficient capacity that is
ensured if the tyres are of the exact size and have
the specified number of warps (plies).
In certain conditions, extra weight may be applied to
the rear axle but it is not normally necessary unless
the ground offers very little grip.
Consult this manual or your Dealer to know maximum
load capacity of rear axle (max. weight on rear axle)
according to tyres mounted on your tractor.
When fully loaded, the weight of the tractor must be
less than the maximum permissible ballasted weight
since the tractor cannot be loaded right up to the
maximum static payload for each of the axles, front
and rear, at the same time.
3. Ballast and wheel slip.
Wheel slip must be measured for the tractor to oper-
ate efficiently during tillage.
On normal terrain in good operating conditions, wheel
slip should be between 4 and 10%.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Safety notes
On loose soil, wheel slip can exceed 12%.
If wheel slip is found to be greater than this amount,
proceed with care as operating conditions might
quickly become unstable and cause early tyre wear.
In certain conditions, it might be better to add ballast
in order to reduce wheel slip, but this increases the
workload of the transmission and thus reduces the
working life of the tractor.
This manual will help you ascertain the maximum bal-
last weight that you can use in your normal working
conditions.
2
Using dual wheels (if allowed) or wider tyres, the
tractor will have greater grip but the workload on the
transmission will also be greater, thus reducing the
working life of the tractor.
The only torque limiter in transmission is wheel slip.
4. Front axle lead when four-wheel drive is en-
gaged.
In a 4WD tractor, the ground speed of the front wheels
must be slightly faster than the rear wheels, in order
to ensure traction in any condition.
Therefore the front wheel lead should be between
1% and 4%, but not over 5%
The tyres supplied with your tractor have been checked
for the correct lead of the front wheels, but when you
change them, make sure you use tyres of the same
make and size in order to maintain the same speed
ratio between front and rear wheels.
If tyres of different makes are used, their size and
internal pressure may modify this ground speed ratio,
or advance. This could increase the load on the front
axle and lead to unacceptable operating conditions,
excessive tyre wear and, in extreme conditions, dam-
age to the front axle or transmission.
Always use the correct tyre pressures based on
tractor loading and ground conditions. This ensures
optimum performance greater operator comfort and
overall safety and reduces wear and tear to the drive
train components.
2-23
Safety notes
5. Economy Power take-off
As shown in the Operation and Maintenance Manual,
the economy PTO is a feature that makes it possible
to use the PTO at standard speed using lower RPM
rates to reduce fuel consumption.
The economy PTO does not need to use the maximum
power of the engine, but it is designed to save fuel.
When using the Economy PTO, make sure that the
implement input shaft RPM NEVER exceeds the rec-
ommended RPM for the implement, e.g. max. 610
RPM for a 6 spline shaft (540 RPM), and max. 1170
RPM for a 21 spline shaft (1000 RPM).
6. Working on slopes.
It is important to note that, when working on very steep
slopes, the lubrication conditions in the transmission
may be reduced. This is caused by the oil flowing
towards the front or rear part of the transmission unit.
Special measures and extra lubrication may be re-
quired when using the tractor in a safe condition.
Your dealer will be able to assist you if you expect to
work on slopes of over 15°.
WARNING: Risk of overturning.
Stability and adherence on sloping ground
might easily change according to soil and
weather conditions. Use the tractor with ut-
most care.
7. Remote hydraulic controls.
The hydraulic system of the tractor may be used in
some particular applications to operate the hydraulic
motors.
When using these applications, note that the hydraulic
motors can generate considerable heat and the oil
cooling system of the tractor may not be sufficient
when these high-power hydraulic motors are used.
Some remote applications have an extra cooling sys-
tem. However, every time they are used, make sure
that the oil is cooled and filtered sufficiently in order
to avoid damage to the tractor's hydraulic system.
8. Towing heavy loads (trailers, etc.)
When heavy loads are towed, the road rules in some
countries require a supplementary braking system
(e.g. air or hydraulic trailer brakes).
Consult your dealer for any further requirements there
may be for special applications.
2-24
9. Clutch operation.
Prolonged clutch slipping at high engine speed with
large loads will cause the clutch disc to heat up,
thereby reducing its working life. For optimum life of
the clutch, both the tractor load and the engine speed
rate should be reduced when starting from parking
position.
10. Further instructions for the operator.
The Operation and Maintenance Manual provides
instructions to ensure that the tractor is always used
in safe conditions. Please comply strictly to them.
If your tractor is also driven by other people, make sure
that they are fully aware of these accident prevention
instructions and that they are licensed for driving this
vehicle.
It is forbidden to carry anyone on the outer structure
of the tractor or on mudguards in any circumstances.
This is because the safety frame that protects against
overturning is only designed to protect persons inside
the cab or roll-over protection structure, correctly
seated and wearing properly fastened safety belts.
11. Instructor's seat use
a. An eventual second seat in the cab is only provided
for a driving instructor.
b. The passenger must always fasten the safety belt
when the tractor is moving.
c. It is forbidden to transport any passenger during
normal work operation on the field or on road.
12. Chemical filters for the cab.
Use of a filter with chemical absorbent in air-condi-
tioned cabs can reduce ambient contamination on
the cab.
PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT FOR THE
DRIVER MAY BE HOWEVER NECESSARY WHEN
USING CHEMICAL SUBSTANCES.
Wash the tractor and driver's seat accurately accord-
ing to the directions on the product label.
ALWAYS follow the instructions on the labels of the
chemical substances and on the filters to be used.
13. Battery
For detailed information, see the sections Maintenance
- Electric system.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1
 Safety notes

Tractor stability
Please
Key refer to:
The following procedure describes the conditions for a
proper stability and gives instructions to calculate correct
Tractor's empty weight = trac-
front and rear ballasting. For ballasting, also consult the
tor with standard equipment,
pertaining recommendations in this manual. For maximum
MT fuel at min. level, without liq- This manual
allowed weight in running order, refer to weight and load
uid ballast or blocks, without
data in this manual.
operator and with single tyres

2
RISK OF OVERTURNING!
To prevent machine instability, ALWAYS evalu- MF Empty load on front axle This manual
ate and comply with stability requirements as
given in this manual.
Failure to comply with these directions could
MR Empty load on rear axle This manual
cause injuries or death.

The following procedure and calculations refer to the
tractor on level ground.
RISK OF OVERTURNING!
ALWAYS keep in mind the possible conse-
quences of downhill driving and steep slopes
on tractor's stability. Such conditions can affect
operation, turning and braking performances.
Adjust ballasts and ground speed to ensure a
safe and stabile braking, as well as braking
performances required in critical conditions.
Failure to comply with these directions could
cause injuries or death.
How to calculate tractor stability as suggested by EN
12525.
Distance from front load centre I m p l e m e n t ' s
a of gravity to centre line of the manual or to be
front axle measured
Centre distance
b This manual
Distance from rear axle centre This manual or
c line to bottom attachment to be measured
point of three-point linkage
Distance from centre of grav- I m p l e m e n t ' s
ity of rear load to bottom at- manual or to be
d
tachment point of three-point measured
linkage

Data required to evaluate tractor stability Distance from centre line of To be calculated
rear axle and centre of gravity (according to
e
1. The weight of the implement (seed drills, fertiliser (COG) of MT (tractor's empty formula in the
spreaders, etc.) and of the relative filling material must weight) following pages)
be added to the weight data of the loaded tractor.
Implement's
Weight of front equipment or
2. Ballasting data, either with ballast blocks or liquid BF manual or to be
front ballasts
ballast, on front or rear wheels must be added to MF, measured
MR and MT data.
Weight of rear equipment or I m p l e m e n t ' s
3. If two-wheel trailed implements are mounted, value BR rear ballasts manual or to be
c corresponds to the distance of the rear axle centre measured
line and the attachment point, value d is 0 (zero) and
BR corresponds to the downward load of the trailer MPT Max. allowed weight with
This manual
on its attachment point. max loaded tractor

MPF Max. allowed weight on front

This manual
max axle

MPR Max. allowed weight on rear

This manual
max axle

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-25

Safety notes

Constant parameters Load limits on axle

To be calculated
Min. distribution ratio of loads:
actual load on front axle in condi- Law require- MPF MPF < MPFmax
0.2
tions of loaded tractor/tractor's ment
empty weight MPR MPR < MPRmax

MTP MPT < MPTmax

Min. distribution ratio of loads:
actual load on rear axle in condi- Law require-
0.45
tions of loaded tractor/tractor's ment Calculation of MPF
empty weight
(MPF*b) - BF*(a + b) - (MT*e) + BR*(c + d)

MPF = [BF*(a + b) + (MF*b) - BR*(c + d)]/b MPFmax

Ballasts required on front
To be calculated
Calculation of MPT

Ballasting required on tractor's front end when MTP = BF + MT + BR < MPTmax

BFr
transporting a load on rear end BR
Calculation of MPR
Calculation of the value of BFr
MPR = MPT - MPF < MPRmax
MT * and = MF * b

e = (MF * b)/MT

BR * (c+d) - (MT * e) + (MPF * b) = BFr * (a+b)

MPF > 0-2 * MT

Value MPF must be grater than 0.2 * MT

BFR > [BR*(c+d) - (MF*b) + (0.2*MT*b)] / (a+b)

Ballasts required on rear

To be calculated

Ballasting required on tractor's rear end when

BRr
transporting a load on front end BF

Calculation of the value of BRr

MT * (b - e) = MR * b

BF*a - MT*(b - e) + (MPR*b) = BRr * (b + c + d)

MPR > 0.45 * MT

Value MPR must be grater than 0.45 * MT

BRr > [(BF*a) - (MR*b) + (0.45*MT*b)] / (b + c + d)

2-26 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

Tractor's lifting points

If the tractor is to be lifted for service or repair, this opera-
tions must be performed in a properly equipped work-
shop. NEVER try to lift it in an unsuitable environments
and with unsuitable equipment.
Always lift only the rear or front end, NEVER both ends
at the same time.
Carry out the following operations before any operation
about the tractor: engage the four-wheel drive, the first
gear and the parking brake and put chocks to the wheels
touching the ground.
2
Before lifting the tractor, avoid its swinging by means of
wooden wedges applied to the front axle (1 Fig.2-42): the
chocks must avoid any swinging of the tractor.
Use jack lifts of suitable capacity and apply them at the
centre of the front and rear axles (Fig.2-42 and Fig.2-43)
paying due attention to weight distribution. [4.1.k] Fig.2-42
No decals for the lifting point are applied on the tractor, as
they would be too difficult to apply in the available spaces
and would be all too easily removed or effaced during
normal operation of the tractor. Apply the jack lift to the
lifting points (Fig.2-43) according to the type of operation
and following the safety procedures given before.

WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow

hook.

WARNING: Never work under a vehicle only

supported by rams.

Fig.2-43

Fig.2-44

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-27

Safety notes

TRACTOR ACCESS

Access to tractor with cab [4.1.e] Cab emergency exit [4.1.d]

The rear window of the cab may be used as an emer-
WARNING: Do not jump on or off the tractor. gency exit.
It may cause injuries. Always face the tractor,
use the hand rails and steps, and get on or off
slowly. Maintain a minimum three point contact
to avoid falling (both hands on rails and one
foot on the step, or one hand on the hand rail
and both feet on the steps).

In case the cab should be left quickly in an emergency,

and it would not be possible from the left door, turn the
engine off, and open the rear door by means of the middle
handle (Fig.2-46) to leave quickly.

Fig.2-46

Fig.2-45
Enter or leave the tractor through the left-hand door.

2-28 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

Fuel tank filling [4.1.l] Filling with AdBlue™ or DEF

(Fig. 47a) (Fig. 47b)

WARNING: before filling fuel, always turn off the WARNING: avoid any contacts with your eyes, skin
engine. or garments.

WARNING: Never smoke while refuelling. Keep • If ingested. If a great amount of the fluid is ingested,
away from naked flames. seek immediately medical help. DO NOT induce vom-
iting it not expressly indicated by medical personnel.
Do not administer liquids to an unconscious person.

• In case of contact with your skin, wash with plenty of

water and remove the contaminated garments.. 2
• In case of contact with your eyes, wash immediately
with plenty of water. In case of rash, seek medical help.

• If gases should be inhaled, go immediately in the open

air and seek medical help, if necessary.

• Avoid any contacts of AdBlue™ or DEF with other

chemicals.

• Do not drain AdBlue™ or DEF spills into the sewers.

Fig.2-47a

Fig.2-47b

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-29

Safety notes

Wedges
(if equipped).

DANGER: The tractor could move unexpectedly!

When using implements that require a tractor at
standstill but with running engine, put into neutral
the gearshift, range and reverse shuttle levers, then
engage the parking brake. For greater safety, use
wedges on the wheels.
Failure to comply with these directions could cause
injuries or death.

WARNING : The tractor could move unexpect-

edly! Fig.2-48
Use suitable wedges when the tractor is parked on
steep slopes with engine off.

Place the wedges (Fig.2-48) in front of or behind one of

the rear wheels, according to the direction with respect
to the slope. When the wedge is at rest in its seat, check
that it is secured with its locking hook (Fig.2-49).

WARNING: When installing a wedge under the

wheel, take care not to catch your hands between
the folding metal parts.

Fig.2-49

2-30 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


Risks from noise
Noise Characteristics and Measurement
Noise is a pressure variation in an elastic medium, gener-
ally the air, produced by the vibration of a material body
(source) that determines an undesired and often annoy-
ing acoustic sensation. Noise is mainly characterised by:
sound intensity or level: expresses the entity of the
pressure variation due to the sound wave. Measured in
decibels (dB), it doubles the sound intensity and, thus,
the energy that reaches the ear.
frequency: expresses the number of pressure varia-
tions of the wave per second and is measured in Hertz
(Hz) - high-pitched noises have high frequencies (2000-
4000 Hz or more), while low-pitched noises have low
frequencies (250 Hz or less).
How the risk is evaluated
The higher the sound level and exposure time, the greater
the noise risk will be.
Two parameters are used:
LAeq (Equivalent continuous weighted level A): this
is a sound level measurement that takes into account
noise fluctuations and the varying sensitivity of the ear
to the frequencies: LAeq is measured with a sound-level
meter;
PEL (Personal Exposure Level): this is a measurement
that takes the various noise levels into account along
with the time the worker remains on the individual
machines or working at certain processes: PEL is
calculated mathematically.
Noise Pathologies
Damage To The Hearing
Noise causes hypoacusis or deafness because it destroys
the acoustic receptors, nervous cells able to transform
the mechanical sound vibrations into nervous impulses
that, on reaching the brain, determine the aural sensation.
These receptors are irreplaceable if they are destroyed and
the resulting damage is irreversible: hypoacusis worsens
if exposure to noise continues and does not improve even
if this terminates.
Moreover, it is also bilateral since it can be accompanied
by annoying buzzing and whistling sounds, and by intoler-
ance to loud noise.
The damage is insidious since it proceeds slowly and
unnoticed: in the initial phase, when it is limited to a di-
minished ability to perceive acute sounds (music, bells)
or the spoken voice when there is a background noise,
it can only be detected by means of an audiometric test.
Pulsating noises of great intensity lasting a very short time
are highly damaging since the ear is unable to actuate any
physiological protective measures in time.
Hypoacusis from noise generally arises after several years
of exposure and depends on the PEL (risk almost null
below 80 dBA) and on individual characteristics. It is an
incurable disease: the only effective means of protection
against it is prevention.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Safety notes
Other Effects
Noise does not just determine aural sensation. For levels
exceeding 70 dBA, it causes stress by means of the
cerebral integration centres and determines a specific
neurovegetative reaction responsible for effects that lead
to cardiocirculatory and gastroenteric diseases.
Amongst these, it is worthwhile noting: an increase in
gastric acidity, a decrease in the heart rate, visual range
and reflex speed; a sensation of discomfort and weariness
with an increased sense of fatigue.
These effects are dangerous because they also increase
the risk of accidents.
2
Personal protections against noise
Individual protective equipment attenuates the sound
energy transmitted to the ear through the air.
This equipment is used when dangerous exposure cannot
be avoided in any other way.
There are different types of devices with different attenu-
ating capacities: helmets, ear muffs, ear plugs (Fig.2-50).
Helmets and headsets have the highest dampening ca-
pacity and their use is mandatory when working off road
and noise is over the limits given hereunder.
Earplugs are generally better tolerated and are particularly
useful for prolonged exposition to lower noise levels.
WARNING: It is prescribed that suitable personal hear-
ing protection be used if exposed every day to a noise
level equal or higher than 85 dBA.
Consult the "Technical specifications" section of this
manual in relation to tractor noise measured in in-
stantaneous conditions in compliance with the laws
in force.
WARNING: Do not open the windscreen, the doors or
the side and rear windows during work. The noise in
the cab could rise to such level as to oblige the opera-
tor to wear headsets or other individual protection
against noise.
Fig.2-50
2-31
Safety notes

POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS

All markets (North America excluded)
WARNING: Decals must be always readable. Failing this, ask your Dealer for new ones.

Fig. 2-51 Position on tractors with cab

DECAL 1 DECAL 3

WARNING: Very hot surfaces. WARNING: Danger of entangle-

The hands and fingers could be
scorched. Warning: keep well clear
of hot parts. Keep at a safe distance.
Keep all guards mounted when the
engine is running.
ment and shearing. Keep your
hands well clear of the fan blades
when the engine is running. Al-
ways keep the guards and screens
mounted.

DECAL 2 DECAL 4

WARNING: Danger of entangle- DANGER: Jets of hot steam or hot

ment. Keep your hands well clear
of spinning parts. Take care not to
become entangled in the belts or
pulleys whilst the engine is run-
ning. Keep the guards in place.
water. Protect your face. The radia-
tor will be under pressure when the
engine is hot. Remove the plug with
caution when the engine is cold.

2-32 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes
DECAL 5 DECAL 10

DANGER: Danger of being WARNING: Danger of electric

crushed. DO NOT start shock. Always disconnect the
the engine by shorting negative battery terminal before
across the terminals of removing the battery or before
the starter motor. This servicing the electrical system.
operation will place your
life in danger. Only start
the engine when you are
sitting in the driving seat.

2
DECAL 11

DANGER: The tractor could over-

turn and crush the chest. Hold
firmly on to the steering wheel
if the tractor is overturning. DO
NOT leave your seat or jump off
the tractor.
DECAL 6

WARNING: Electrocution. Always disconnect the negative

battery terminal before removing the cover of the solenoid
and before servicing the electrical system.
DECAL 12

WARNING: Danger of being

DECAL 7 crushed. Always fasten your safety
belt.
WARNING: Very hot surfaces.
The hands and fingers could be
scorched. Warning: keep well clear
of hot parts. Keep at a safe distance.
Keep all guards mounted when the
engine is running.

DECAL 13
Only with electronic hitch.

DECAL 8 DANGER: Risk of impact and seri-

(If Equipped with Ground Speed ous accidents. Keep to one side of
Sensor) the tractor when using external lift
controls. NEVER STAND between
WARNING: DO NOT stare directly tractor and implement - you could
into the real ground speed sensor. be hit by the implement.
Keep yourself at a safe distance from
the sensor unit.

DECAL 14
(If equipped with a front hitch -
DECAL 9 Located near the multi-purpose
control valve)
WARNING: Danger of being crushed.
Climb in and out of the tractor us-
WARNING: Before operating the
ing the left-hand door. If entering
multi-valve read the safety and
or leaving the tractor through the
operating instructions in your
right-hand door, avoid any contact
with control levers. Operator’s Manual.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-33

Safety notes

DECAL 15
DANGER: Danger of entanglement.
Keep well away from spinning shafts.
Take care NOT to remain caught up
by the PTO driveline. Keep all the
guards mounted on the transmission
shafts of the tractor or implements.
DECAL 21
Located near the front hitch (if
equipped).
DANGER: Beware of hanging loads.
Keep at a safe distance to avoid
being hit or crushed.

DECAL 16
Only with electronic hitch.

DANGER: Risk of impact and seri-

ous accidents. Keep to one side of
the tractor when using external lift
controls. NEVER STAND between DECAL 22
tractor and implement - you could Provided by the front PTO maker. (If
be hit by the implement. Equipped with Front PTO)

WARNING: Keep yourself at a safe

distance. Speed (rpm) and spin-
ning of the front
PTO shaft.

DECAL 19

WARNING: Take care. Consult

the operation and maintenance
manual for information about
safety and how to use the tractor.

Decal 23

WARNING: Use individual protections during work, such

as overalls, heavy duty gloves and safety footwear.

DECAL 20
WARNING: Danger of
damaging tractor com-
ponents and the circuit of
the suspended front axle
in particular, if installed.
Before servicing the trac-
tor, it is essential for you
to have read through the
warnings and the instruc-
tions in the operation and
maintenance manual.
Decal 24
WARNING: Tractors with cabs have no protection
against dangerous substances, but have a protection
against dust (protection level 2). If the tractor is used
to spray phytosanitary products or chemicals gener-
ally thought of as hazardous to health, the operator
must wear individual protections (mask) suitable to
the harmfulness of the actual product used.

2-34 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

Decal 25 Decal 29
(If the tractor is equipped
WARNING: General warning. Turn off the with instructor seat).
engine and remove the ignition key be-
fore any servicing operations and before WARNING: The seat for an
getting off the machine for any reason. instructor (with a seat belt
that must be worn at all
times) may be occupied
only when driving on road,
but not when working in
the field. 2

Decal 26

WARNING: Danger of liquid under pres-

sure being ejected from hydraulic circuits.

Decal 30
Only for the Italian market - Only 4WD tractors

WARNING: The four-wheel drive MUST be engaged

Decal 27 before the parking brake is operated.
WARNING: Emergency exit indication.

Decal
Used only when the fire extinguisher is
mounted (supplied as kit).

WARNING: General warning. Position

where the fire extinguisher and its sup-
port are placed. The fire extinguisher
must be in this position during work.

Decal 28

WARNING: Danger of being crushed. If you leave the

tractor while the engine is running ALWAYS put the
transmission into NEUTRAL. To put the transmission in
NEUTRAL, press and hold both gear selection switches
down (for approximately 3 seconds).

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-35

Safety notes
POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS
North American tractors

WARNING: Decals must be always readable. Failing this, ask your Dealer for new ones.

DECAL 1 DECAL 2
WARNING Warning: Very hot sur- WARNING
faces. Keep your hands well
Do not remove any clear of the fan blades
guards to avoid injuries. when the engine is run-
ning.

Beware hot parts

Keep hands clear of fan

and belts while engine
is running.

To avoid personal in-

jury, keep all shields,
WARNING
covers and guards in
place while engine is High pressure steam and
running. hot water.
Remove filler cap with
extreme care.

DECAL 3

High pressure and hot water. Remove the plug with caution
when the engine is cold.

2-36 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Safety notes

DECAL 8
DANGER WARNING
Serious personal injury
Choose a suitable PTO speed
Start only from seat or machine damage for the use of the implement.
with transmission and may result from over-
PTO in neutral. speed of PTO driven
equipment.
Starting in gear kills. Select tractor PTO
speed to match imple-
ment specified speed.
DECAL 4 Do not operate PTO

2
Risk of being crushed. ONLY start the engine when you above recommended
maximum speed.
are sitting in the driver's seat.
Nominal Maximum
540 630
1000 1170

WARNING
Remove negative ca- DECAL 9
bles from batteries WARNING Only with electronic hitch.
before removing sole-
noid cover and before
servicing the electrical Keep at a safe distance from
system. the tractor when using exter-
nal lift controls.
DECAL 5

Danger of electric shock. Always disconnect the negative

cable from the battery before carrying out any repairs on Stand clear when
the electrical system. using switch to
move 3-point
hitch.
DANGER

Shield Explosive Avoid sparks Sulphuric

eyes gas and flame acid

EXPLOSIVE GASES POISON causes severe burns

Always shield eyes and face from bat-
tery. Cigarettes, flames or sparks could
cause battery to explode.
Do not charge or use booster cables or
adjust post connections without proper
instructions or training.
DECAL 6
Contains sulphuric acid. Avoid contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In event of accident flush with water
and call a physician immediately.
Keep out of reach of children.
WARNING
Serious personal injury or ma-
chine damage may result from
overspeed of PTO driven equip-
ment.

Never use the 1000 rpm setting

Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep clear of sparks and with the 6 spline shaft installed.
naked flames.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.

DECAL 10
DECAL 7
WARNING A PTO used at a speed over the max. allowed might cause
Always fasten your safety belt. DO
serious accidents.
NOT leave your seat if the tractor
overturns.

USE SEAT BELT.

Keep seat belt adjusted snugly

DECAL 11
(If equipped with a front hitch - Located near the multi-
purpose control valve)
Do not jump if
tractor tips Read the Operator's Manual carefully before using.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 2-37

Safety notes

DECAL 15
CAUTION
WARNING WARNING: Consult the opera-
Personal injury could result from PTO driveline separation. tion and maintenance manual
1. Drawbar supplied provides standard distance “A”. Do not change. for information about safety and
PTO SHAFT SIZE DISTANCE “A” how to use the tractor.
540 35mm (3.51 cm) 356mm (35.56 cm)
1000 35mm (3.51 cm) 406mm (40.64 cm) Read the operator instruc-
tion Book for safety infor-
mation.
2. Three-point link distance “C” and mounter implement distance “D” may not be standard.
Measure distance “B” over complete lift range for Fasten your seat belt be-
tractor and implement combination. Select driveline fore tractor operation.
length to ensure that driveline will not bottom out at
minimum distance “B” and will have sufficient overlap Start engine only when
at maximum distance. seated in operator’s seat.

Make sure everyone is

clear of tractor and equip-
DECAL 12 ment before starting en-
gine or operation.
Warning: Separation of the PTO drive line might cause serious
Keep all shields, covers
accidents. Adjust the connections carefully. and guards in place and
stay away from moving
parts while engine is run-
ning.

Place transmission shift

lever in neutral and apply
parking brake before us-
ing external 3-point hitch
controls.

Apply parking brake,

lower equipment, stop
engine and remove key
DANGER DANGER before leaving the tractor
unattended.

Wait for all movement to

stop before servicing trac-
tor or equipment.

Securely support or block

Pull only from ap-
proved drawbar or
lower links of 3-point
linkage at horizontal
position or below.
lifted implements which
must be in the raised
position for servicing or
adjustment.
Rotating driveline con-
tact may cause serious Couple brake pedals to-
gether for road travel.
injury or death.
Keep all driveline, tractor Use flashing warning
and equipment shields in lights and SMV emblem
when on public roads,
place during operation.
except where prohibited
by law.

DECAL 13 Always drive with care and

attention.
Only use an approved drawbar to tow implements.
Danger of entanglement: Keep well away from spinning
shafts.

DECAL 14

Use the turn indicator to

signal a change in your drive
direction.
DECAL 16
Provided by the front PTO maker. (If equipped with front
PTO).

WARNING: Keep yourself at a safe distance. Speed (rpm)

and spinning of the front PTO shaft.

2-38 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab

Section 3
Controls - Cab 3

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-1

Controls - Cab
CAB
All non-metallic components within the cab comply with the ISO 3795 standard.
The cab is approved according to OECD codes concerning ROPS test (protection against overturning) and safety belts.

Cab
The cab is made of steel sections and is fastened to the
tractor by means of a double system of rubber dampers
(silent block) protecting the driver's seat both from vibra-
tions and from engine noise. The noise peak is therefore
limited to low values, for greater comfort for the operator.

Doors (1)
Both doors can be opened both from the inner and outer
side, and kept open by dampening cylinders. Both doors
are provided with a lock with key.

Rear window (2)

Release the rear window lock and turn the handle (3)
counterclockwise to open it. The window is kept open
by dampers.

Field lights
The cab is provided with front (4) and rear (5) field lights
to improve visibility when working at night. The on/off
switches are in the cab.

Revolving beacon (6)

The revolving beacon is mounted on the front of the cab
roof. As an option, a second revolving beacon can be
mounted on the other side of the cab. Both beacons are
controlled by a switch in the cab.

WARNING: Do not open the windscreen, the doors or

the side and rear windows during work. The noise in
the cab could rise to such level as to oblige the opera-
tor to wear headsets or other individual protection
against noise.

NOTE: See the cab "Maintenance" section for filter use

and maintenance.

3-2 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
DRIVER'S SEAT
Various types of seat can be fitted: The type of seat is dictated by market requirements and by the tractor's specifications.

WARNING: Danger! Danger of losing control.

DO NOT adjust the seat while the machine is running. All adjustment to the seat must be carried out while
the machine is at standstill and with the parking brake engaged. Failure to comply with these directions
could cause injuries or death.

We recommend a seat adjustment that guarantees a safe driving even in harsh conditions. To avoid dangers, comply
with the following directions:

WARNING: The driver's seat must be mounted or repaired only by skilled personnel.

Check at regular intervals that the retainer screws are perfectly tightened and that the adjustment controls are normally
operating, to guarantee safety and stability during work.

The driver's seat is provided with controls to adjust its suspension, height and distance from the controls. Therefore it is
possible to choose the adjustment position most suitable and change it even during work.
3

Pneumatic seat (Fig. GL1)

1. Adjustment to operator's weight
2. Seat height adjustment
3. Seat suspension adjustment (*)
4. Seat distance adjustment
5. Cushion tilt adjustment (*)
6. Seat depth adjustment (*)
7. Tilt adjustment of armrests (*)
8. Height adjustment of armrests (*)
9. Head restraint
10. Compartment for manuals
11. Manual or electric adjustment of the lumbar support
(*) (**)

12. Back rest adjustment (**)

13. Longitudinal shock absorber (*)

(*) if installed
(**) according to model

Fig. GL1

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-3

Controls - Cab
1. Adjustment to operator's weight (Fig. GL2)
The seat should be adjusted to the operator's weight, with
the operator sitting in it.
For this adjustment, pull out or push the lever (1) until the
weight indicator (2) turns green.

NOTE: To avoid any health hazards, the adjustment to

the operator's weight should be checked and eventually
adjusted before beginning the use of the tractor.

Fig. GL2

2. Seat height adjustment

(Fig. GL3)
WARNING: Check that the weight indicator (2) is green;
otherwise, carry out the adjustment.

To adjust the height of the seat, pull up or push down

the lever (1).

Fig. GL3

3. Seat suspension adjustment (if installed)

(Fig. GL4)
The seat suspension can be adjusted to the ground condi-
tions (road or rough terrain) and to the operator's weight.

To adjust the reaction of the seat suspension, turn the

lever to the required position and release it.

Pos. 1 = soft suspension

Pos. 2 = average suspension
Pos. 3 = hard suspension Fig. GL4

Position 2 is recommended for operators of average body

weight.

3-4 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
4. Seat distance adjustment
(Fig. GL5)
Lift the lever (1) to adjust the seat distance.
1
After the adjustment, release the lever (1) to lock the seat.
The lever must snap into its correct position with a click-
ing sound. The seat must remain blocked after the lever
(1) has been released.

WARNING: do not lift the lock lever with your leg or calf.

Fig. GL5

5. Cushion tilt adjustment (if installed) 3

(Fig. GL6)
1
Pull up the left-hand handle (1) and at the same time apply
or release pressure on the seat's cushion until the required
position is found.
Release the left-hand handle (1) to lock the tilt.

Fig. GL6

6. Seat depth adjustment

(if installed) (Fig. GL7)

Pull up the right-hand handle (1) and at the same time

shift the seat's cushion to and fro until the required posi- 1
tion is found.
Release the right-hand handle (1) to lock the position.

Fig. GL7

7. Tilt adjustment of armrests

(if installed) (Fig. GL8)

To adjust the tilt of the armrests (1), turn the knob (2) 1
under the armrest.

Turn the knob: 2

• to the outer side of the seat to tilt the armrest up,
• to the inner side of the seat to tilt the armrest down.

Fig. GL8

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-5

Controls - Cab
8. Height adjustment of armrests
(Fig. GL9)
The armrests can be tilted back and adjusted in their
height as required by the operator.

To adjust the height of the armrests:

• Remove the protective panel (1). 1
• Loosen the nut behind the panel.
• Raise or lower the armrests to adjust their height (5
positions are possible).
• Tighten the nut and fit the protective panel (1) back
again. Fig. GL9

9. Head restraint
(Fig. GL10)
Pull up or push down the head restraint to adjust its height
with pre-set increments.
Pull the head restraint vigorously until the stop at end of
travel is overcome.

Push the head restraint back or fro to tilt it as required.

Fig. GL10

10. Compartment for manuals

(Fig. GL11)
The compartment is behind the back rest.
To open the compartment, pull the tab (1) up and pull
back the panel (2).

IMPORTANT: Keep with care this operation and mainte-

nance manual on your tractor. Before driving or operating
your tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual carefully,
with special attention to the chapter concerning safety
rules. Keep the manual always ready at hand in the manual
storage compartment for easier reference. If the tractor is
used also by persons that do not understand the language
of the Country, the employer (or the machine user) must
translate the operating instructions in the language under-
stood by these operators. Fig. GL11

3-6 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
11. Manual or electric adjustment of the lum-
bar support (if equipped) (depending on model)
1 A
(Fig. GL12)
The lumbar support can be adjusted to increase comfort
and operator's efficiency.

Manual adjustment (Fig. GL12-A)

Turn the knob (1) to the left or to the right to reduce or

increase the curve in the back rest cushion.

Electrical adjustment (Fig. GL12-B) B

The lumbar support can be adjusted individually in the
lower and higher section of the back rest by means of
the switches (1) and (2). 3
On each switch, press “+” to increase or “-” to decrease
the curve of the lumbar support.

The maximum curve is reached when the back rest

reacts no more when pressing “+”, in this case release
the switch. Fig. GL12

12. Back rest adjustment

(according to model) (Fig. GL13)

Pull up the lever (1) - the position depends on model.

Tilt the back rest to and fro to the required position.
Release the lever (1) to lock the back rest.
1

Fig. GL13

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-7

Controls - Cab
13. Longitudinal shock absorber (if installed)
(Fig. GL14)
A
In certain conditions (e.g. when using a trailer), the longi-
tudinal shock absorber should be enabled to cushion any
impacts in the drive direction.

Shift the lever (A) to:

• Position 1 = longitudinal shock absorber OFF
• Position 2 = longitudinal shock absorber ON

The lever (1) should snap into the required position when it
is shifted to the position 1. To this purpose, the seat should Fig. GL14
be pushed back until it snaps into position ad is locked.

3-8 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Deluxe pneumatic seat (Fig. EL1)
1. Adjustment to operator's weight and seat height
2. Seat suspension adjustment
3. Seat swiveling
4. Longitudinal shock absorber
5. Longitudinal shock absorber
6. Seat distance adjustment
7. Cushion tilt adjustment
8. Seat depth adjustment
9. Tilt adjustment of armrests
10. Height adjustment of armrests
11. Head restraint
12. Compartment for manuals
13. Control for seat heating and ventilation
14. Lumbar support adjustment
15. Back rest adjustment
16. Seat safety fuse
3

Fig. EL1

1. Adjustment to operator's weight and seat

height (Fig. EL2)
The adjustment to the operator's weight is carried out
automatically as soon as the operator is seated. No further 1
operation is required.

Pull or press the handle (1) to adjust the seat to the re-
quired height. If the adjustment reaches the top or bot-
tom end of travel, the height is adjusted automatically to
ensure a minimum springiness during drive.

Release the handle (1) as soon as the required height or Fig. EL2
the top end of travel is reached.

NOTE: To avoid damaging the compressor, it should not

be operated longer than 1 minute.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-9

Controls - Cab
2. Seat suspension adjustment
(Fig. EL3)
The seat suspension can be adjusted to the ground condi-
tions (road or rough terrain) and to the operator's weight.

To adjust the reaction of the seat suspension, shift the

lever to the required position and release it.

Pos. 1 = soft suspension

Pos. 2 = average suspension
Pos. 3 = hard suspension
Fig. EL3
Position 2 is recommended for operators of average body
weight.

3. Seat swiveling
(Fig. EL4-A, Fig. EL4-B)
WARNING: Danger! Danger of losing control. 1
DO NOT use the lever that blocks the seat
swiveling while driving.

Operation (Fig. EL4-A)

Pull the lever (1) up to enable seat swiveling.
The seat is now free to swivel to the right or left with 10°
increases up to end of travel.
After adjustment of the seat, operate the locking lever
that should snap into the required position with a click- Fig. EL4-A
ing sound.

Operation (Fig. EL4-B)

Pull the lever (2) up to enable seat swiveling.
The seat can be swiveled to 10°, 20°, 180°, 190° to the
right or to the left.
After adjustment of the seat, operate the locking lever
that should snap into the required position with a click-
ing sound.

NOTE: if the "free swivel" option is available, the lever

remains released until it is pushed down.
2
IMPORTANT: the correct driving position is with the seat
in central position.
Fig. EL4-B

3-10 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
4. Longitudinal shock absorber (if provided - de-
pends on model) (Fig. EL5)

In certain conditions (e.g. when using a trailer), the longi-

tudinal shock absorber should be enabled to cushion any A
impacts in the drive direction.

Shift the lever (A) to:

• Position 0 = horizontal shock absorber OFF
• Position 1 = horizontal shock absorber ON

Fig. EL5

5. Longitudinal shock absorber (depends on model)

(Fig. EL6)
3
The longitudinal shock absorber is always enabled and
there are no controls to disable it.

Fig. EL6

6. Seat distance adjustment

(Fig. EL7)
Lift the lever (1) to adjust the seat distance.

After the adjustment, release the lever (1) to lock the seat. 1
The lever must snap into its correct position with a click-
ing sound. The seat must remain blocked after the lever
(1) has been released.

WARNING: do not lift the lock lever with your leg or calf.

Fig. EL7

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-11

Controls - Cab
7. Cushion tilt adjustment
(Fig. EL8)
Pull up the left-hand handle (1) and at the same time apply
or release pressure on the seat's cushion until the required
position is found.
Release the left-hand handle (1) to lock the tilt.
1

Fig. EL8

8. Seat depth adjustment

(Fig. EL9)
Pull up the right-hand handle (1) and at the same time
shift the seat's cushion to and fro until the required posi-
tion is found.
Release the right-hand handle (1) to lock the position. 1

Fig. EL9

9. Tilt adjustment of armrests

(if equipped) (Fig. EL10)

To adjust the tilt of the armrests (1), turn the knob (2) 1
under the armrest.

Turn the knob:

• to the outer side of the seat to tilt the armrest up,
• to the inner side of the seat to tilt the armrest down. 2

Fig. EL10

3-12 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
10. Height adjustment of armrests
(if equipped) (Fig. EL11)

The armrests can be tilted back and adjusted in their

height as required by the operator.

To adjust the height of the armrests:

• Remove the protective panel (1).
• Loosen the nut behind the panel. 1
• Raise or lower the armrests to adjust their height (5
positions are possible).
• Tighten the nut and fit the protective panel (1) back
again. Fig. EL11

3
11. Head restraint
(Fig. GL12)
Pull up or push down the head restraint to adjust its height
with pre-set increments.
Pull the head restraint vigorously until the stop at end of
travel is overcome.

Push the head restraint back or fro to tilt it as required.

Fig. EL12

12. Compartment for manuals

(Fig. EL13)
The compartment is behind the back rest.
To open the compartment, pull the tab (1) up and pull
back the panel (2).

IMPORTANT: Keep with care this operation and mainte-

nance manual on your tractor. Before driving or operating
your tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual carefully,
with special attention to the chapter concerning safety
rules. Keep the manual always ready at hand in the manual
storage compartment for easier reference. If the tractor is
used also by persons that do not understand the language
of the Country, the employer (or the machine user) must
translate the operating instructions in the language under-
stood by these operators. Fig. EL13

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-13

Controls - Cab
13. Control for seat heating and ventilation
(Fig. EL14)
To enable or disable seat heating and ventilation, move A
the switch (A) to:
• Pos. 0 = seat heating and ventilation OFF
• Pos. 1 = seat heating ON (ventilation OFF)
• Pos. 2 = seat ventilation ON (heating OFF)

Fig. EL14

14. Lumbar support adjustment

(Fig. EL15)
The lumbar support can be adjusted to increase comfort
and operator's efficiency.

The lumbar support can be adjusted individually in the

lower and higher section of the back rest by means of
the switches (1) and (2).

On each switch, press “+” to increase or “-” to decrease

the curve of the lumbar support.
Fig. EL15
The maximum curve is reached when the back rest
reacts no more when pressing “+”, in this case release
the switch.

15. Back rest adjustment

(Fig. EL16)
Pull up the lever (1).
1
Tilt the back rest to and fro to the required position.
Release the lever to lock the back rest.

Fig. EL16

3-14 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
16. Seat safety fuse
(Fig. EL17)
If any electric control of the seat is not operating, check
the safety fuse (1) of the seat.

Looking toward the driving direction, the fuse is behind

the seat suspension at the top left, covered by the sus-
pension bellow.

Remove the bellow over the fuse and replace the blown 1
fuse with a new one (20 ampere).
Fig. EL17
WARNING! Danger!
DO NOT bypass the blown fuse by directly
connecting the electric system of the seat

3
to the tractor's system danger of fire due to
electric overload.
DO NOT replace the fuse with a higher capac-
ity because electric overloads could not be
prevented with high fire risk.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-15

Controls - Cab
Seat belt

WARNING: Always securely fasten your safety

belt. Your tractor is equipped with a ROPS
for your protection. The seat belt can help
insure your safety if it is properly used and
maintained. Never wear the belt in a twisted
condition or pinched between the seat struc-
tural members.

Adjust the seat to your requirements.

Lean with your back straight against the back rest. Pull the
seat belt completely across your body and push the metal
eye (1) into the latch assembly (2) until it locks.

1
2

Adjust the position of the seat belt as low on your body

as possible.

To release the seat belt, push the button (3) on the latch
assembly.

IMPORTANT: From time to time, carefully inspect the seat

belt and replace it if worn or damaged.

3-16 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Instructor seat
Fig. SP1, SP2

WARNING: Avoid injuries!

The passenger seat must be used only when
training a new operator or when a service
technician carries out troubleshooting. Use of
this seat is not allowed to anyone, particularly
children. Keep cab doors closed. Always wear
the seat belt. Failure to comply with these direc-
tions could cause injuries or death.

The seat (1) must be used only by an instructor to train

new operators or service technicians for diagnostics and
troubleshooting. The passenger in this seat must always
wear fastened seat belts (2). Fold the seat when it is not
in use.
3
This seat MAY NOT be used to transport children.

When the instructor's seat is occupied, the following

precautions must be taken:

• Tractor should be driven at a slow speed and on

level ground.
• Avoid quick starts or stops.
• Avoid sharp turns.
• The left-hand door MUST be closed at all times, while
the tractor is in motion.

Please read attentively the "Safety Note" section in this

manual for further information.
Fig. SP1
WARNING: A frequent cause of personal injury
or death is persons falling off and being run
over. DO NOT permit others to ride, except on
the designated passenger seat.
The closed seat is folded into the cab lining, on the left-
hand side. Pull down and unfold it to its maximum exten-
sion to use it (Fig. SP2).

WARNING: The seat for an in-

structor (with a seat belt that
must be worn at all times)
may be occupied only when
driving on road, but not when
working in the field.

Fig. SP2

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-17

Controls - Cab
Operator present sensor
The seat cushion acts as a switch.

WARNING: Do not tamper with this compo-

nent in any way.

WARNING: if the tractor is not correctly used,

the operator is informed by the sound of a
buzzer and a warning symbol on the instru-
ment cluster.

For a correct use, the operator must be seated in the

driver's place. As soon as there is no load on the seat given
by the operator's weight, a buzzer sounds and a warning
symbol (1-Fig. PO2) is shown on the instrument cluster.



Fig. PO1

Fig. PO2

In all versions of this tractor, the buzzer sounds each time

the operator leaves the driver's seat while the engine is
running whiteout engaging the parking brake and putting
the gearshift lever in neutral.

Whenever the operator leaves the driver's seat with the

engine running and the tractor not moving, the hydraulic
clutches of forward and reverse are disabled. If the tractor
is on the move, the system inhibits the same clutches as
soon as the neutral position of the reverse shuttle lever
is sensed. In this case, the transmission goes automati-
cally to Neutral.

The operator must then return to his/her seat and the

reverse shuttle shifted to Neutral in order to get the trac-
tor started again.

3-18 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Logic of the operator's seat switch

• With key turned to OFF, released parking brake lever:

Operator Indicator on instrument cluster Buzzer Instrument cluster

display
(1-Fig. PO2)
Not seated Flashing Active for 10 seconds No

• With key turned to ON, released parking brake lever, engine off:

Operator Indicator on instrument cluster Buzzer Instrument cluster

display
(1-Fig. PO2) 3
Not seated Flashing Active for 5 seconds Active

• With ignition key turned to ON, engine running:

In the cases given in the following table, the indicator on the instrument cluster and the buzzer are active until
the conditions for a correct use of the tractor are restored.

Operator Position Shuttle Lever Parking Brake Warning Buzzer Park Brake Warning Light
Position

Seated Neutral Applied OFF ON

Seated Neutral Released OFF OFF

Seated Direction selected Applied OFF ON

Seated Direction selected Released OFF OFF

Not seated Neutral Applied OFF ON

Not seated Neutral Released ON Flashing

Not seated Direction selected Applied ON ON

Not seated Direction selected Released ON Flashing

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-19

Controls - Cab
CONTROLS
Controls on the left-hand side of the
instrument turret
1. Shuttle control lever
(Fig. CC1)

A - Forward direction

N - Neutral Selected

R - Reverse Direction

NOTE: For information about operation of the transmis-

sion, refer to the description of the instrument cluster in
"Instruments and controls".
Fig. CC1

2. Lamp Switch
(Fig. CC1, CC2)

A. All lights are OFF.

The high beams can be operated in Flash mode.

B. Front position lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps

and the blue "ambient" lamp on the cab ceiling just
over the armrest will illuminate. The backlighting also
will come on to illuminate the instrument cluster and
all switches in the cab.

C. Front position lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps

and the blue "ambient" lamp on the cab ceiling over
the armrest will illuminate. The backlighting also will
come on to illuminate the instrument cluster and all
switches in the cab. The headlights will also come up.
Fig. CC2
NOTE: in both B and C positions the switch operates the
backlighting of all switches in the cab.

3-20 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
3. Battery master disconnect switch
(Fig. CC1, CC3)

The master disconnect switch disconnects the battery

from the tractor electric system.
The master disconnect switch (3) can only be activated
with the ignition key in the OFF position.

WARNING: When the engine is running, the battery

cannot be disconnected in any way.

This switch has two positions:

●● Position A: battery connected, all systems are supplied
●● Position B: battery disconnected, no system is supplied

For a correct use of the battery disconnector switch,

refer to the "Operation" section, "Battery disconnector
switch" chapter.
Fig. CC3
3

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-21

Controls - Cab
1. Light switch lever
(Fig. CC4)

Turn Indicators
To use the turn indicator blinkers, move the lever (1) to
the position:

A. right turn indicator on.

B. left turn indicator on.

When the indicator is active, also the relative lamp on the

instrument cluster is flashing.

NOTE: The lever (1) has a self-cancelling function when

released. At the end of the steering, the turn indicator
stops flashing.

Hi/Low beams Fig. CC4

With the switch (2 - Fig. CC4B) in the C position, pull the
lever (1) toward the steering wheel (position C) and release
to flash the high beams (blue indicator light on the instru-
ment cluster). With the switch (2 - Fig. CC4B) in position
C, push the lever (1) down to position D to operate the
high beams as a fix light.

High beams flasher

In all three positions of switch 2 (pos. A, B, C), it is pos-
sible to flash the high beams by lifting and then releasing
the lever (1).

Horn
Press the end of the switch to operate.

Fig. CC4B

3-22 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Front Right Hand Controls
1. Hazard light switch
(Fig. CC5)

When it is activated, the built-in lamp in the button is

flashing intermittently.

In North American versions, when the button (1) is acti-

vated, the lamp in the button remains continuously lit.

NOTE: When driving on roads, it may be required that the

hazard lights button remains activated. Refer to the laws
in force in your Country.

2. Ignition switch Fig. CC5

(Fig. CC5)
3
The key switch has four positions as follows: 4. Windscreen wiper switch
(Fig. CC5)

OFF Position - Turn from On/Run posi-
tion anticlockwise to stop the tractor. Washer
The key can only be removed when it Press the end of the switch to operate.
is in this position.

Front windscreen wiper

Accessory Position - The radio can
Lever (4):
be operated in this position and
A. pulled toward the operator; INTERMITTENT ON
some of the cluster displays, also
B. in middle position: OFF
used for programming the digital
C. pushed toward the windscreen: CONTINUOUS ON
instrument cluster.

A B C

Start Position - Turning the key fully

clockwise against spring pressure
the starter motor is energised in addi-
tion to the circuits already mentioned
above. 

Rear windscreen wiper

Lever (4):
D. pushed down: OFF
E. in middle position: ON
3. Steering column adjustment lever F. pushed up: rear window washer ON
(Fig. CC5)

See page 3-35. F

D


P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-23

Controls - Cab
Right-hand console controls
(Fig. CC6, CC7)

1. Cigarette lighter

2. PTO speed selector lever (rpm)

3. PTO type selector lever (standard - eco)

4. Creeper engagement disengagement lever

Fig. CC6 - Version without creeper

Fig. CC7 - Version with creeper

3-24 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
1. Auxiliary power socket (12 V) (Fig. CC8)

2. ISO socket (to standard ISO 11786) (Fig. CC8)

The socket (2) is mounted in the rear of the cab on the
right-hand side. The socket (2) allows for exchange of
information between an implement (e.g. a controller) and
the tractor according to international standard ISO 11786.

Signals on pins of the ISO socket (2 - Fig. CC8)

Fig. CC9

1. Real ground speed (detected by radar) Cab rear right hand corner
2. Nominal ground speed (detected on wheels)
3. PTO shaft speed
4. Engagement/disengagement of rear 3-point linkage
(hitch) See the following “Note”.
5. Rear three-point hitch position (hitch)
6. 5a supply
7. Common connection to ground
3

NOTE: the threshold to which this outlet switches is the

same as the Auto PTO engagement threshold pre-set on
the armrest to engage the PTO automatically when the
hitch is above or under the pre-set threshold.
External near trailer socket
The engagement threshold of Auto PTO can be set by the
operator by means of the relative button in the armrest.
Refer to the “Operation” section in this manual.

Only with front hitch version

Fig. CC8

Fig. CC9

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-25

Controls - Cab
Controls in cab roof

Fig. CC10

1. Radio. See page 3-42.

2. Front field lights switch
3. Rear field lights switch
4. Revolving beacon switch (optional)
5. Additional Front Hitch Headlights (optional)
6. Rear view mirrors heating switch (optional)
7. Electrical adjustment of the rear view mirrors
(optional)

NOTE: backlighting of switches 2 to 7 is white.

3-26 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Front field lights switch
(Fig. CC11)

Pos. A: all front field lights on the roof are on (6 lights

in total).
Pos. 0: all front field lights on the roof are off.
Pos. B: only the following field lights are on:
• 2 outer front lights on the roof
• 2 front lights on the hand rails
• 2 front field lights on bonnet Pos. A

B
3
Pos. 0

Pos. B
Fig. CC11

Rear field lights switch

(Fig. CC12)

Pos. A: all rear field lights on the roof are on (4 lights in

total)
Pos. 0: all rear field lights on the roof are off.
For North American markets, there are 2 work
beams on the roof (inner ones).
Pos. B: only the following field lights are on: Pos. A
• 2 outer rear lights on the roof
• 2 rear lights on the cab rear posts.
For North American markets, the work beams A
on the roof are the inner ones.
• The presetting in the 7-pin rear socket is 0
enabled.
B
Pos. 0

Pos. B

Fig. CC12

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-27

Controls - Cab
Revolving beacon switch
(optional) - (Fig. CC13)

Pos. A: the revolving beacon lights up (of 2 beacons are A

installed, both will be turned on at the same time)
Pos. B: revolving beacon OFF

Fig. CC13

Additional Front Alternative Head-

lights (With Front hitch)
(optional) - (Fig. CC14)

Pos. A: the 2 dipped beams on the hand rails are on

Pos. B: the dipped beams on the bonnet are on

NOTE: The low beams on the bonnet, if there is no switch

for auxiliary beams, are controlled by the switch (2 Fig.
CC2) in position C.
A
Pos. A

Pos. B
Fig. CC14

Rear view mirror heating switch (de-

froster) - (Fig. CC15)
(optional)
A
Pos. A: supply to the rear view mirror resistances (ON)
(central blue indicator light on)
Pos. B: no supply to the rear view mirror resistances (OFF)
B
IMPORTANT: Turn the mirror heater off after 10 minutes
to avoid damage

Fig. CC15

3-28 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Electrical adjustment of the rear view
mirrors - (1-Fig. CC16)
The mini joystick (1) is used to move the rear view mirrors.
Adjust the mirrors as follows:
• Turn the joystick clockwise (right-hand mirror) or anti-
clockwise (left-hand mirror) to select a mirror (there is
no neutral middle position).
• When a mirror is selected, move the joystick along 4
axes to move the mirror accordingly.

Fig. CC16 3

Adjustment of rear view mirror sup-

ports
Fig. CC17

The rear view mirror supports can be extended to have a

better rear view according to implement size.

1. Loosen the knob (1) and change the extension in the

required direction.

2. Tighten the knob again to fix the support extension in

the required position.

Fig. CC17

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-29

Controls - Cab
Tractor Warning Lamp Usage Rotating Beacon

- The flashing amber warning lamps must be used ac- - The rotating amber beacon must be used according to
cording to road traffic laws. local road traffic laws.

The rotating amber beacon is operated by pressing the

The amber warning lamps are used to indicate a hazard
to other road users. Press button (1) to activate. By this
switch all four turn indicators will flash on and off.
switch (2) with the flashing beacon symbol. If the tractor
is provided with 2 revolving beacons, the switch (2) lights
up both.

IMPORTANT: When operating the tractor, towing an

Slow Moving Vehicle (SMV) Symbol
implement or trailer, the complete rear area warning
system (amber warning lamps, when applicable, and red - For correct use of the SMV symbol, respect local road
tail lamps) must be easily seen by any vehicle operator traffic laws.
coming near the tractor.

Implement warning lamps
(if equipped).

It is recommended that implement warning lamps are

used:

- If the flashing warning lamps and red tail lamps on the

tractor cannot be seen because they are obstructed by
the implement.

- If the towed implement is 1219 mm or more behind the

hitch point of the tractor.
- If the towed implement is 1219 mm or more to the left
or right of the centre of the tractor.
- If the towed implement is 3000 mm or more wide.
Install the warning lamps to indicate the side of the imple-
ment nearest the centre of the road.
If a Slow Moving Vehicle (SMV) symbol is equipped it must
be installed on the rear part of the tractor.
To install the SMV symbol on an implement or trailer a
special bracket must be obtained from your dealer.
1
WARNING: Collision of high speed road traffic
and tractors or implements can cause personal
injury or death. On roads, use amber warn-
ing lamps according to local laws. Keep SMV
emblem visible. Pull over to let faster traffic
pass. Slow down and signal before turning off.

3-30 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Pedal Controls

1. CLUTCH PEDAL
The clutch pedal is used to temporarily disengage drive.
Use the clutch pedal when moving the tractor over short 3
distances. Use the clutch pedal to start the tractor moving
from stationary. Gradually and completely releasing the
clutch pedal for a controlled smooth start.

WARNING: DO NOT ride the clutch pedal when the

transmission is under load. Release the clutch pedal
completely within 5 seconds for improved clutch
service life. While the tractor is moving the transmis-
sion must always be in drive. Never allow the tractor
to coast downhill with the transmission in neutral or
with the clutch pedal depressed. To do so could result
in the operator not having full control of the tractor
and may result in personal injury.

2. THROTTLE PEDAL

3. BRAKE PEDALS - The left brake pedal stops the

left rear wheel and the right brake pedal stops the right
rear wheel.

WARNING: Extra weight and bad traction

conditions such as mud or ice increase your
stopping distance. Remember that liquid in
the tires, weights on the machine or wheels,
tanks filled with fertilisers, herbicides or in-
secticides; all these add weight and increase
the distance you need to stop. Do not exceed
maximum permitted operating weights on
axle or tractor.

4. BRAKE PEDALS INTERLOCK - Used to lock the

brake pedals together.

WARNING: Brake pedals must be locked

together for road travel. This will ensure
uniform brake operation and maximum stop-
ping ability.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-31

Controls - Cab
Armrest controls

Fig. CBR1

1. Throttle 11. Slip control button: to enable wheel slip control.

2. Rear control valve buttons: refer to the “Operation” 12. Spot light button: to turn on the light in the cab ceiling
section in this manual. over the armrest.
3. Multifunction joystick 13. Encoder + Enter: to browse the instrument cluster
4. AUTO function control buttons: see description further menu. see "Instruments and programming" in this
on in this section. manual.
5. Mini joystick 14. Esc button: see "Instruments and programming" in
6. AVC button: the button enables or disables hydraulic this manual.
functions, except the hitch. 15. Mode button: quick access to a few setup menus on
7. Stationary button: it allows the operator to leave the the instrument cluster. see "Instruments and program-
driver's seat with the tractor at standstill and the engine ming" in this manual.
running to use the external controls. See page 5-36. 16. Potentiometers: see description further on in this
section.
8. Hitch position control: refer to the “Operation” section
17. Rear PTO engagement/disengagement switch: refer
in this manual.
to the “Operation” section in this manual.
9. Suspended axle button (AUTO mode): refer to the 18. Front PTO engagement/disengagement switch: refer
"Instruments and programming" and "Operation" sec- to the “Operation” section in this manual.
tions in this manual. 19. Finger tips: controls coupled to auxiliary control
10. Hitch function selector: valves. refer to the “Operation” section in this manual.
• position control
• draft control
• Intermix
refer to the “Operation” section in this manual.

3-32 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
AUTO function control buttons
(Fig. CBR2)

1. AUTO PTO switch: to enable/disable automatic opera-

tion of rear PTO refer to the “Operation” section in this
manual.
2. APS button (AutoPowerShift): refer to the “Operation”
section in this manual.
3. Diff lock engaging button: longer pressure to enable
automatic mode, short pressure to enable manual
mode. refer to the “Operation” section in this manual.
4. 4WD engaging button: longer pressure to enable au-
tomatic mode, short pressure to enable manual mode.
Fig. CBR2
refer to the “Operation” section in this manual.

Potentiometers
(Fig. CBR3)

1. Hitch down speed control: refer to the “Operation”

section in this manual.
2. Hitch upper limit adjustment: refer to the “Operation”
section in this manual.
3. APS adjustment (auto powershift): refer to the “Opera-
tion” section in this manual.

Fig. CBR3

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-33

Controls - Cab
Joystick controls
(Fig. CBR4)

1. Change up powershift/range gear: alone for powershift

change, together with the Enable button (9) for range
change. Refer to the “Operation” section in this manual.
2. Change down powershift/range gear: alone for pow-
ershift change, together with the Enable button (9) for
range change. Refer to the “Operation” section in this
manual.
3. 1st control Remote Valve (+): refer to the “Operation”
section in this manual.
4. 1st control Remote Valve (-): refer to the “Operation”
section in this manual.
5. Hitch up/down switch: refer to the “Operation” section
in this manual.
6. “My” button: to select quickly a function pre-set by
the operator. See “Instruments and programming” on
page 4-33 and “MY Switch (selection of preset functions)”
on page 5-38 in this manual.
7. Constant engine RPM button:See “Instruments and
programming” on page 4-32 and “Engine set point” on
page 5-37 in this manual.
8. Headland management button: quick access to the
menu of headland functions. See "Instruments and
programming" in this manual.
9. Enable button

Fig. CBR4

Armrest height adjustment knobs

(Fig. CBR5)

ARMREST ADJUSTMENT
The arm rest can be adjusted to increase the operator's
comfort. Loosen both lock knobs (1). Set the armrest in
the required position, then lock it with both knobs.

Fig. CBR5

3-34 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Never adjust the steering column
while driving.

The steering column can be adjusted up or down, and

tilted as required. Use the lever (1-Fig. RP1) at the right
just under the steering wheel to adjust the steering col-
umn position.

Fig. RP1
3

Tilt adjustment (TILT)

Fig. RP1 - Fig. RP2 2
To adjust the steering column tilt:

• push and hold down lever (1)

• move the column (2) to required position
• release lever (1)

Fig. RP2

Height adjustment (TELESCOPE)

Fig. RP1 - Fig. RP3
3
To adjust the steering column height:

• pull and hold up lever (1)

• push or pull the column (3) to required position
• release lever (1)

Fig. RP3

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-35

Controls - Cab
Cab ventilation [4.1.b]
(Fig. CV1)

The cab ventilation is controlled by means of 8 adjustable

air vents (A). 6 are in the cab roof and 2 in the bottom of
the left and right consoles.
Direct the air flow as required direction by turning the
vents.

Internal air recycling in the cab (Fig. CV1)

1. Press the switch in the ECC console to enable the

dedicated function (see “Electronic Climate Control” in
the following pages).

2. The vanes within the two re-circulation grilles (B) are

self-regulated for optimal air intake from the cab.

Front windscreen demisting/defrosting

(Fig. CV2)

In the front part of the cab roof there are 3 vents to defrost
and demist the windscreen (C).
On each vent, turn the little wheel (2) on the left to adjust
the position of the fins, and on the little wheel (3) on the
right to open or close the vent.
To defrost the windscreen:

1. Press the switch in the ECC console to enable the

dedicated function (see “Electronic Climate Control” in
the following pages).

2. Open the air vents (C) and direct their air flows toward
windscreen and windows.

Fig. CV1

Fig. CV2

3-36 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Operation of air conditioning unit Storage compartment - Fig. CV3

To operate the air conditioner, the blower must be on. The
blower speed, temperature control and all vents must
be adjusted to obtain the best cooling for the ambient
temperature and dust conditions. Under normal operating
conditions, and with the windows and doors closed, tem-
peratures in the cab of 6°C÷15°C less than the ambient
temperature will occur. When operating the air conditioner
system, the moisture level is decreased.
The left cab lining features a refrigerated storage com-
partment.
Raise the cover (1) to open.
The refrigeration can be excluded by closing the vent in
the compartment.
Turn the little wheel (2) on the left to adjust the air flow.
Turn the little wheel (3) on the right to open/close the air
flow.


NOTE: During cold weather, with ambient temperature
above 0°C, operate the air conditioner at least once per
month, for a period of 10 to 15 minutes. This operation is
useful to lubricate gaskets and helps to prevent leaks of
cooling fluid.

NOTE: The system is provided with safety devices to

protect the system for low refrigerant level and restric-
3
tions in the system. If the air conditioner stops operating
while the tractor is running, ask your Dealer's specialised
workshop for help.

NOTE: The air conditioning system is equipped with an

environmentally safe refrigerant, HFC-R134a. Never re-
charge the air conditioning system with refrigerant other
than HFC-R134a as this will result in loss of cooling and
permanent damage to all air conditioning components.

Fig. CV3

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-37

Controls - Cab
Electronic Climate Control [4.1.b]
Fig. CA1

1. Manual/automatic ventilation selector switch

2. Digital display (LCD)
3. Compressor ON/OFF switch
4. Defrost switch
5. Air recirculation switch
6. Temperature control

The air flow within the cab changes automatically because

the air conditioning system adapts compressor operation,
fan speed and air circulation so as to keep the selected
temperature steady.
The inner temperature can change with increments of
0.5°C in the range 20-24°C and increments of 1°C beyond
this range.

Table of temperatures on LCD display in Celsius and Fig. CA1

Fahrenheit degrees:

°C °F
LO LO
18 64
19 66
20 68
20.5 69
21 70
21.5 71
22 72
22.5 73
23 74
23.5 75
24 76
25 77
26 79
27 81
28 83
HI HI

The HI/LO messages and the tractor icon show the high-
est and lowest limits of recirculation.

Pre-setting of temperature in the cab

Fig. CA2

Turn the control (6) to set the required temperature. The

pre-set value is displayed on LCD (2).

Fig. CA2

3-38 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Changing temperature format on display (°C or °F)
Fig. CA3, CA4, CA5, CA6

In the first 5 seconds from the key ignition, the tempera-

ture format on display can be changed from Celsius to
Fahrenheit and back.

To change temperature format on LCD display:

1. with the engine off, turn the fan speed control (1) OFF
(left-hand side of the air conditioner console).

2. turn the temperature control (2) to max. heating posi-

Fig. CA3
tion (red) (right-hand side of the air conditioner console).

3. turn the ignition key to ON in position 1, then within

5 seconds press both the defrosting and recirculation
buttons (3) and (4) at the same time for a few seconds.
The display shows the set temperature symbol (°C or °F) 3
4. turn the fan speed control (1) to AUTO.

5. to confirm selection turn the control (2) to desired

temperature.

NOTE: any errors on the air conditioning sensors are indi-

cated by the symbol “E” (1-Fig. CA6) on the LCD display.
Refer to your authorised Dealer to solve the problem. Fig. CA4

Fig. CA5

Fig. CA6

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-39

Controls - Cab
Maximum heating (Fig. CA7)

Maximum heating is reached by setting the cab tempera-

ture at a value over 28°C.
The knob (2) must be turned fully to clockwise. The LCD
display shows the symbol “HI”.
The LED (1) in the compressor enabling button is on.

Fig. CA7

Maximum cooling (Fig. CA8)

Maximum cooling is reached by setting the cab tempera-

ture at a value under 18°C.
The knob (2) must be turned fully anti clockwise. The
LCD display shows the symbol “LO”.
The LED (1) in the compressor enabling button is on.

Fig. CA8

Defrost function (Fig. CA9)

The defrost function is enabled by the button (1). The

LED (2) in the button is on.
The compressor is enabled (A/C LED on).
The LCD display shows the symbol “HI”.

To disable the defrost function and restore the previous

condition, press the button (1) again (the lamp goes off).

Fig. CA9

3-40 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Air flow adjustment (Fig. CA10)
By setting the fan speed control (1) in AUTO position
(A), the air flow is selected automatically. Air flow adjust-
ments are gradual.
Air flow may be changed by setting the control (1) in a
different position from AUTO.
According to the sun radiation value, air flow is automati-
cally adjusted if the set temperature is lower than the
external temperature and the temperature on display is
flashing.
The air flow can be changed to keep the temperature
inside the cab within the preset range.

Turn the speed control (1) to the OFF position (B) to quit
the automatic mode.

Air conditioning function (Fig. CA11) Fig. CA10

Turn on the air conditioning by pressing button (1).
The LED (2) turns on.
The air conditioning compressor is activated to keep the
3
temperature at the required value.
Press switch (1) to deactivate.

Recirculation (Fig. CA12)

The icon (1) on the LCD display indicates air recircula-
tion mode.
When this mode is selected, the air inside the cab is
recirculated.
This mode is advised to avoid intaking polluted outer
air, e.g. when working in very dusty environment, or in
a tunnel, or to cool down quickly the inside of the cab.

NOTE: Adjustment in automatic mode depends on outer

temperature.

The first time the recirculation button (2) is Fig. CA11

pressed, an arrow will be displayed on the
tractor icon.
Air inside the cab is recirculated in a closed
circuit system.

The second time the recirculation button (2)

is pressed, an arrow will be displayed outside
the tractor icon.
Air is taken in from the outside.

The third time the recirculation button (2) is

pressed, automatic control is restored.
The tractor icon shows the letter A (automatic).

Fig. CA12

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-41

Controls - Cab
RADIO
General information 1
Turning on (Fig. AU1)
To turn on the unit, press the ON/OFF button (1 - Fig. AU1);
to turn off, press and hold the same button for 1 second.

NOTE: Many buttons on the front panel can be operated

in two modes: a momentary press or press and hold.

Fig. AU1

Multifunction buttons (2 - Fig. AU2)

The buttons on the front panel may have different func-
tions if the operator is listening to the radio or playing
multimedia files (USB stick or SD card).

• Radio: stored station 2

• Function to operate in media: control Play

Fig. AU2

Context of functions (1 - Fig. AU3)

The function of some controls depends on context. For
instance, the button “1” (1 - Fig. AU3) tunes in the first
stored radio station. After playing a multimedia file, how-
ever, this button can be pressed to play/interrupt a track.
1
• Radio: stored station
• Supports: playing/interrupting a multimedia file

Fig. AU3

“Volume” knob (1 - Fig. AU4)

Turn the knob clockwise to raise, anticlockwise to lower
the volume.

If the options MENU or AUDIO are used, volume adjust-

ment is temporarily disabled and by turning the knob the 1
menu items are displayed instead. Apply a short pressure
(press and release) the volume adjustment knob to access
the controls of the AUDIO option, i.e. balance, fader, bass
and treble.
Fig. AU4
The volume has 41 positions, with a range 0 to 40.

3-42 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Radio 2
Radio stations search (Fig. AU5)
Use the buttons (1) and (2) to search a radio station: press
briefly to search automatically the next available frequency
(the search stops at the next available station).

1. Forward button
2. Backward button

Manual tuning (Fig. AU5)

Hold (1) or (2) pressed for the manual search mode. In this 1
mode, a short pressure on one of these buttons gradually
changes the frequency, while a longer pressure makes the Fig. AU5
search quicker until the button is released.
The radio returns to the automatic search mode if no but-
ton is pressed for 3 seconds. 3
Radio stations storing (Fig. AU5)
When hearing a radio station, apply a longer pressure on
one of the buttons (1) to store the station. Apply a short
pressure on a button (1) to go to an already stored station.
The stored frequency can be changed by tuning on a dif-
ferent station and applying a longer pressure to the button
where you wish it to be stored.
1
• Longer pressure: the station is stored.
• Short pressure: the stored station is recalled.

FM radio
The RDS (Radio Data System) service is active in many
countries. In case of RDS transmission, it is possible to Fig. AU6
enable or disable its settings in the menu, e.g. AF and TA.
RDS is only available in the FM bands.

• AF: alternative frequency

• TP: traffic program
• TA: traffic announcement

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-43

Controls - Cab
Other audio equipment

Playing multimedia files (Fig. AU7)

To play WMA or MP3 music files previously stored on a 2
USB stick (1) or a SD board (2), just insert the support in 4
its slot to start playing. The radio turns automatically on.
Use the SRC button (3) to select ‘radio’, ‘media’ or ‘AUX’ 3
(auxiliary inlet) (4). If both supports are in their slots, the 1
radio uses the last slot that had been used.

NOTE: Supports in SD/USB – selection is possible only if

multimedia files are available. Fig. AU7

Double inlet AUX-IN (4), 3.5 mm on front and rear: these

sockets share the same circuit. Though it is possible to
use both, it is advisable to establish a connection only
with one of them and to leave the other one disconnected.

Audio tracks selection (Fig. AU8)

Use the buttons (1) and (2) to search the required track. 1
Press the button briefly:
1. to select the previous track
2. to select the next track

Press and hold the button:

1. for the rewind function
2. for the fast forward function
After reaching the desired position in the audio track,
release the button to start playing normally again.

AUX inlet 3.5 mm (4 - Fig. AU7) 2

The front panel features a stereo aux-in inlet. By means
of a 3.5 mm stereo jack plug, the music played through Fig. AU8
the headset outlet of a portable multimedia player can
be played, for instance, through the tractor's speakers.

3-44 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Radio menu

Menu (Fig. AU9)

Apply a short pressure to the MENU button (1) to open
the radio menu. Afterward, the LCD display shows the
available menu items. By the ‘Reset – confirm’ function
the default settings can be restored.

After entering the required menu, use the following but-

tons to browse:

1. ‘MENU’ = EXIT, MOVE UP ONE LEVEL (to go from the

right to the left in the menu tree).
2. Turn the volume knob = PREVIOUS ITEM/NEXT ITEM Fig. AU9
(to scroll the menu tree up or down).
3. Middle button = SELECT ITEM, CONFIRM, MOVE
DOWN INTO SUB-LEVEL (to scroll the menu tree left
to right). 3
Press and hold 'MENU' to exit.

NOTE: if no button is pressed for 3 seconds, the radio

quits the 'MENU' mode automatically.

Audio
To change AUDIO settings, apply a short pressure on the
volume knob. It is a shortcut key to enter the software
menu. In this way, the user can change the settings BAL-
ANCE, FADER, BASS and TREBLE:

- Apply a short pressure on the volume knob.
- Use in the same way as MENU.
Access to ‘MENU’ and ‘AUDIO’ menus is described as
"browsing the menu tree". The middle button is used to
move to a lower level in the tree, while the MENU button
has the opposite function, i.e. to move from a lower to a
higher level (right to left) in the menu tree.

Other buttons:
Knob to move to a higher level (right to
volume • left)
to select an item, to move to a lower level
• (left to right)

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-45

Controls - Cab
Bluetooth 1
General operation (Fig. AU10)
The buttons in the front panel of the Bluetooth version
of this radio there are the following additional symbols
“answer” (1) and “hang-up” (2). Press and hold the “An-
swer” button (1) to call the last dialled number.

Pairing
To use the speakerphone function in Bluetooth, a Blue-
tooth mobile phone must be connected by “pairing”. To
pair the mobile phone to the radio, check that the radio is
turned on. On your mobile, search for an available Blue- 2
tooth connection. Pair to “BT13.1” by the code “1234”.
The mobile should confirm the successful pairing. After Fig. AU10
the pairing, many mobiles can automatically restore the
Bluetooth connection when the radio is turned on again
(e.g., when next using the tractor), therefore no pairing
is needed on such phones.

Once the mobile is paired to the radio device, the mobile

can be used in speakerphone mode.
When the mobile is used for outgoing or incoming calls,
the speakers in the cab and the microphone (1 - Fig.
AU11) in front of the operator can be used for voice com-
munication with the cell phone connected to the radio
via Bluetooth device.
If the radio is on, when the phone is paired to the radio,
the audio signal automatically is turned down to allow
the phone communication.

Bluetooth profiles Fig. AU11

The Bluetooth version of this radio can be connected in
wireless mode to Bluetooth devices, such as cell phones.
The Bluetooth connection modes are named “profiles”. This radio supports the following profiles:
(1) A2DP: Advanced Audio Distribution Profile – Music playing in streaming of music by means of Bluetooth.
Bluetooth devices with A2DP function can play music from the radio through the sound system of the tractor. Further,
if the device supports the Bluetooth profile AVRCP (Remote Control Profile), the radio can be used to operate func-
tions such as ‘next track’ and ‘previous track’.
(2) HFP: Hands Free Profile – Call or receive calls through Bluetooth (see the previous sections “General operation” and
“Pairing”).
To ensure an optimal sound quality of the connected Bluetooth HFP, the user can select the speakers to use for sound
reproduction. The menu path of the software MENU->SYSTEM->ALT_VOL->HFP_SPKR has three options:
HFP_ALL: sound is output from all four speaker channels (default option).
HFP_FRNT: sound is output only from the front speaker channels; the rear channels are off during phone conver-
sations.
HFP_REAR: sound is output only from the rear speaker channels; the front channels are off during phone conver-
sations.

The default setting is HFP_ALL.

NOTE: for tractors provided of 2 speakers only, the default setting HFP_ALL is recommended.

3-46 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Symbols
Symbols on the front panel:

BAND FM/AM/WB frequency band. Forward/next (FF): radio frequency / sound

This radio has 3 bands FM, 2 AM and 1WB. track
(The WB mode is only available if “USA” is
selected)

SRC Source: radio/supports rewind/previous (REW): radio frequency /

(SD,USB)/auxiliary inlet) sound track

MENU Menu of software functions Play / pause.

A short pressure to switch between play /
pause.
3
F+ / F- Browsing through folders Stop.
Press and hold to stop playing the multime-
dia file

RDM Random: track play order Repetition: “RPT OFF”,”RPT ONE”,”RPT

DIR”,”RPT ALL” (Repeat off, Repeat one,
Repeat directory, Repeat all)

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-47

Controls - Cab
ADDITIONAL CAB FEATURES
Parking brake Cab Rear Window

The park brake is located to the LH side of the operators
seat. Pull the lever up to fully engage the parking brake.
If you start the tractor, release the clutch after engaging
the gear (see "NOTE" below). Press button (1) and lower
to disengage the parking brake.
When the parking brake is engaged, the warning lamp on
the instrument cluster will illuminate when the key switch
is turned to ON.
To open the cab's rear window, turn the lever (1) clockwise.
EMERGENCY EXIT: open the rear window completely.
WARNING: Do not open the windscreen, the doors or
the side and rear windows during work. The noise in
the cab could rise to such level as to oblige the opera-
tor to wear headsets or other individual protection
against noise.

The lamp will go off when the parking brake is released.

Sunshade
NOTE: An audible alarm will sound, when the engine is
running, if forward or reverse is selected when the parking
brake is engaged.

IMPORTANT: Driving the tractor with the parking brake

partially engaged will cause damage to internal transmis-
sion components. Make sure brake is fully off.

A sunshade is mounted in the front part of the cab roof.

To lower the sunshade (1), pull down as required.
To raise the sunshade, push up as required.

3-48 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
Sunroof

To open the sun roof, turn the lever (1) clockwise and 3
push the sun roof up.
The sun roof is kept open by shock absorbers (2).

Push lightly on the insert (3) to open or close the sunshade.

WARNING: If the sunroof is open during work,

the protection against falling objects is no
longer valid. In presence of such a danger,
keep the sun roof always correctly closed.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-49

Controls - Cab
EXTERNAL CONTROLS ON FENDERS
NOTE: the controls listed below are on both rear fenders.

1. Rear PTO ON remote switch. See the “Operation”

section.
2. Rear PTO OFF remote switch. See the “Operation”
section.
3. Rear Hitch control switch (up). See the “Operation”
section.
4. Rear Hitch control switch (down) See the “Operation”
section.
5. Rear control valve switch ( + ) (if installed). See the
“Operation” section.
6. Rear control valve switch ( - ) (if installed). See the
“Operation” section.

NOTE: the connection of switches (5) and (6) changes

depending on the configuration of the rear auxiliary con-
trol valves. Fig. CP1

Configuration of control valve group

without flow selector
With the configuration of the control valves without flow
selector, the switches (5) and (6) are coupled to the re-
spective outlets (+) and (-) stamped on the blue caps of
the quick couplings (1st valve at left, Fig. CP2).

Configuration of remote valves without

diverter valve
In this configuration, the switches (5) and (6) are coupled
to the function enabled by the operator with the cab
controls. Available choices:
Fig. CP2
• Outlets (+) and (-) of the 1st valve (left side)
• Hydraulic rod
• Hydraulic top link.

3-50 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Controls - Cab
EXTERNAL CONTROLS ON FRONT HITCH
(if equipped)
The external buttons that control the front hitch are on
the left side.

For their correct use, refer to the “Operation” section.

1. Button to raise the front hitch

2. Button to lower the front hitch

Fig. CP3

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 3-51

Controls - Cab

Page left intentionally blank.

3-52 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Section
Instruments and Programming 4

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-1

Instruments and Programming
Instrument panel

The main digital display DMD Dot Matrix Display is divided Warning buzzer - Buzzer
into work areas: The buzzer starts operating as a warning. The buzzer has
1 - Transmission two sound level:
2 - Power take-off 1- low level for low priority.
3 - Browsing menu 2 - high intermittent level for high priority level.
4 - Operator menu
NOTE: The loudness of the buzzer should change ac-
cording to engine rated speed. Otherwise, please con-
tact your Argo Tractors Technical Service.

Encoder
Browsing through menus is by the encoder (1), on the
armrest, this rotates clockwise or anticlockwise.

The encoder changes any selected parameters as follows:

• Clockwise rotation: selected value is increased.
• Anticlockwise rotation: selected value is reduced.

Pressing the encoder inwards (A) selects “Enter” to access

a menu/submenu, select a parameter and will save one
or more changes or confirms.

Press the “Esc” button (2) to quit the displayed menu or

reject changes to a parameter.

Press the “Mode” button (3) for quick access to the fol-
lowing menus:
• Transmission shuttle modulation
• Auxiliary Valve Controllers
• Headland Management Function

Pressing the “Mode” button again will display the next

menu connected to the “Mode” button.

• If the “Mode” button is pressed for the first time after

turning the key to ON, the display will show the menu
“Transmission Shuttle Modulation”.

• If the “Mode” button is not pressed after turning the

key ON, the display shows the last menu accessed after
pressing the “Mode” button.

4-2 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming
Browsing through menus The “Mode” button is a quick way to access some menus
(see diagram at left). For this reason the menu cannot
be accessed at the first level, as the case would be if
the menu had been accessed through the encoder (Fig.
Setting the instrument cluster bright-
ness STR1 - e.g. menu HMF).

Front Suspension (if equipped)

Menu MySwitch

 Fig. STR1
PTO modulation

The menu is accessed, on the contrary, at a level where

it is already possible to change or set parameters as
APS required. (Fig. STR2)
(Automatic Powershift)

Headland functions (HMF)

(if equipped).
4
Clock

 Fig. STR2
Rear hitch

Air braking system

(if equipped).

AdBlue™ or DEF level

Transmission shuttle modulation

Counters

Calibrations

AVC

Engine control unit

Key
1. Encoder clockwise rotation
2. Encoder anticlockwise rotation
Alarms
(if at least an alarm is activated)
3. MODE button depressed

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-3

Instruments and Programming

Acronyms
IC Instrument Cluster Instrument panel
ECU Electronic Control Module Electronic control module
TC Transmission controller Transmission controller
HC Hitch Controller Hitch controller
DCM Dosing Control Module Dosing Control Module
AVC Auxiliary Valve Controller Auxiliary Valve Controller
ACM Armrest Control Module Armrest Control Module
FNR Forward Neutral Reverse Forward Neutral Reverse
PTO Power Take Off Power take-off
DL Differential Lock Differential lock
MFD Mechanical Front Drive Mechanical front drive
4WD 4 Wheel Drive Four-wheel drive
DI Digital Input Digital Input
AI Analog Input Analog Input
FI Frequency Input Frequency Input
DO Digital Output Digital Output
HSD High Side High Side
LSD Low Side Low Side
IVS Idle Validation Switch Idle Validation Switch
DEF Diesel Emission Fluid AD Blue Diesel exhaust fluid
DPF Diesel Particulate Filter Diesel Particulate Filter
ICH Instrument Cluster Hitch Hitch
HMF Headland Management Function Headland Management Function

Ignition key OFF/ON

When the key is on the OFF position, the panel goes into alarm mode and the operator is warned in the following cases:
- Side lights, driving beams on.
- Park brake not engaged.

Therefore the panel has 3 different operation modes:

- Enabled: ignition key ON
- Stand by: ignition key OFF, panel off except for the warnings above specified.
- OFF: Key OFF, when the battery is not connected.

WARNING: If after turning the ignition key to ON, the instrument panel does not light up within 1 second, the
instrument panel itself may be faulty. Ask your Dealer's workshop for a check.

NOTE: When the battery disconnector switch is on (unconnected battery), the instrument panel remains off.

If one of the following images is displayed, the instrument panel found errors that cannot be corrected by the operator.
In this case, do not use the tractor and refer to the Dealer's service.

NOTE: this image is displayed per- NOTE: this image is displayed per- NOTE: this image is displayed at the
manently, regardless of any operator's manently, regardless of any operator's start on the instrument cluster in pop-
action. action. up mode, with high priority.

4-4 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Indicator lights

4
Indicator lights 21 4WD engaged, yellow.
1 Left turn indicator, green 22 Major warning, red. Stop the engine and ask your
2 Side lights on, green Dealer's specialised workshop for help.
3 1st trailer indicator, green 23 General warning, yellow. Faulty tractor operation. An
4 2nd trailer indicator, green error has been detected by the vehicle's diagnostic
5 Headlight high beam on, blue system and an error code has been generated.
6 Braking system fault (level, pressure), red. 24 Empty
7 Parking brake engaged, red. 25 Empty
8 Trailer braking system fault (hydraulic/air system), 26 Hydraulic filter clogging, yellow.
red. 27 Warning light for low pressure in transmission hy-
9 Low AdBlue™ or DEF level, yellow. draulic system, red.
10 Not used 28 Unavailable
11 Fault in the anti-polluting system, yellow. 29 Low fuel level, yellow
12 Derating enabled, yellow. 30 Battery charge, red.
13 Empty 31 High coolant temperature, red
14 Right turn indicator, green 32 Low engine oil pressure, red.
15 Front PTO engaged, yellow 33 Engine fault warning, yellow. Ask your Dealer's work-
16 Rear PTO engaged, yellow shop for help.
17 Not used 34 Engine air filter clogging, red
18 Empty
19 Empty
20 Differential lock engaged, yellow.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-5

Instruments and Programming

Display operation
The system menu is divided into 2 parts:
1- Operating menu
2- Accessories Menu
When ignition is ON, the instrument panel displays a welcome screen for 3 seconds. If no button is depressed during these
3 seconds, the operating system is accessed, but if the Enter button is depressed, the Accessories menu is accessed.

Welcome screen
The tractor mark logo is displayed for 3 seconds on full screen.

4-6 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Operating menu
If the ignition key is ON, the display goes back to the last menu displayed before previously turning the tractor off.

Some messages are only displayed in alarm conditions and are not visible in normal operation conditions.

Ignition key OFF

(engine off)
Ignition key OFF

Ignition key ON
Ignition key OFF

Esc pressed / After 5” on display

Minor error
Ignition key OFF

Pop-up 5 seconds
Major error
The display goes off
Pop-up after 5 seconds
1 Esc pressed / error is The display goes off by
Last displayed menu no longer present pressing Esc or when
the error is no longer
4
present
Long press on
2 Esc

4 5 3 Esc pressed / error is no longer present

Major error
1
Submenu Esc pressed / After 5” on display
(if available)
Minor error
2

Momentarily
pressing Esc

Key
1. Encoder clockwise rotation: menu or next submenu
2. Encoder anticlockwise rotation: menu or previous submenu
3. Press Enter: access to submenu
4. No activity for 10": exit from submenu and return to original menu
5. Long press on Esc: exit from submenu and return to original menu

WARNING: mind wanderings can cause accidents! NEVER open menus on the instrument panel while driving.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-7

Instruments and Programming

The value flashes while data are being input.

Example:

Button Encoder Encoder clock- Button Encoder

depressed wise rotation depressed

Changing parameters: parameters are of 2 types.

Numbers or values to set after selecting among preset values.

To change Parameters scroll the encoder either clockwise or anticlockwise. The value increases or decreases depending
on direction it is turned.
Clockwise: 1->2->3->4->1.
Anticlockwise 4<3<2<1<4

If you enter the write mode, the whole number flashes. The value (factory preset) is increased or decreased one unit at
a time by turning the encoder clockwise/anticlockwise. When the maximum/minimum value is reached, the parameter
goes back to the maximum/minimum value.

The main digital display DMD Dot Matrix Display is divided into work areas:
1 - Transmission
2 - Power take-off
3 - Browsing menu
4 - Operator menu

Arrows will become shaded indicating the direction when the encoder is tunred

No rotation of Encoder Encoder anticlockwise rotation Encoder clockwise rotation

4-8 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Alarm notifications
There are 2 priority levels.
- Major fault: alarm/message with high priority
- Minor fault: alarm/message with low priority

Example:
1) Minor Fault
An alarm/message is displayed for 5 seconds, then returns to the previous state unless the operator rotates the encoder
or presses the Esc button.

If more than one minor alarm/message is enabled, the display shows each one in sequence.
2a) 1 Major fault plus 1 Minor fault
The display shows Major Fault, if Esc is then depressed the Minor Fault is displayed. If you then depress Esc within 5”,
the menu returns to the previous state unless the operator rotates the encoder or presses the Esc button.

2b) Several Major faults and several Minor faults

The display shows the first Major fault then, if no button is touched, the program cycles through the following Major faults.
If Esc is depressed, the Minor faults are displayed. If Esc is depressed again within 5”, the menu returns to the previous
state unless the operator rotates the encoder or presses the Esc button. the display goes back to the previous menu.
For Major faults, the display shows a continuous cycle until Esc is depressed.
For Minor faults, when the last minor fault is displayed the menu returns to the previous state.

WARNING:��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������
If
�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������
you ignore indicator lights and information messages, you run the risk of machine break-
4
down, damage or accidents.
As soon as possible, stop the tractor in a safe position and consult your dealer.

Main display

Clock/Work timer

clock

work hours

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-9

Instruments and Programming

Rear hitch
Information concerning the hitch are updated in real time on the main screen.
The under displayed indications refer to the a machine with the most complete equipment.

Hitch position indication

Indication of the auto PTO engagement/disengagement threshold (should this

menu not come up, there are factory set fixed thresholds anyway).
Indication of real slip and maximum allowed slip (only present if a radar is
available).

Position of the rear hitch

Hitch not moving Hitch raising Hitch lowering Not allowed

Position in percent of rear hitch

0% fully lowered
100% fully raised

Engagement/disengagement threshold of auto PTO

Information on PTO engagement/disengagement threshold are displayed on the instrument cluster, as indicated below.

A. questa icona indica il riferimento alla funzione PdF

B. indica la posizione del sollevatore al di sotto della quale la PdF si avvia in AUTO
C. indica la posizione del sollevatore al di sopra della quale la PdF si stacca in AUTO

4-10 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

WHEEL SLIP
Wheel slip is displayed only when the tractor is fitted with radar.

The following icon is displayed only when the slip control function is activated.

If the icon is flashing, the slip control function is operating.

wheel slip value detected

entered slip limit

The slip value can only be set up with a mounted radar and an active slip control function.
For the setup logic, see the following paragraph.
4
The allowed value range for the slip limit is 10% to 25%.

Slip limits can be set between 10% and 25%.

The icon has two statuses:

• On and fixed: wheel slip control activated

• On and blinking: slip control operating

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-11

Instruments and Programming

Setup of limits for auto PTO engagement/disengagement and slip values

For a setup of limits for auto PTO engagement/disengagement and slip values, follow the logic as indicated in the fol-
lowing diagram.

3 1

4 2

4
3 4 4 3 4

3 4 5 3 4 5 3 4 5

6 7
6 7
7 6

Key
1. Encoder clockwise rotation
2. Encoder anticlockwise rotation
3. Enter pressed
4. Esc pressed
5. Long pressure on Enter (2 seconds)
6. Encoder clockwise rotation: to increase a factory set value
7. Encoder anticlockwise rotation: to reduce a factory set value

After highlighting a parameter, press Enter to change its value. While the value is being changed, the value blinks at 0.5
s intervals.
When the change of a parameter is ended (blinking digit), press Enter to save the value. The digit stops blinking.
Press Esc while changing a parameter (digit blinking) to quit the change (the digit stops blinking) and return to the previ-
ously set value.
If a general error (minor or major) occurs during the input of values, the instrument cluster will display it only after the
value has been changed.

4-12 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Air Trailer Brake System Pressure

This function is operating only if air brakes are present.

Refer to "Pressure in air brake system" in this section.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-13

Instruments and Programming

AdBlue™ or DEF level

The AdBlue™ or DEF level in the reservoir is displayed as in the following image, where:
• the size of the black rectangle (A) depend on the present amount of AdBlue™ or DEF
• the percentage (B) refers to the amount of AdBlue™ or DEF in the reservoir

A
B

If during the use of the tractor the instrument cluster no longer receives information on AdBlue™ or DEF level or received
an error message, the above pop-up window is shown with the blinking “- - -%” symbol and the bar (A) replaced by flash-
ing dashes. At the same time the following indicators may come up:


In this case, mean contact your dealer.

SYSTEM STATUS

Standard Minor reduction Major reduction Very heavy reduction

AdBlue™ or DEF level > 15% <= 15% < 10% < 5% 0%

Display mode of the

Fixed Fixed Flashing Flashing Flashing
percentage (B)

Alarm priority No pop-up Low priority pop-up Low priority pop-up High priority pop-up High priority pop-up

The images besides are displayed when the relative alarm

occurs.

In case of contemporary messages of “Tec. Failure” and/

or “Bad Quality” and/or “Low Level” the highest priority
pop-up will be displayed.

If 2 or 3 indications have the same level, “Tec. Failure” is

displayed first, followed by “Bad Quality” and then “Low
Level”.
Tec. Failure Poor Quality Low Level
System malfunction Poor quality of AdB- Low AdBlue™ or
lue™ or DEF DEF level

4-14 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Engine operating modes

See below the description of the indications of the instrument cluster and of the limitations to engine operation imposed
by the control unit.

ECU - Control unit that detects the error

SPN and FMI are the values that must be communicated to the service centre to identify the
problem.

 2/4 indicates: number of displayed alarm/total number of displayed alarms.

Level of liquid AdBlue™ or DEF below 10% - Medium limitation

No reduction in engine power.

1. The indicator light of AdBlue™ or DEF level flashes.

2. The LCD level indicator is enabled.
4
3. The following error is displayed: SCR - 00EB

Level of liquid AdBlue™ or DEF below 5% - Strong limitation

Reduction of torque by 65% - Reduction of engine speed by 60% - Reduction rate 1% every minute

1. The indicator light of AdBlue™ or DEF level is steadily lit up.

2. The LCD level indicator is enabled.
3. The engine fault indicator light flashes.
4. The following error is displayed:
SCR: 00EB + 00EC
ENG: 1004F + 1009D

Level of liquid AdBlue™ or DEF at 0% - Very heavy limitation

Immediate reduction to 20% of engine torque.

1. The indicator light of AdBlue™ or DEF level is steadily lit up.

2. The LCD level indicator is enabled.
3. The engine fault indicator light flashes.
4. The indicator light of engine stop is steadily lit up. Stop the engine and fill up the AdBlue™ or DEF tank.
5. The following error is displayed:
SCR: 00EB + 00EC + 0095
ENG: 1004F + 1009D +1009E

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-15

Instruments and Programming

Quality of liquid AdBlue™ or DEF - Medium limitation, 0 to 1 work hour

No reduction in engine power.

1. The indicator light of the AdBlue™ or DEF system flashes.

2. The following error is displayed: ENG 4001D
3. The engine fault indicator light flashes.

Quality of liquid AdBlue™ or DEF - Strong limitation, 0 to 3 work hour

Reduction of torque by 65% - Reduction of engine speed by 60% - Reduction rate 1% every minute

1. The indicator light of AdBlue™ or DEF system is steadily lit up.

2. The following error is displayed: ENG 4001D+1004F+1009D
3. The engine fault indicator light flashes.

Quality of liquid AdBlue™ or DEF - Very heavy limitation, over 3 work hours
Immediate reduction to 20% of engine torque.

1. The indicator light of AdBlue™ or DEF system is steadily lit up.

2. The following error is displayed: ENG 4001D+1004F+1009D+5001D+1009E
3. The engine fault indicator light flashes.
4. The red warning light is steadily lit up. Stop the engine and ask your Dealer's specialised workshop for help.

Technical problem in AdBlue™ or DEF system - Medium limitation, 0 to 1.5

work hours
Reduction of engine torque by 25%, 1% reduction every minute

1. The indicator light of the AdBlue™ or DEF system flashes.

2. The following error is displayed: SCR 00; EGNG 100+1004F
3. The engine fault indicator light flashes.

Technical problem in the AdBlue™ or DEF system - Heavy limitation, 1.5 to 4

work hours
Reduction of torque by 65% - Reduction of engine speed by 60% - Reduction rate 1% every minute

1. The indicator light of AdBlue™ or DEF system is steadily lit up.

2. The following error is displayed: SCR 00; EGNG 100+1004F+1009D
3. The engine fault indicator light flashes.

Technical problem in the AdBlue™ or DEF system - Very heavy limitation,

over 4 work hours
Immediate reduction to 20% of engine torque.

1. The indicator light of AdBlue™ or DEF system is steadily lit up.

2. The following error is displayed: SCR 00; EGNG 100+1004F+1009D+1009E
3. The engine fault indicator light flashes.
4. The red indicator light is steadily lit up. Stop the engine and ask your Dealer's specialised workshop for help.

4-16 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Validation phase of the AdBlue™ or DEF system

The validation phase is provided for technical problems and of poor quality of liquid AdBlue™ or DEF with strong or very
heavy limitations. When the error level becomes "heavy" or "very heavy", the system enters the validation phase. In this
phase, and until it is stopped, the engine keeps on running on reduced power and torque curves, as previously described.
After starting the engine, the validation phase detects any faults in the system.
If it should detect a fault, the system goes into an emergency phase, that only allows a programmed number of starts,
namely 3. If after 30 minutes running the problem is not solved, the system begins applying the reduced power and
torque curves, eventually entering the next phase of emergency start.
After 3 consecutive starts (even shorter than 30 minutes), if the problem is still unsolved the system goes into the emer-
gency start phase anyhow.

Emergency start
The system goes into the emergency start phase in two cases:
–– When during the previous session a class 1 error (e.g. liquid level) was detected and the system has undergone a
Very heavy limitation. In this case the system turns the engine off after 30 seconds until the problem is solved. If the
problem is solved, the engine is turned off after 30 seconds in every case. At the next start the engine will return to
normal operation.

–– When during the previous session the system entered the validation phase and performed 3 starts in the presence
of class 3 errors or poor quality fluid, without solving the problems. In this case the system is unable to eliminate the
error signal and the engine stop after 30 seconds. Therefore it will remain in this state even after solving the problem.
Only authorised technical personnel of your Dealer are able to remove the error signals.
4
WARNING: There are no limits to the number of starts. The only limit consists in the engine stopping after 30
seconds.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-17

Instruments and Programming

Service interval

The service timer warns the operator that a service is needed.

When the timer reaches 0, the operator is warned by the menu displayed for 5” and the hour meter blinking. The same
display is repeated every time the key is ON in pop-up mode, up to the reset of counter for service.

When the menu is displayed, to avoid a recurrence of the pop-up, just set a new value in the AC9 menu (see page 4-47).
If the operator, in the future:
• If the operator no longer wants to use this feature, a 0 value must be set in the AC9 menu.
• wants to see this pop-up again, a value different from 0 must be set in the AC9 menu.

The service indicator countdowns the hours to the next service only when the engine is running.

If the service interval in the accessory menu AC9 is set on 0, the count for the service interval is disabled. The factory
pre-set value is 0.

Operator Presence Alarm

When the seat sensor activates the buzzer, the seat icon appears on the display as a low priority pop-up.
Refer to "Management of operator present control" in this section to understand the logic of the sensor.
If the seat sensor alarm is not active, this menu is not displayed.

4-18 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Transmission shuttle modulation

The cursor shows clutch engagement modulation.

Slow

Medium

Fast


Press Enter to enter the submenu, change the setting as required and best suit the operation or conditions. 4

Encoder clockwise rotation

Press
Enter

Encoder anticlockwise rotation

Turning the Encoder will change the value as indicated on the diagram.
• to increase the value, the sign “+” is highlights (white symbol on black)
• to reduce the value, the sign “-” is highlights (white symbol on black)

The signs “+” and “-” are not highlighted if no change of value is being carried out.

If Esc is pressed while changing the value the value remains unchanged.

Press and hold Enter to store new value.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-19

Instruments and Programming

Controller Message Requests

The instrument cluster displays the following pop-ups with a high priority as required by the transmission controller:

The operator must depress the clutch pedal

The operator must release the parking brake

The transmission oil temperature is low. Wait for oil to reach the right temperature
before starting work.

The transmission oil temperature is high. Stop the tractor and wait for oil to cool
down.

The transmission controller does not succeed in engaging the selected speed. This
icon generally appears during a downshift request (tipically when driving down
slopes with a load pushing on the tractor). The vehicle gathered to much speed.

Use the brakes to reduce the tractor’s speed and to allow the selected gear to
be engaged.

4-20 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

The transmission clutches temperature is high. Engage a lower speed.

Counters
This menu shows the 4 different parameters that can be recorded at any one time. It is possible to record up to four
separate counters (fields or tasks).
The start page of this menu is:

Distance covered
Area worked
Litres of fuel used 4
Work hours
The number “1”/4 shows that the first counter of 4 is being displayed (the last menu
selected), to change between counters press “Enter” and “Esc” will show on the
display, turn the encoder to select the desired counter.

At the highest level of this menu (see image at page beginning), push Enter to go at a submenu (see image below). These
menus only differ for the word Esc. To scroll the 4 counters, turn the Encoder clockwise or anticlockwise.
It the counter is operating, the sequence number at the bottom of the page (1/4 in the image above) flashes to indicate
this. The counter used in the main page is the last used.

In the following example, the third timer is selected.

At this level it is possible to switch from one counter to another.

Press “Enter” and hold to reset the selected counter to zero.
To commence counting momentarily press “Enter”
To stop or pause momentarily press “Enter”
If you press the “Esc” button, the display reverts back to the previous menu.

Calibration
By this menu all electronic controllers can be calibrated.

Have this done by a workshop authorised by Argo Tractors.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-21

Instruments and Programming

AVC - Auxiliary control valves

This allows setup of each auxiliary remote valve mounted on the tractor.
If the following is displayed a problem has occurred. Refer to your dealer.

The number of auxiliary control valves varies according to tractor version and the status of each one is displayed.

Fig. AVC1

Explanation of graphics in the AVC1 figure

NOTE: The symbols (+ extending) & (- retracting) show the oil flow direction which also corresponds to the marking on
the valve at the rear of the tractor.

A. Valve number
N°
Front hitch Front loader Indication showing in the field A of the display
Valve
3 Not present Not present R1 – R2 – R3
4 Not present Not present R1 – R2 – R3 – R4
5 Present Not present R1 – R2 – R3 – F1 – F2
5 Not present Not present R1 – R2 – R3 – R4 – R5
6 Present Not present R1 – R2 – R3 – R4 - F1 – F2
7 Not present Present R1 – R2 – R3 – L1 – L2 – L3 – L4
7 Present Not present R1 – R2 – R3 – R4 – R5 - F1 – F2
8 Not present Present R1 – R2 – R3 – R4 - L1 – L2 – L3 – L4
9 Present Present R1 –R2 – R3 – F1 – F2 - L1 – L2 – L3 – L4
9 Not present Present R1 –R2 – R3 – R4 – R5 - L1 – L2 – L3 – L4
10 Present Present R1 – R2 – R3 – R4 - F1 – F2 - L1 – L2 – L3 – L4
11 Present Present R1 – R2 – R3 – R4 – R5 - F1 – F2 - L1 – L2 – L3 – L4

4-22 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

B. % of oil flow through valve in the (- retracting) phase.

C. % of oil flow through valve in the (+ extending) phase.
D. Graph of the oil flow through the valve.

1 2

3 4

Vertical bar (1) indicates 0%.

Triangle (2) represents the maximum % in the (+) phase.
Triangle (3) represents the maximum % in the (-) phase.
Black rectangle (4) indicates % of oil flow at that moment.
The rectangle to the right of centre (+) phase to left (-) phase.
E. This field can display one of the symbols shown in the following table:

Valve status Displayed symbol

Neutral N
(+)
(-) 4
Hydraulic motor mode

Floating mode
(+) time-delayed
(-) time-delayed

The arrow pointing to the right indicates the (+) phase, the arrow pointing to the left the (-) phase.
F. This symbols shows that the time-delay operation mode is enabled: the valve will only operate for the time shown
in the field (G).

Time-delay mode Displayed symbol

ON

OFF

G. This field shows the time, in seconds, in which the valve will operate in time-delay mode if the time-delay mode of
the same valve is enabled.
H. This field displays the valve status:

Valve status Displayed symbol

Blocked

Unblocked

I. See point “H” above.

L. See point “E” above.
M. The vertical bar has a fixed length, while position and dimensions of the mobile black rectangle vary according to the
total number of AVP to be displayed and to how the user is browsing.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-23

Instruments and Programming

When the main page of the AVC menu is displayed, press Enter to access the various valves to set their parameters as
required. Turn the Encoder to go from a valve to the next one. The highlighted number shows which valve is selected.

Encoder anticlockwise rotation

Enter pressed

Encoder clockwise rotation Encoder anticlockwise rotation

Encoder clockwise
rotation

Esc pressed

4-24 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

If you quit the AVC menu and then enter it again, the instrument cluster will show
the last graphics shown before quitting.
Example:
• the valve n. 4 was displayed/changed (Fig. AVC2)
• the AVC menu is quitted
• upon returning to the AVC menu, the graphics is the same as in the Fig. AVC2.

Fig. AVC2

Press Enter to access the fields to be changed to set the parameters of the selected valve.
Turn the Encoder to go from a field to the next one as in the example shown here.
NOTE: the examples shows how to scroll through the parameters of the valve 1. The same procedure can be applied to
all the available valves.

Encoder clockwise
4
rotation

Encoder anticlock-
wise rotation
Enter pressed

Encoder clock- Encoder anticlock-

wise rotation wise rotation
Encoder
anticlock-
wise
rotation

Encoder clock- Encoder anticlock-

wise rotation wise rotation
Encoder clock-
wise rotation

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-25

Instruments and Programming

After highlighting a parameter, press Enter to change its value. While the value is being changed, the value flashes at 0.5
s intervals. If a general error (minor or major) occurs during the input of values, the instrument cluster will display it only
after the value has been changed.

Oil flow percentage setting

Enter pressed

Esc pressed
1 2

Press Enter
(longer pressure)
stored value

NOTE: this procedure may be used to set parameters both for the (+) and for the (-) phase.
Key
1. Encoder clockwise rotation: to increase a factory set value
2. Encoder anticlockwise rotation: to reduce a factory set value

Timer setting

Enter pressed

Esc pressed
1 2

Press Enter
(longer pressure)
stored value

Key
1. Encoder clockwise rotation: to increase a factory set value
2. Encoder anticlockwise rotation: to reduce a factory set value

Valve lock setting

Enter pressed

Esc pressed
1 2

Press Enter
(longer pressure)
stored value

Key
1. Encoder clockwise rotation: closed valve
2. Encoder anticlockwise rotation: open valve

4-26 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Engine controller menu

A and B are always displayed. The alarm icons are displayed only when an alarm is enabled.

A - Instant consumption: instant consumption of fuel litres in a hour.

B - Worked area: instant worked area in hectars per hour.

Warning Display

Warning Symbol Description

Pre-heating grid heater

4
Indicator light of water in fuel

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-27

Instruments and Programming

Adjustment of screen, lamps and indicators brightness

With this menu the brightness of the screen can be adjusted for night time operation. The start page is as follows:

When Ent is displayed at the bottom left of the start page this indicates a submenu can be accessed to change the values.

To change the brightness, press the button Enter, then turn the Encoder clockwise to increase the brightness by 1 level, or
anticlockwise to decrease of 1 level. When the Encoder is turned in either direction, the square of - or + turns black while
the sign turns white. Press the Enter button 2 seconds long to save the new level; the control goes to the start page. If
during brightness adjustment the button Esc is pressed, the previous brightness level remains unchanged. In the bright-
ness adjustment page, Ent means that the value can be saved, while Esc means exit from the brightness adjustment.

If a general error (minor or major) occurs during the input of values, the instrument cluster will display it only after the
end of the adjustment.

Encoder anticlock-
wise rotation

Enter
depressed

Encoder clockwise
rotation

During brightness adjustment, whether sidelights are on or not, the instrument cluster adjusts its brightness to the changes
being made. Once the new setting is saved, if the sidelight are on, the new setting is immediately applied, otherwise the
setting is remembered and the instrument cluster uses the maximum brightness.

4-28 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Front axle suspension adjustment

If the following is displayed contact your dealer for technical assistance.

With this menu you can manually set the suspension height of the front axle. This setting will automatically be overridden
once you travel above 14km/hr when the axle returns to its central position.

WARNING: with the tractor at standstill, the raising and lowering

movements are dangerous for anyone standing by the front axle.

WARNING: do not carry out any adjustments of the front axle height if
there are persons near the tractor’s front axle or surrounding area.
4

Press Enter to change the suspension height.

Turn the Encoder:
• clockwise to select the up arrow and press Enter to increase the height,
• anticlockwise to select the down arrow and press Enter to reduce the height.

Esc pressed

Esc pressed
2

Enter pressed
1

Enter pressed Enter pressed

Key
1. Encoder clockwise rotation
2. Encoder anticlockwise rotation

When the front axle is operating in auto mode, a pop-up with low priority is
shown as indicated at the side.
The letter “A” shows that the axle is in auto mode.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-29

Instruments and Programming

Fully Automatic Shifting

(If Equipped)

This indication is not shown if the APS Road

function is missing.

If the display shows a series of dashes it means an error has occurred. Contact your dealer for technical support.

This menu is accessed either with the Encoder or when the APS button on the armrest is pressed until the menu “Auto
Road” comes up.

When by turning the APS potentiometer on the arm-rest a deviation greater than 2% on the previous value is reached,
the low priority pop-up menu shows a new value in the field (A).

The displayed values refer only to the APS Auto Road mode (not to APS Auto Field and Manual APS modes), however
the menu displays additional paramaters.

Powershift gear indicator

 Range indicator

If equipped the numbers in the “START” and “STOP” refer to the power shift/range gear the transmission will be using
as a default in certain operating modes.

For further details on the “AUTO ROAD” mode, see the “Operation” section of this manual.

4-30 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

The numbers in the “START” and “STOP” panels can be changed with the following operations (only when equipped with
Automatic Shifting):

1 2

3 2 3 2

2
4
1 4

6
5

Key
1. Enter pressed
2. Encoder clockwise rotation
3. Encoder anticlockwise rotation
4. Esc pressed
5. Encoder clockwise rotation: to increase a factory set value
6. Encoder anticlockwise rotation: to reduce a factory set value

After highlighting a parameter, press Enter to change its value during which time it will flash at 0.5second intervals. To
store the new value press Enter and the digit remains constant.
To cancel a parameter change press Esc (the digit stops flashing) and returns to the previously set value.
If a general error (minor or major) occurs during the input of values, the instrument cluster will display this only after the
value has been changed.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-31

Instruments and Programming

Constant engine RPM

Press button (1) on the joystick to save the engine rpm.
After pressing button (1), a menu is displayed for 5 sec-
onds indicating the value.

After pressing the button (1), a low priority pop-up like the one underneath is displayed for 5” to inform the operator that
the constant engine rpm rate has been saved.

The engine symbol and the indication “n/min” are always displayed.

Engine rpm example

The symbol means the value is stored.



When the engine cruise speed is disabled, no value is displayed and the symbol is replaced by symbol .

When the cruise control is cancelled the minimum engine is dependant on the hand throttle position.

4-32 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

My function
Using this menu one of four functions can be associated to “My” button on the multi-function handle.

The “My” beside the icon shows which function is currently associated to “My”
button on the Multi Function controller.

The vertical bar has a fixed length, while position and dimensions of the mobile
black rectangle vary according to the total number of icons to be displayed and
to how the user is browsing.

Displayed symbol Function

Differential lock

Four-wheel drive

De-clutch 4
APS Automatic Powershift

Press Enter to browse the icons or assign a new function to the “My” button.
Browse by turning the Encoder.
When the icon to be associated with the “My” button is reached, press Enter. A buzzer will sound signalling the selected
function is being saved. The relative LED on the joystick will also light up next to “My” Button.

1 2 2 2

3 3

Key
1. Enter pressed
2. Encoder clockwise rotation
3. Encoder anticlockwise rotation

In each mask of the above diagram, except the first on top left, if Esc is pressed the instrument cluster will show the
mask at top left with the same icon before entering the menu.

If a general error (minor or major) occurs while the “My” button is being set up, the instrument cluster will only display
the error/s when the setting is completed.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-33

Instruments and Programming

If the following is displayed contact your dealer for technical support.

4-34 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

PTO Drive Engagement

This menu is used to adjust the PTO clutch engagement time.

1 2

4
4
Key
1. Enter button pressed
2. Encoder clockwise rotation: the cursor is moved to the right (+)
3. Encoder anticlockwise rotation: the cursor is moved to the left (-)
4. Press and hold Enter button: cursor position stored

Press Enter. A buzzer sounds to signal that the cursor position was correctly saved.

In all diagrams with Esc displayed if the Esc button is pressed the instrument cluster will revert back to the original display.

If a general error (minor or major) occurs while this function is being set, the instrument cluster will only display the error/s
when the setting is completed.

If this display is shown either

• an error occurred, contact your dealer for technical support.

• an attempt was made to change the setting with the PTO running.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-35

Instruments and Programming

Error Codes/Alarm Messages

If no alarms is displayed and the system detects one at least, the high priority pop-up as shown under is shown to indicate
the total number of alarms.

Number of present/detected alarms

Indicated 4 alarms present/number of pages

The first page shows the number of present alarms, that are shown in the fol-
lowing pages.

This display is only shown if an active error/s occur in the tractors CAN Bus system.
To access the codes press Enter and the relevant controller and code will be displayed.
If more than one alarm is present turn the Encoder to scroll through each alarm/message.

ECU - Control unit that detects the error

SPN and FMI are the values that must be communicated to the dealers service department
to help identify the problem.

2/4 indicates: 2nd alarm of 4 being displayed.



Press Esc to leave alarm display and return to the main page.
If the alarm lists change during these displays, the system updates the list, but the screen shows the same alarm.

4-36 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Transmission display area

Gear and range engaged

Range engaged

4
Powershift Engaged

Speed indicator Indicator sensitivity

0,1 kph (or mph for NAO markets)


NOTE: If the instrument cluster shows a series of dashes, contact your Dealer for service.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-37

Instruments and Programming

Driving direction

The tractor symbol is always lit.

The display shows the following icons when:

Forward driving direction (arrow up is lit).

Reverse driving direction (arrow down is lit).

A malfunction detected (both arrows are lit). Contact your dealer for technical support.

4-38 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Automatic Powershift (APS)

In the Transmission display area, the instrument cluster will display one of the following statuses, depending on the set-
tings made by the APS button on the armrest.

APS in manual mode (MAN). The Powershift gear change and the range selection are carried
out manually. Refer to the “Operation” section in this manual.

APS in AUTO FIELD mode. The transmission will change powershift speeds only within the
range selected based on engine load.

APS in automatic mode (AUTO ROAD) (if equipped). The transmission changes Powershift 4
speeds and range on the base of the settings defined by the operator. Refer to “Fully Automatic
Shifting” on page 4-30 and the “Operation” section in this manual.

Constant engine RPM

When the “Constant engine rpm” is enabled, in the Transmission display area the engine
symbol will be displayed with an “M” inside as shown here at the side.

When the function "constant engine rpm" is disabled, the symbol is replaced by
the symbol .

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-39

Instruments and Programming

Power Take Off Menu


Front PTO symbol lit up Symbol of rear PTO
only if front PTO is provided Always lit up

Front PTO speed Rear PTO speed

Rear PTO speed

NOTE: Data concerning the front PTO are displayed only if the front PTO is mounted.

Overspeed of rear and front PTO

If an overspeed is detected, the exclamation mark is lit
and the actual speed of the PTO flashes.

Overspeed Overspeed
Front PTO Rear PTO

Speed of front PTO

If the front PTO is engaged, the display will show the speed of the front PTO.

RPM of front PTO = engine RPM x 0.5

The RPM of the front PTO is exactly the half of the engine RPM.

If an overspeed is detected, the speed rate flashes.

Speed of rear PTO

The speed of the rear PTO is displayed.

If an overspeed is detected, the speed rate flashes.

Speed of rear PTO engaged

Refer to “Selected PTO speed rate” on page 4-52.

4-40 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Auto PTO (automatic PTO)

When the operator selects the Auto PTO function, the PTO area in the display is refreshed as follows:

Refer to the “Operation” section in this manual for further information on the auto PTO function.

Stationary tractor
When the stationary tractor status is enabled, the PTO area in the display is refreshed as follows:

The symbol is displayed as long as the “Stationary tractor” mode is enabled. When the “Stationary tractor” mode

is exited, the symbol is replaced by the tractor symbol .

IMPORTANT: The Stationary tractor function cannot be entered when the tractor is on the move.

NOTE: The Stationary tractor function is disengaged automatically as soon as the tractor starts moving.

When the “stationary tractor” work mode is activated, the instrument cluster display shows the following icon as a low
priority pop-up.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-41

Instruments and Programming

Accessories menu

Ignition key OFF

Ignition key OFF
(engine off) Ignition key ON

General use of the tractor

Enter pressed 3”
Ignition key OFF

Ignition key ON

Long pressure on Esc

Ignition key OFF: no storing

No operation for 10": exit from

menu

Configuration menu Engine on

1
2
Enter pressed
No operation for 10"

Esc pressed
no storing

no storing

Start up without any storing

Changing parameters
3 4

Longer press on Enter

Longer press on Enter

Setting saved

Key
1. Encoder clockwise rotation: next menu
2. Encoder anticlockwise rotation: previous menu
3. Encoder clockwise rotation: to increase a factory set value
4. Encoder anticlockwise rotation: to reduce a factory set value

4-42 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Changing parameters
Parameters are of 2 types:
• Numbers or values to set after selecting among preset values.
• Number parameters change one digit at a time.

To change Parameters scroll the encoder either clockwise or anticlockwise. The value increases or decreases depending
on direction it is turned.
Clockwise: 1->2->3->4->1.
Anticlockwise 4<3<2<1<4

If you enter the write mode, the whole number flashes (each flash 0.5 seconds if not otherwise specified). The value is
increased or decreased one unit at a time by turning the encoder clockwise/anticlockwise. When the maximum/minimum
value is reached, the parameter goes back to the maximum/minimum value.

Arrows will become shaded indicating the direction when the encoder is tunred

No rotation of Encoder Encoder anticlockwise rotation Encoder clockwise rotation

4

AC 0: Instrument Panel Parameters

The display shows the information contained in the instrument panel.
0: 0 Accessories Menu
Software/Loader: name and version of software.
Par: versions of parameters. The displayed name indicates tractor model and parameters.
HW: HW version
SN: production number.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-43

Instruments and Programming

AC 1: Implement width (calculates area worked)

Implement width: this value allows a calculation to area worked.
Dimension adjustable from 0 to 99.99 meters or from 0 to 109.35 yards
0: means not defined: worked area not activated
The measurement unit is automatically related to the sales market. Meters EURO; yard NAO

Previous configuration
1 1 Next configuration
menu menu
2 Configuration menu for 2
implement width

4 3 5 4 5

6 Enter pressed briefly. 3 Enter pressed briefly. 6

The digits after the The digits before the
point are flashing. point are flashing.
7 3 7

8
8
Longer press on Enter
Setting saved

Key
1. Encoder anticlockwise rotation
2. Encoder clockwise rotation
3. Enter pressed for a short time
4. No activity within 10 seconds
5. Esc button depressed
6. Encoder clockwise rotation: to increase value
7. Anticlockwise rotation: to reduce value
8. Enter button pressed and held

4-44 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

AC 4: Power Take Off Type

This menu is for dealer technician only.
DO NOT enter this menu.

AC 5: Sales market Euro/NAO

The menu selects EURO: Europe or NAO North America

Selection EURO or NAO will change the following measurement units:

EURO NAO Conversion factor

Speed kph mph km/h to Mph / 1.609
Area worked ha acre ha to acre x 2.47
Distance km mile km to mile / 1.609
Area/hour worked ha/h Acre/h ha/h to Acre/h x 2.47
Fuel l USA gallons From l to gallons x 0.26417

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-45

Instruments and Programming

AC 7: Clock
Display is in 24h

Previous configuration
1 1 Next configuration
menu menu
2 Configuration menu of 2
Clock

4 3 5 4 5

6 Enter pressed briefly. 3 Enter pressed briefly.

6
Minute digits are
Hour digits are flashing
flashing
7 3 7

8
8
Longer press on Esc
Setting saved

Key
1. Encoder anticlockwise rotation
2. Encoder clockwise rotation
3. Enter pressed for a short time
4. No activity within 10 seconds
5. Esc button depressed
6. Encoder clockwise rotation: to increase value
7. Anticlockwise rotation: to reduce value
8. Enter button pressed and held

4-46 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

AC 8: Work hours offset

This menu is for dealer technician only.

DO NOT enter this menu.

AC 9: Service interval
This is a simple count-down timer that can be set by the operator. In normal operation, when the timer reaches 0 the
spanner symbol will show on the right-hand panel of the cluster.

The operator may set a new value at any time or a enter 0 meaning no service interval is set.

The factory set value for this menu is 0.

AC 10: Configuration ECU matrix display

This menu is for dealer technician only.
DO NOT enter this menu.

AC 11: Default parameters

This menu is for dealer technician only.
DO NOT enter this menu.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-47

Instruments and Programming

Functionality
WARNING:
NEVER ignore signals from indicator lights and messages.
Stop the tractor in a safe position.

Indicator lights/Indicators/LCD screen activation

Indicator lamp
Red colour

Ignition key ON
Parking brake not engaged - Indicator light OFF
Parking brake engaged and stationary tractor - Indicator light ON
Parking brake engaged and tractor on the go - Indicator light on and flashing (these two conditions will stay active as long
as one of the indicated conditions remains present)

Ignition key OFF

If the parking brake is disengaged
The indicator light flashing for 10 seconds (or until engagement of the parking brake)
Buzzer ON for 10 seconds (or until engagement of the parking brake)

Transition from key ON to key OFF:

Parking brake not engaged
Indicator light ON 5"
Buzzer ON 5"

Insufficient pressure in the trailer brake circuit (hydraulic/air circuit)

Indicator lamp
Red colour

Ignition key ON
Pressure OK - System OK - Indicator light OFF
Low pressure in the circuit - Indicator light ON

Ignition key OFF

Function not active.

Pressure in the air trailer brake circuit

This function is active if air trailer brakes are fitted.
In case of low pressure or if an alarm condition is detected in the air braking system, the instrument cluster display will
show the following images as a high priority pop-up.

"Low" is flashing to show a low pressure in the system

The graphic bar range is 0 to 8 bars.

If the system is not at working pressure an audible alarm plus warning light are activated.
If the system detects an error a message only is displayed, the audible alarm and warning light are deactivated.

4-48 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Battery charging Turn right Indicator

Indicator lamp Indicator lamp
Red colour Colour green

Ignition key: indicator light on Ignition key ON

Ignition key ON - Engine started: Indicator light OFF. If the Turn indicator off - Light OFF
indicator light lights up, this means that the battery is not Turn indicator on - Light ON
being charged (fault). Ignition key OFF
Turn indicator off - Light OFF
Turn indicator on - Light ON
Driving beams
Indicator lamp
Blue colour Turn indicator of the first trailer
Indicator lamp
Ignition key ON Colour green
Driving beams off - Light OFF
Driving beams on - Light ON Ignition key ON
Turn indicators off - Light OFF
Ignition key OFF Turn indicators on - Light ON
If the beams are lit Ignition key OFF
Indicator light ON 5" Turn indicators off - Light OFF
Buzzer ON 5" Turn indicators on - Light ON
4
Transition from key ON to key OFF:
Driving beams ON Turn indicator of the second trailer
Indicator light ON 5" Indicator lamp
Buzzer ON 5" Colour green

Ignition key ON
Side lights Turn indicators off - Light OFF
Indicator lamp Turn indicators on - Light ON
Colour green Ignition key OFF
Turn indicators off - Light OFF
Ignition key ON Turn indicators on - Light ON
Side lights off - Light OFF
Side lights on - Light ON
Diff lock engaged
Ignition key OFF Indicator lamp
If the side light are lit Colour yellow
Indicator light ON 5"
Buzzer ON 5"
Ignition key ON
Transition from key ON to key OFF: Lock engaged - Light ON
Side lights on Lock disengaged - Light OFF
Indicator light ON 5" Ignition key OFF - Not enabled
Buzzer ON 5"

4-wheel drive engaged

Turn Left Indicator Indicator lamp
Indicator lamp Colour yellow
Colour green

Ignition key ON Ignition key ON

Turn indicator off - Light OFF 4WD engaged - Light ON
Turn indicator on - Light ON 4WD disengaged - Light OFF
Ignition key OFF - Not enabled
Ignition key OFF
Turn indicator off - Light OFF
Turn indicator on - Light ON

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-49

Instruments and Programming

Hydraulic filter clogged Water in the fuel circuit

Indicator lamp Indication on LCD display
Colour yellow No indicator light, alarm displayed on LCD in engine ECU
menu (see 2.2.2.9)
Ignition key ON - Engine ON
Clogged filter - Light ON
Ignition key ON - Engine OFF
Clogged filter - Light ON
Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Low pressure in the hydraulic circuit

Indicator lamp
Red colour

Ignition key ON - Engine ON

Low pressure and engine temperature over 60° (*) - Light Ignition key ON
ON Water present - Alarm displayed on LCD
Ignition key ON - Engine OFF Ignition key OFF - Not enabled
Low pressure - Light ON
Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

* If the engine temperature is not detected the warning Low engine oil pressure
is still displayed. Indicator lamp
Red colour

Rear PTO engaged Malfunction - Indicator light steadily on

Indicator lamp Request of oil change - Light flashing
Colour yellow When engine oil is changed, the control unit reset the
engine oil life counter to zero and signals this by 3 flashes
Ignition key ON of the indicator light.
Rear PTO engaged - Light ON
Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Clogged engine air filter

Indicator lamp
Front PTO engaged Red colour
Indicator lamp
Colour yellow Ignition key ON
Clogged filter - Light ON, service required
Ignition key ON Ignition key OFF - Not enabled
Front PTO engaged - Light ON
Ignition key OFF - Not enabled
Glow plugs
The front PTO speed is a calculation of the engine RPM: No indicator light. Indication on LCD
refer to 4-40 for display of the front PTO speed. The indication lights up on LCD

Problem in the tractor brake system Ignition key ON

Glow plugs activated - Indication on LCD
(oil level/pressure) Glow plugs not activated - Indication on LCD
Indicator lamp Ignition key OFF - Not enabled
Red colour

Ignition key ON
Problem of oil level/pressure - Light ON
Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

4-50 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Master warning Fault in the anti-polluting system

Indicator light Indicator light
Colour yellow Colour yellow

Ignition key ON
See "Alarms generated by the instrument cluster" on Ignition key ON
page 4-54. The indicator light comes on if a fault in the Engine Emis-
Ignition key OFF - Not enabled sion control System occurs or AdBlue™ or DEF is of poor
quality.

The indicator light may be in one of the following condi-

Stop tions:
Indicator light • constant indicating a major problem has occurred
Red colour • flashing to indicate a minor problem has occured

Ignition key ON NOTE: if the light is constant refer to your Dealers techni-
See "Alarms generated by the instrument cluster" on cal department.
page 4-54.
Ignition key OFF - Not enabled Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Engine Error
Low AdBlue™ or DEF level
Indicator light
4
Indicator light Colour yellow
Colour yellow

Ignition key ON Ignition key ON

See "Alarms generated by the instrument cluster" on The indicator light will come on in case of a fault in the
page 4-54. AdBlue or DEF level control system, or when the level in
Ignition key OFF - Not enabled the reservoir is low.

The indicator light may be in one of the following condi-

tions:
• constant indicating a serious low level of AdBlue™ or
DEF in the reservoir
• flashing indicates the need to re fill the AdBlue™ or DEF
reservoir if left this will become constant.

Refer also to “AdBlue™ or DEF level” on page 4-14.

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-51

Instruments and Programming

Creeper Engagement Fuel indicator light and gauge

No indicator light.
In the Transmission display area, the instrument cluster Indicator light
will display the symbol instead of . Colour yellow

Ignition key ON 1 - Empty

Lamp ON - Indicator light comes on when the gauge
enters the yellow sector.
Creeper engaged 2-3-4 Normal level
5 - Full

Creeper not engaged

Ignition key OFF - Not enabled

Selected PTO speed rate When the fuel reaches the reserve level, the indicator light
Refer to PTO display area comes on and stays lit.
PTO 1000 RPM engaged NOTE: If an error is detected in the sensor, the gauge
pointer goes to position 1 with the indicator light off. Refer
to your Dealer's workshop and communicate which alarm
is displayed on the instrument cluster.

PTO 1000E RPM engaged

PTO 540 RPM engaged

PTO 540E RPM engaged

4-52 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Engine RPM rate Engine De-rate Indicator

Indicator light
Colour yellow

The indicator light comes on to indicate an engine power

reduction. In general, the light will come on in case of a
problem in message transmission on the can line or along
with problems connected with exhaust gas treatment
together with the indicator lights:

Fault in the Engine Emission control System

If the engine starts racing (> 2600 RPM) the pointer re-
mains at full scale.
Low AdBlue™ or DEF level
NOTE: if the needle stuck at full scale refer to your Dealers
technical department.
NOTE: if the light is constant refer to your Dealers techni-
Engine coolant temperature cal department.
Indicator light
Red colour 4
The indicator light illuminates as follows:
• constant to warn that a critical temperature is being
reached. Stop the engine as soon as possible and
investigate the problem.
• flashing light to warn that a critical temperature has
been reached. STOP THE TRACTOR IMMEDIATELY.

WARNING: Before any inspection takes place make

sure that the engine has cooled down to a safe level
taking extreme care when checking oil or radiator
coolant levels. Refer to section 7 for correct procee-
dures.

- Blue area A to B: low temperature.

- White area B to F: normal operating temperature.
- Red area F-G: overheating. Again reference to contacting
your dealer consistent.

NOTE: if the light is lit up flashing, refer to your Dealer's

service.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-53

Instruments and Programming

Instrument Cluster Alarms And Error Error displaying

Displays Only active alarms /errors are displayed on the instrument
The instrument cluster displays all errors generated in cluster in real time.
various components and systems of the tractor,
All errors are memorised, so it is possible to have a his- SPN & FMI codes are are displayed for a minimum of 5
tory of errors for a quick search by the service operators. seconds
For Error code retrieval see “Error Codes/Alarm Messages”
on page 4-36
Instrument Cluster generated
Errors can be displayed in two ways:
1. Directly, the display shows actual errors. CAUTION
2. Through instruments available to personnel of the Ignoring alarms or error codes may result in serious
Dealer's specialised workshop. damage or breakdown.

Each alarm may be accompanied by an error code display

identified by the relevant electronic module (IC, ECU, TC
or ICH) consisting of an SPN & FMI codes. This informa-
tion could be requested by the dealer to assist problem Machine Working Hours
diagnosis. Each alarm /error code is stored in the relevant
controller and can only be accessed by the Dealers techni-
cal department.

clock
General alarms (yellow)
actual hours
worked by the
The indicator light may be in one of the following condi- tractor
tions:
- Off The display shows the actual hours worked by the tractor.
- On
- Flashing (Slowly) The value on the hour counter cannot be changed or
deleted.

Engine alarms (yellow)

The value displayed ranges from 0.0 to 999999.9. When
the value 999999.9 is reached, the hour counter stops.

The indicator light may be in one of the following condi-

tions:
- Off
- On
- Flashing (Slowly)
- Flashing (Quickly)

General alarms (red)

The indicator light may be in one of the following condi-

tions:
- Off
- On
- Flashing (Slowly)

4-54 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Operator Presence Control Function

WARNING: Movement of the tractor is not permitted unless the operator is correctly seated in the driver’s
seat. To warn the operator of incorrect usage, the tractor has an audible alarm that sounds when the op-
erator is not correctly seated in driving position when the machine is in use.

WARNING: It is both illegal and dangerous to tamper with this component and is not permitted under any
circumstance. Contact your Dealer immediately if the system is not operating correctly.

Contact your Dealer immediately if the system is not operating correctly.

The instrument cluster includes an operators present alarm logic, that warns the operator if they should leave the seat
without engaging the parking brake and shifting the shuttle lever to neutral.

The instrument cluster will activate the buzzer according to the following logic:

Case 1: Ignition key OFF

If the parking brake is disengaged, the indicator light "parking brake" flashes and at the same time the buzzer is activate
for 10 seconds until the parking brake is engaged.

Case 2: Engine ON
If the sensor detects the absence of the operator and the shuttle lever is not in neutral or the parking brake is not engaged,
the buzzer is activated. The indicator light “parking brake” flashes only if the parking brake is not engaged. Alarms are 4
active until the shuttle lever is in neutral, parking brake engaged or operator seated.

Case 3: Ignition key ON - Engine OFF

If the sensor detects that the operator is not present and the parking brake is not engaged, the buzzer activates and the
indicator light "parking brake" flashes for 5 seconds.

When the operator present switch on the seat activates the buzzer, the following icon is displayed in pop-up mode and
low priority:

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-55

Instruments and Programming

Counters
A maximum of 4 parameters are displayed.

The instrument cluster memorises for each counter:

- Distance in km
- Area worked in hectares (ha)
- Fuel used in litres (l)
- Hour counter in hours (h)

The displayed units are based on the setting described in “AC5: Euro/NAO
The information are not lost when the tractor is off.

4-56 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Headland Management Function (HMF)

(if equipped).

With this feature the operator can gain access to a range of previously recorded headland management functions.

Example: to carry out a series of functions during a headland turn whilst ploughing the following could be recorded re-
duction in the engine rpm, raising the plough and then turning it over using a remote valve. Then such operations can be
repeated each time by just pressing a button.

The operations as recorded in the above example make up a sequence:

Sequence = operation 1 + operation 2 + operation 3

(reduce engine rpm rate) (raise the plough) (enable valve X for the function Y
of the plough)

Two separate sequences can be recorded and stored.

By means of the instrument display, the operator can enable the following HMF functions:
• recording a sequence
• carrying out a sequence
• viewing a sequence
4

HMF functional statuses

The HMF system can be in one of the following status:

• NORMAL (OFF): the memory contains valid sequences, but the HMF is neither in a recording nor in a viewing phase.
• RECORD: in this phase the operator can record the operations in a sequence. The recording can be carried out in
two modes: TIME or STEP; the instrument displays the enables recording mode. See “Recording” for further details.
• PLAY: the operations are carried out as recorded in the sequence during which the display shows the current opera-
tion, the next to be carried out and the previous operation. If the system is performing a STEP sequence, the operator
will press briefly the “Headland” button (1-Fig. HMF1 on next page) - or “Enter” - to go to the next operation and so
on to the last recorded operation.
• DISPLAY READING: it is possible to view on the dashboard all operations concerning the single sequence even when
the system is not in the playing or recording phase.
• ERROR: this condition comes up when the HMF system is disabled due to faults that are detected in the system. The
errors are read on the instrument display.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-57

Instruments and Programming

Controls of HMF functions

The controls to access and use the HMF are the “Headland” button as shown in Fig. HMF1 and the “Enable” button Fig.
HMF2.

 Fig. HMF1 Fig. HMF2

Phase / Action Control

Record Enter or a long press of HMF button when the record symbol is displayed.
Select Sequence 1 or 2 See page4-64.

When the corresponding menu is displayed, press briefly both the “Head-
Play
land” Button (1) & “Enable” button (2).
This starts the sequence
See page 4-62.

Switch from sequence 1 to sequence 2 To browse the sequences use the “Headland” button or the Encoder.
and back See page 4-59.

Go to the next operation

Press briefly the “Headland” button or press Enter.
(only for STEP sequences)

Access is gained by one of the following:

• press the “Headland” button
• press the “Mode” button on the armrest
Access to HMF menu
• browse the instrument menus

See page 4-59.

By means of the menu to select the sequence by pressing:

Viewing a sequence • the “Headland” button (longer pressure)
(system not in execution, and not record- • Enter
ing)
See page 4-59.

4-58 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

HMF menu
The display below is selected to manage the HMF functions

A
B

D
C
E

Indicated the presence of a submenu



Using the Enter or “Headland” button the following can be accessed:

A. submenu of sequence 1 where the operations recorded can be viewed.

B. submenu when it is possible to record the operations in sequence 1.
C. submenu of sequence 2 where the operations recorded can be viewed.
D. submenu when it is possible to record the operations in sequence 2.
E. submenu to select the record method, either TIME or STEP.
4
If an empty sequence is recalled (no recorded operations), the instrument shows 5” long the warning “EMPTY SE” as
shown below:

The next page, beginning from a general menu, shows the browsing path in the HMF menu by means of the “Headland”
and “Enable” buttons, combined with the turning of the Encoder and the Enter and Esc buttons.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-59

 Play graphics of Sequence 1

4-60
“Headland” pressed or
“Mode” pressed

2
Encoder clockwise (A)
rotation 1

General menu 3
Encoder
Esc pressed Esc pressed
anticlockwise
rotation

(B)

Esc pressed
4 2

rotation

Encoder
anticlockwise
3

4 Display of the operations

4 recorded in Sequence 1
Esc pressed

Encoder
anticlockwise
Encoder
rotation
anticlockwise
rotation
Instruments and Programming

Encoder
4 anticlockwise
rotation
4

Esc pressed
Key
1. Enter button pressed or monetary press on
4
“Headland” button
3 2. “Enable” button pressed and held then momentarily
press the “Headland” button
3. Enter button pressed or headland button pressed
5
4 and held
4. Momentarily press of “Headland” button or Encoder
rotated clockwise
4
5. Press and hold “Headland” button or momentarily
6 press Esc button
4 6. Press and hold either “Headland or Enter button or
momentarily press Esc button
6

X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Notes to the diagram in the previous page:

A. When the menu below is selected the highlighted number is the last sequence previewed or played.
Example: the operator plays Sequence 2, then quits the menu. When the operator accesses the menu again, “2” will
be highlighted.
If the menu is accessed for the first time, “1” will be highlighted.

B. when the menu below is selected, by momentarily pressing the “Headland” or “Enter” button the next operation in
the sequence will be highlighted When the last operation in the sequence has been reached momentarily pressing
the “Headland” or “Enter” button will return to the first recorded function in the sequence. It is possible to use the
Encoder to browse the operations of a displayed sequence.

A few display of the HMF menu show the indication highlighted by an arrow in the
image to the side. This indication is shown during the Play or Record or Display phase
of the system.

Letter H means HMF, the letter after H may be a T if it is a TIME sequence or a S if it is

a STEP sequence. The number refers to the first or second sequence.

This display could be one of the following: 4

HS - 1 : first STEP sequence is selected
HS - 2 : second STEP sequence is selected
HT - 1 : first TIME sequence is selected
HT - 2 : second TIME sequence is selected

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-61

Instruments and Programming

Play

To play a sequence, the operator should be correctly seated in the cab, the engine should be running and the parking
brake released.
When the operator selects the play function, the following is displayed:

NOTE: the Play menu, even if correctly recalled by the operator,

A will not be displayed if a calibration is being performed. The menu
will be displayed at the end of the calibration.

A. the “Play” symbol is highlighted in the Play phase (white triangle on black background)
B. the vertical bar has a fixed length, and the shaded position of the bar is dependant on the number of operations within
the sequence and the position of the current operation.
C. the current operation is highlighted by a frame only in STEP sequence. See a detailed description in the next pages.

IMPORTANT: while a sequence is being played, it is not possible to leave the current display with the Esc button.

The reproduction of a sequence is interrupted if:

- The operator stands up from the driver’s seat.
- The ESC navigation button is pressed.
- The park brake is engaged.
- The engine is turned off.
- The PTO external control button are operated.
- The external control button of the auxiliary control valves are operated.
- The clutch pedal is pressed.
- The operator requires the manual engagement of a function that is already engaged in the current sequence.
Example: The operator manually presses the button for 4WD engagement, but the same function is already contained
in the current sequence. The sequence play is then stopped.

After the Play phase, the display will show:

• the menu displayed before playing the sequence, if the “Headland” had been pressed.
• the menu shown in Fig. HMF3 if the “Mode” button on the armrest had been pressed. The highlighted number cor-
responds to the last played sequence.

 Fig. HMF3



4-62 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Beside the operations of a TIME sequence a time in seconds is shown (D -

figure beside) that gives the duration of each operation.
For each operation lasting more than 9.9 seconds, the instrument shows the
time without decimal digits (digits after the point). Example: 12.3 seconds
is shown as 12, 12.8 seconds as13.

A TIME sequence can be paused during play. During a pause, the symbol E
(figure on the side) is highlighted (white rectangle with black edges). During
a pause there is no way to exit the display. It is necessary to end playing.

This display will be shown if the operator tries to play a sequence without
fulfilling all the required conditions (see following table).

Beside the message “ERROR” a number will be displayed corresponding to

the reason that generated the error (see following table).

The instrument will show this error until the generating condition is still
present.

Error condition Value on display

Operator not seated 1
Engine not running 2
Park brake engaged 3
External controls enabled 4
Control not valid during the play phase 5
Empty sequence 6

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-63

Instruments and Programming

Record

To record a sequence, the operator should be correctly seated in the cab, the engine should be running, parking brake
released and external controls disabled.

Select the mode sub menu for the HMF display and select TIME or STEP see page 4-60

TIME sequence
While recording the operations, the system also stores the time required to carry out each one. While playing a TIME
sequence, the system will automatically repeat each operation with the recorded duration without any intervention
by the operator.
Example:
• the sequence recording starts
• the plough is raised after 1 second
• the engine rpm rate is reduced after 4 seconds
• sequence recording ends after 7 seconds.

The system will carry out the sequence according the times allowed to each operation:
• the sequence playing starts
• the plough is raised after 1 second
• the engine rpm rate is reduced after 4 seconds
• sequence play ends after 7 seconds.

STEP sequence
While recording the operations, the system stores the operations, but not the time required to carry out each one.
While a sequence is played in STEP mode, the system waits for the operator to press briefly the Headland button
before carrying out the next operation, and this for each operation in the sequence.
Example:
• the sequence recording starts
• the plough is raised after 1 second
• the engine rpm rate is reduced after 4 seconds
• sequence recording ends after 7 seconds.

The system will carry out the operations in the sequence:

• the sequence playing starts
• the plough is raised
• Headland button pressed after 10 seconds
• the engine rpm rate is reduced
• sequence play phase ended.

Go to the symbol (rec) beside the sequence to be recorded (SE 1 or SE 2), then momentarily press Enter or press hold
HMF button to start recording.

When the recording starts, a buzzer sounds for 5”and this display is shown.
The HS-1 in this example is flashing (refer page 4-61) and will continue to flash
until Record is stopped. The (rec) symbol is also highlighted.
The recording commences once the operator actions the first task in the
sequence.

4-64 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

S The system now records the operations into the sequence and displays the
last recorded operation ie No11, and current operation No12 is highlighted

IMPORTANT: while a sequence is being recorded, it is not possible to leave

this display with the Esc button.
If any error occurs during the recording phase, it will not be shown until the
recording is completed.

To stop recording Press Enter or press and hold “Headland” button until the
display shows recording stopped. At the end of the recording, the buzzer
sounds for 5” and “HS-1” stops flashing and the recorded sequence number
is displayed next to the HMF tractor symbol (1). The display will reverts
back to previous selection after 5 seconds.

This display will be shown along with an error number if the operator tries
to record a sequence or tries to pause a recording incorrectly.

Beside the message “ERROR” a number will be displayed corresponding to

the condition that generated an error (see following table).

The instrument will show this error until the generating condition is still
present.

The possible errors are shown below:

Error condition Value on display

Operator not seated 1
Engine not running 2
Park brake engaged 3
External controls enabled 4

NOTE: A stored sequence cannot be deleted. It is only possible to overwrite it with a new one.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-65

Instruments and Programming

Diagram of the recording phase start

(A)

Encoder Momentarily press headland button

anticlockwise or
rotation Encoder clockwise rotation Press and hold headland button
Encoder pressed

(B)
or

Encoder Momentarily press headland button

anticlockwise or
rotation Encoder clockwise rotation
Press and hold headland button
Encoder pressed
or

(C)

Encoder Momentarily press headland button

anticlockwise or
rotation Encoder clockwise rotation

4-66 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Instruments and Programming

Notes to the diagram in the previous page:

A. This display is shown after starting the recording phase. The system waits for the first operation to be started.

B. This display is shown after recording two operations: the operation now being recorded (number 2) is highlighted.

C. Generic display showing the last operation recorded before (operation n. 11) while the operation currently being
recorded (number 12) is highlights. Independently of the number of operations, the instrument will always show the
operation being recorded and the penultimate recorded one.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 4-67

Instruments and Programming

Page left intentionally blank.

4-68 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Section 5
Operation 5

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-1

Operation
GENERAL OPERATION
Before starting the engine
WARNING: An OPERATOR PRESENCE SAFETY
SWITCH is fitted on this tractor. ONLY oper-
ate the tractor when sitting on the seat. DO
NOT try to bypass the OPERATOR PRESENCE
SAFETY SWITCH, for example, by putting
heavy objects on the seat. This can result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Before starting the engine, be sure
all operating controls are in neutral and the
park brake is engaged. This will eliminate ac-
cidental movement of the machine or start up
of power driven equipment.
WARNING: Never start the engine in a closed
place. Always make sure that there is adequate
ventilation.
Do the following daily checks before starting the tractor.
1. Check all fluid levels; i.e. engine crankcase, transmis-
sion, coolant (in the recovery bottle) and fuel tank etc.
When checking the fuel level, make sure the tank is
filled with clean fuel. Make sure all persons that oper-
ate or do maintenance on the tractor understand that
clean fuel is important.
Clean around the fuel tank cap before you remove the
cap.
2. Check all lubrication fittings.
3. Check the water level in the batteries.
4. Check all around the tractor for leaks.
5. Check that all drive belts are adjusted correctly.
6. Remove any water or sediment from the fuel primary
filter.
7. Check the tyre pressures.
8. Make sure that the safety protection is installed in the
PTO, that must be in optimal conditions.
5-2
Start - Important recommendations
WARNING: Carefully read the starting instruc-
tions before starting the tractor.
WARNING: Always take into account the use
of the machine and the work place. Take
every precaution, specially if there is a high
risk of fire.
WARNING: DO NOT start the tractor from the
ground. Only start the tractor when you are
sitting in the driving seat.
WARNING: DO NOT start the tractor if the
bonnet is open or the guards are removed.
WARNING: The operator must always seat in
his/her place when driving the tractor both in
the field and on roads. DO NOT stand up from
your seat when the tractor is moving.
Run In Procedure
−− For a correct running in, it is necessary to observe all
precautions called for in the Maintenance section.
−− Continuous use of light loads when the engine is still
new may cause lubrication oil to enter the discharge
system.
−− You should begin using heavy loads as soon as the
engine is put into service and the coolant reaches a
minimum temperature of 60°C.
−− The engine will benefit if heavy loads are applied im-
mediately after the first start.
−− DO NOT run the engine for long periods at maximum
load.
−− Do NOT let the engine run for a long period at high
RPM without any draft applied. If the engine is used
without any drafts, be careful to keep the right operat-
ing temperature.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

STARTING PROCEDURE [4.1.c]
WARNING: On electrically operated 4WD trac-
tors, the 4WD clutch is spring loaded into
engagement and relies on hydraulic pressure
for disengagement. A failure in the 4WD hy-
draulic system will therefore automatically
engage the 4WD even though the 4WD switch
is in the disengaged position. This is a built
in safety feature. DO NOT operate 4WD trac-
tor transmissions with the rear wheels off
the ground or removed, UNLESS THE FRONT
WHEELS ARE ALSO JACKED UP CLEAR OF
THE GROUND OR THE FRONT AXLE DRIVE
SHAFT IS DISCONNECTED. Failure to do this
can result in the tractor being pulled off the
rear supports by the front axle.
WARNING: Operate controls only when seated
in the Operator's seat.
WARNING: The engine may be started only in
the conditions given here under. If this fails
to occur, have the tractor repaired by your
Dealer or authorized service centre.
1. Make sure the Master Disconnect Switch is in the ON
position (turned clockwise).
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal. The engine will not start
if the clutch pedal is not depressed.
Before starting, it is RECOMMENDED to check that
the hand throttle selector is on the idle position.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, wait a few
seconds, the electronic control systems are activated
and will communicate with each other. The system
performs a Lamp Check. All the lamps in the cab will
light for a few seconds after which only the lamps
involved in the starting phase will stay on, then turn
the key to the start position.
NOTE: If the system recognises a depressed button during
the lamp check, the relative function will be inhibited. In
this case, turn the key on the O position (Off), check the
button in question and perform a new starting cycle.
IMPORTANT: The key should be released after max. 30
seconds in the start position. Wait 3 minutes between
cranking to allow the starter motor to cool.
After the engine starts, let it run at idle speed for about
2 minutes.
At starting, the instrument cluster will display N-0 in the
centre, to indicate that the transmission is in neutral. This
indication N-0 is displayed as long as the clutch pedal
remains pressed.
Display N-0: transmission still not enabled.
As soon as the clutch pedal is released, the display shows
3-1 and the transmission is ready for drive.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Operation
Display 3-1: transmission enabled.
To begin driving, select the driving direction by means of
the FNR lever at the left of the steering wheel.
IMPORTANT: It is important to operate the engine at idle
speed for a few minutes to make sure that enough lubricant
reaches the turbocharger bearings and all engine parts
before operating the engine at a high speed.
4. Check that no indicator lamps are giving any warnings.
IMPORTANT: If the engine starts and then stops, wait for
the starter motor to stop turning before you turn the key
switch to the start position again.
IMPORTANT: If the indicator lamps or gauges do not
give correct indications, STOP THE ENGINE IMMEDIATELY
AND CHECK FOR THE CAUSE.
NOTE: During operation, the tractor status is constantly
monitored by various systems. The activation or engage-
ment status of the systems is shown by indicator lamps
or information displayed on the instrument cluster. If an
emergency lamp lights up or the symbol "!" appears during
operation, this means a problem was detected. Stop the
5
engine immediately and check for the cause. Refer to the
Instruments and programming section in this manual to
verify the functions of the indicator lamps and get informa-
tion on the way to find error codes.
NOTE: Move the shuttle lever in the central position to
Neutral when starting the tractor for the first time.
NOTE: When starting the tractor, the electronic system
automatically shifts the transmission to Neutral, regardless
of which range/speed was left engaged when the engine
was turned off.
NOTE: At starting, if the PTO switches are not on, the lamp
concerning the type of PTO left engaged will be flashing,
but the relative shaft will not be turning until the operator
switches off and on the switch deliberately. Tractor start
is thus enabled.
COLD TEMPERATURE OPERATION
Before you start the engine and operate your tractor during
cold ambient temperatures, check the following items:
- BATTERIES: Must have a full charge.
- FUEL: Must be clean and contain no water.
- ENGINE OIL - Must have the correct viscosity for the am-
bient temperature range. DO NOT mix oils different for
type, characteristics and viscosity from the prescribed
ones.
5-3
Operation

- TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC FLUID - Must be filled up
with correct oil. Use the transmission fluid prescribed
by the Lubricant Chart.
- COOLING SYSTEM - Must have a minimum of 33%
and a maximum of 50% ethylene glycol solution for
protection. This ratio will vary with different market
requirements. DO NOT mix protective fluids different
for colour and characteristics to preserve their quality.
- TYRES - If there is liquid ballast in the tyres, the tyres
must have protection against freezing temperatures
below 0°C. Ask your dealer for help.
2. KEEP ENGINE AT CORRECT OPERATING TEMPERA-
TURE.
A. When the engine is operating in cold ambient tem-
peratures without a load, keep the engine warm as
described below.
B. Run the engine at approximately 1500 rpm.
C. Put a cover in front of the grille to control the amount
of air going through the radiator.
3. STOPPING THE ENGINE.

- STOPPING THE ENGINE: Let the engine temperature A. Run the engine at slow speed for a short period of
decrease before stopping. time. This will permit the engine temperature to de-
crease gradually before stopping the engine.
- CONDENSATION IN FUEL TANK - To prevent condensa-
tion in the fuel tank and water entering the fuel system,
fill the fuel tank after each operating day.

- FUEL FILTER - During cold weather, make sure you

remove water from the fuel filter each day or damage
will occur to the injection system. Loosen the drain plug
each day before starting the engine. Tighten the drain
plug after the water has drained.

IMPORTANT: When operating in cold weather, never

run the engine at low idle speed for long periods of time.
Never run the engine for long periods of time when the
coolant temperature is below normal.

WARNING: To assist cold weather starting

DO NOT spray ether or gasoline into the air
induction manifold. To do so could cause an
explosion and injury.

During cold ambient temperatures, the engine and

transmission will not heat to or keep the rated operating
temperature at slow engine speeds. Low engine speeds
in cold temperatures can cause damage to the engine
and transmission.

Use the following procedures to warm the engine oil

and transmission oil and to keep the correct operating
temperatures.

1. WARMING THE ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION.

A. To heat the transmission oil, run the engine at 1500

rpm for approximately five minutes.

5-4 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


Engine block coolant heater (if
equipped)
This heater is installed in the engine block and keeps the
engine coolant warm to make starting the engine easier
in cold weather.
NOTE: If required, use a three-wire extension of proper
capacity.
North American Tractors (120 Volts)
Other tractors (220/240 Volts)
Connect the connector plug (1) on the engine block to an
electrical supply.
The position of the terminal depends on tractor model.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Operation
Engine oil sump heater (option at
your Dealer's)
Depending on the market, your Dealer could offer a heater
for the engine oil sump. This heater keeps oil warm and
makes start at low temperatures easier. See your dealer
for more information.
NOTE: The heater is placed on the right of the oil sump
and has a rated power of 300 Watts ad 120 Volts. The
heater should be connected to a 120 VAC earthed socket,
by means of a cable composed of three big section wires,
if required.
Fuel heater (option from your Dealer's)
Depending on the market, your Dealer could offer a heater
for the fuel. This heater keeps fuel warm and makes start
at low temperatures easier
See your dealer for more information.
5
5-5
Operation

PARKING THE TRACTOR [4.1.c]

STEP 1 Folding wheel wedges

Park the tractor and engage the parking brake. Shift the
(if equipped)
forward/reverse shuttle lever to the centre position of
NEUTRAL position.

STEP 2
Disengage the PTO if in operation.

STEP 3
Move the throttle lever fully rearward to the low idle posi-
tion for three to five minutes to decrease the temperature
of the engine before stopping the engine.

IMPORTANT: This step is very important if the engine has

been operating under heavy loads for a while. In this way,
the engine temperature will decrease gradually.
Use the wheel wedge in front of or behind a rear wheel,
STEP 4 (depending on the driving direction of the tractor), when
Tractors with Independent Front Suspension parking the tractor on a slope.
Fully lower the axle.
IMPORTANT: To prevent accidents do not park the tractor
STEP 5 with equipment raised.
Engage the park brake.

STEP 6
Turn the key switch to the OFF position and remove the
key.

IMPORTANT: NEVER turn the ignition key on the OFF

position while the tractor is moving. Serious damage to
the transmission could result.

STEP 7
Turn the master battery disconnector switch anticlockwise
to deactivate it.

WARNING: Whenever the tractor is left unattended,

the ignition key must be removed.

5-6 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Battery master disconnect switch

(1-Fig. IS1)
The master disconnect switch (3) disconnects the battery
from the tractor electric system.
The master disconnect switch (1) can only be activated
with the ignition key in the OFF position.

WARNING: Before any maintenance opera-

tions, always disconnect the battery by means
of the master disconnect switch and remove
the terminals from the battery.

If the tractor is not used for a long time, it is

advisable to disconnect the battery. Fig. IS1

WARNING: When the engine is running, the battery Reconnect procedure

cannot be disconnected in any way. 1. Put the switch (1) in the (A) position to connect the
battery. The LCD shows the following icon when the key
This switch has two positions: is on ON:
●● Position A: battery connected, all systems are pow-
ered. The icon is lit up.

●● Position B: battery disconnected, only the instrument

cluster and the courtesy light in the cab are lit up. The
icon is off.
5
Disconnect procedure Position A: battery connected
●● Put key switch in the OFF position.
●● Put the switch (1) in the (B) position to disconnect the
battery. The LCD shows the following icon: Error display
An error concerning the master disconnect switch circuit
can be displayed by the icon indicated below, after turning
the ignition key to OFF.

If this icon is displayed, the master disconnect switch

could be in a position different from the required one
owing to a malfunction.

Position B: battery disconnected

NOTE: The battery is really disconnected only when the

symbol disappears from LCD.

Refer to the technical service at your Dealer's.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-7

Operation

OPERATING THE TRANSMISSION

The transmission has 24 speeds (6 ranges x 4 Powershift speeds) electronically controlled.

- ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSION - Electronic shifting allows ALL 24 speeds to be changed via the push-buttons. The
Forward/Reverse shuttle can be engaged without using the clutch pedal however the clutch pedal provides infinite control.

- CREEPER - optional. This operates in the first 4 ranges (1-4). Creeper is engaged mechanically by a lever at the right of
the operator's seat. Simply depress the clutch to stop the tractor and reduced the engine speed to idle before moving
the lever.

Speed tables
SPEED - Models X7.440, X7.450, X7.460 | Tyre 650/65 R38
With creeper Without creeper
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
L 0,45 0,81 1,30 1,96 3,68 6,63 10,64 16,04 22,05 33,74
FORWARD
SPEEDS

M 0,54 0,97 1,56 2,35 4,42 7,95 12,76 19,23 26,44 40,45
H 0,65 1,16 1,87 2,82 5,29 9,52 15,27 23,01 31,64 48,42
8 0,78 1,40 2,24 3,38 6,34 11,41 18,31 27,59 37,94 58,05
RL 0,51 0,92 1,48 2,24 4,20 7,56 12,13 18,27 25,13 38,45
REVERSE
SPEEDS

REV 0,62 1,11 1,78 2,68 5,03 9,06 14,54 21,91 30,13 46,10
RH 0,70 1,27 2,03 3,07 5,76 10,37 16,63 25,06 34,46 52,73
RS 0,84 1,52 2,44 3,68 6,90 12,43 19,94 30,05 41,32 63,22

NOTE: According to the laws in force in the Country where the tractor will be used, the maximum speed the tractor will
reach is limited according to engine RPM.

Speed tables (limitations)

According to the laws in force in the Country where the tractor is used, it will reach the speeds indicated in the following
table according to engine RPM.

Models: X7.440, X7.450, X7.460

Tyre: 650/65 R38 (0,875 m)
Speed (Kph)  Range-Powershift Engine RPM
50 6-4 1895
49 6-3 2200
40 6-4 1516
40 6-3 1818
40 6-2 2178
30 6-4 1140
30 6-3 1365
30 6-2 1635
30 6-1 1960
30 5-4 1740
30 5-3 2090

5-8 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Initial Gear Selection

(Drive Engagement)
At engine startup, the transmission will always select
3-1 (3rd range – 1st Powershift speed). This setup cannot
be changed.

The operator may then select a drive off gear from 1st
range – 1st Powershift) to 6th range – 4th Powershift with
the clutch depressed or in Neutral on the shuttle lever.
Always choose a start off gear that the engine can handle
without slipping the clutch.

NOTE: With very low ambient temperatures, shifting may

be slow in the first minutes after the starting until the oil in
the transmission warms up. The electronic control of the
transmission allows no movement until oil in transmission
reaches the operation temperature.

1. Speed selector buttons:

• Gear Up

• Gear Down

2. Range button (Enable)

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-9

Operation

Tractor starting and driving Selecting gears with tractor moving

STEP 1 STEP 3
Start the tractor (see the correct starting procedure). Adjust engine speed and transmission gear as required.

At ignition, as soon as the clutch pedal is released, the
default speed for the transmission is 3-1 (3rd range/1st
Powershift) both in forward and reverse speed.

STEP 2
Moving off.
Depress the clutch pedal and select the direction of travel
on the shuttle lever (1), then fully release the clutch pedal
to take up drive and fully release the handbrake.
Alternatively place the shuttle lever (1) to the desired travel
direction and the tractor will drive, ensure the handbrake
is off.

2 and 3: speed selector buttons.

Momentarily pressing buttons 2 or 3 will make a single

powershift change within the current range.

Pressing and holding either button 2 or 3 will make se-

quential powershifts within that range.

• skip to a higher range (UP)

• skip to a lower range (DOWN)

If an the audible alarm sounds, this is to signify a range

change is required. To shift to the next range, press and
hold the enable button then powershift up or down to
desired range.

If the operator is not seated the tractor will not move.
NOTE: the drive off gear may be selected in the follow-
ing way:
Pre-selecting drive off gears
1. FNR lever (1) moved to neutral (central position) and
clutch pedal released
2. Use the buttons UP [Gear Up] (2) and DOWN [Gear
Down] (3) to change gear and Enable to change the
range; when first depressing the buttons on the display,
the initial setup 3-1 is shown. Keep on pressing the
button to select the required speed.
NOTE: If during range shifting the display that signals the
selected gear is flashing, the system is still trying to engage
the gear required by the operator. If flashing continues,
the transmission is not able to engage the gear. Check
for any alarms.
Be aware that during a range change under heavy loads
the tractor may stop moving whilst the change is com-
pleted, it will then continue driving. Always ensure the
engine has sufficient power reserve before changing to
a higher range.

IMPORTANT: The Forward/Reverse shuttle lever must

only be moved with the operator sitting on the seat. If the
lever is moved without the operator sitting on the seat the
tractor will not move.

5-10 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Range skip Reverse powershuttle



Changing the driving direction can be done on the move

without using the clutch pedal.
To change the driving direction, move the FNR lever (1)
to the required direction.

NOTE: The driving direction can be changed at a speed

lower than 20 Kph.

The speed limit to change the driving direction depends

on how often the FNR lever is operated. The speed limit
may be reduced to 12 Kph if there are frequent shuttles.

1. UP gear button
If an attempt is made to change the driving direction by
moving the FNR lever at a speed over 20 Kph, the trans- 5
mission goes into neutral, slow the tractor on the brakes
2. DOWN gear button and reselect drive on the shuttle lever.
3. Enable button
RECOMMENDED: Always slow the tractor speed down
to a minimum before moving the forward/reverse shuttle
With tractor stationary: lever to the desired work direction.
Press the range skip switch Enable (3) along with the but-
ton UP (1) or DOWN (2). The transmission carries out a The shuttle modulation can be adjusted by the operator to
range skip while keeping the selected Powershift speed. suit the working conditions (see paragraph “Transmission
shuttle modulation” on page 4-19).
With tractor moving:
If the range skip Enable button (3) is depressed together
with the UP button (1) or DOWN (2), a range change is
performed and the closest powershift is selected in ranges
4 and above. (speed matching)

Be aware that during a range change under heavy loads

the tractor may stop moving whilst the change is com-
pleted it will then continue driving. Always ensure the
engine has sufficient power reserve before changing to
a higher range.

NOTE: The system does not allow a range skip downward

at a high engine RPM, so that the engine is not allowed to
exceed its maximum recommended RPM.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-11

Operation

Speed matching Every time the operator

−−with the engine running and the tractor at a standstill
leaves the driver’s seat, the hydraulic clutches of for-
When the clutch pedal is FULLY depressed and then re-
ward and reverse gears are inhibited. Transmission in
leased, with the tractor in motion, the transmission will
Neutral: the instrument cluster displays N-0 and the
automatically downshift to match a decrease in ground
warning buzzer sounds.
speed and engage a suitable Powershift speed that best
matches the ground to engine speed.
Every time the operator
−−with the engine running and the tractor moving
This feature can be used during transport or road opera-
leaves the driver’s seat, the tractor keeps moving until
tion.
the reverse lever is shifted. As soon as the reverse lever
is shifted, the transmission goes into neutral, N-0 is
Example:
displayed and the warning buzzer sounds.
When the tractor is approaching a road junction the opera-
tor will reduce ground speed. If the road ahead is clear the
When the operator seats down again, a pop up is dis-
operator can FULLY depress the clutch pedal then release.
played with the inscription “CP” (2 fig. PO3) prompting
The transmission will automatically select the appropriate
the operator to press the clutch pedal with the reverse
Powershift speed to match the ground speed and engine
lever in neutral.
rpm maintaining forward momentum.

Logics of the operator present sen- 2

sor - transmission operation

WARNING: Do not tamper with this compo-

nent in any way.
 Fig. PO3
WARNING: if the tractor is not correctly used,
the operator is informed by the sound of a
buzzer and a warning symbol on the instru-
When the clutch pedal is pressed, the electronic manage-
ment cluster.
ment system engaged the range/powershift gear ratio that
was engaged before leaving the driver's seat.
For a correct use, the operator must be seated in the
(The system memorizes the ratios previously used)
driver's place. As soon as there is no load on the seat given
by the operator's weight, a buzzer sounds and a warning
To resume driving, release the clutch pedal and eventually
symbol (1-Fig. PO2) is shown on the instrument cluster.
move the FNR lever to forward or reverse.

 Fig. PO2

5-12 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Auto Powershift Field (APS FIELD)

When this feature is engaged, the transmission elec-
tronic management will automatically select Powershift
gears 1 to 4 according to engine RPM, throttle position,
load on the engine (torque) and potentiometer position
(3 - Fig. NU2).

To engage this feature:

1. The engine must be running.

NOTE: The APS FIELD feature can be also activated while

the tractor is driving.

2. Press the button (1 - Fig. NU1). On the instrument Fig. NU1

cluster, the central display changes from MAN to AUTO
FIELD, and the buzzer sounds.

3. The indicator corresponding to the APS button on the

armrest (2 - Fig. NU1) lights up.
4. Adjust transmission response (electronic management
of the powershift change).

To adjust the powershift change according to engine load

and RPM rate, turn the potentiometer (3 - Fig.NU2) to the
5
required position:

• ECO 0%, turn anti-clockwise Fig. NU2

• POWER 100%, turned clockwise

Turning the potentiometer (3 - Fig. NU2), the relative menu

is displayed on the instrument cluster as a Pop Up with a
graphical reproduction (4 - Fig.NU3) of the percent value
that was set with the potentiometer. The menu disappears 4
after a few seconds.

The APS FIELD menu can be displayed permanently by

navigating in the instrument cluster menu by means of the
Encoded or by pressing the MODE button on the armrest.
See “Fully Automatic Shifting” on page 4-30.

With APS set towards ECO, the electronic management

shifts at a lower engine RPM rate (this results in a more
economical performance). Fig. NU3

With APS set in percent toward POWER, the electronic

management tends to up shift at a higher engine RPM
rate (transmission response that favours power with a
higher fuel consumption). ECO (0%)
Potentiometer position

Engine
speed rate
5. Select the required range and drive the tractor.
Balanced (50%)

Engine
NOTE: The APS FIELD feature can be also activated in speed rate

any work ranges. POWER (100%)

Engine
speed rate

Fig. NU4

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-13

Operation

NOTE: when APS FIELD is activated and Powershift above

1st was selected, when the tractor is moved off it will
attempt to drive in this gear. If, however, the conditions
(engine RPM/torque/potentiometer position) require a
Powershift gear change, the transmission will carry out this
change automatically providing the clutch is fully released.

NOTE: When APS FIELD is engaged, the range can be

changed by a pressing either the UP ( ) or DOWN
( ) and Enable button. The APS remains active in the
next range selected.

NOTE: APS FIELD is disabled if a manual Powershift

change is made either UP or DOWN. On the instrument
cluster display AUTO FIELD is replaced by MAN.

The indicator corresponding to the APS button on the

armrest (2 - Fig. NU1) goes off and a buzzer sounds.

To disengage APS FIELD:

1. Press the APS button (1 - Fig.NU1) until MAN will be
displayed on the instrument cluster. The indicator (2 - Fig.
NU1) on the armrest will go off.

5-14 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Auto Powershift Road (APS ROAD)

(if equipped).

When this feature is engaged, the transmission electronic

management will automatically select the ranges and
the Powershift gears within the START and STOP range
preset by the operator, according to engine RPM rate,
throttle pedal and/or hand throttle position and load on
engine (torque).

To engage this feature:

1. The tractor must be stationary with ignition on. Follow Fig. NR1
the instruction in Step 2 if the START and STOP gears
have not been set or go to Step 3.

2. Press the MODE button on the armrest until the AUTO

ROAD menu (Fig. NR2) is displayed, or reach it by navi-
gating the instrument cluster menu with the Encoder.
Set up the range and Powershift gear combination for
start (START) and target (STOP), see “Fully Automatic
Shifting” on page 4-30.

NOTE: The START and STOP values cannot be changed

while APS AUTO ROAD is active. To change them switch
of APS. Display the AUTO ROAD menu (Fig. NR2) again
and set the required values for START and STOP.

3. Press the button (1-Fig. NR1) until AUTO ROAD is dis-

played on the instrument cluster. The APS indicator
will also light up.
Fig. NR2 5


NOTE: APS AUTO ROAD can be activated both with the

key on the ON position and with the engine running.

4. Start the tractor.

When APS AUTO ROAD is activated, the electronic
management system engages the start range/Pow-
ershift gear combination (START), and performs all
powershift and range changes according to engine
RPM, throttle position and load on engine (torque)
until the set (STOP) is be reached. In the slowing down
phase, the system shifts gears/ranges down until the
set start (START) is reached, if attainable subject to
load and conditions.

NOTE: The START and STOP gear selections are stored

in the instrument cluster memory even after turning
the engine off. When the engine is restarted APS AUTO
ROAD can be activated directly by pressing the button
(1-Fig. NR1).

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-15

Operation

To disengage APS AUTO ROAD: Parking the tractor

1. Press the button APS (1-Fig. NR1) until MAN is dis-
played on the instrument cluster. The indicator (2-Fig. NR1) 
on the armrest will go off.



NOTE: APS AUTO ROAD is disabled if a manual change of

range and Powershift gear is carried out by a pressure on

the buttons Enable, UP ( ) or DOWN ( ). On the

instrument cluster display the message APS AUTO ROAD

is replaced by MAN.

NOTE: If the tractor is stopped, e.g. after braking, APS

AUTO ROAD remains active. The electronic management When leaving the tractor while the engine is running,
system will downshift until the combination set for START ALWAYS MAKE SURE that the FNR shuttle lever (1) is in
is reached. the central position of NEUTRAL.

1. Bring the tractor to a complete stop. Put the FNR

shuttle lever in the NEUTRAL position and apply the
Park Brake.

2. Depress and hold both gear buttons UP ( ) and

DOWN ( ) for about 1 second to shift the trans-
mission to neutral. The gear selection display shows
the combination N-1 and the gear selection function
will be deactivated.

NOTE: Before leaving the cab, check that the transmis-

sion is shifted to NEUTRAL. The display must show the
indication N-1.

5-16 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

TRANSMISSION CREEPER OPERATION

(if equipped).
Transmission creeper speeds are recommended for operations involving use of PTO or other applications where slower
ground speeds are desired.

To engage the creeper:

1. Stop the tractor moving, move the FNR shuttle lever
to Neutral in central position.
2. Let the engine run at idle speed rate.
3. Engage the creeper moving the black lever (1) to A.

NOTE: In the transmission display area, the instrument

cluster will display the symbol instead of to
confirm the engagement of the creeper.

Creeper engaged

1. Creeper lever
4. Engage the required range/gear and select the driving Pos. A – creeper engaged
direction. Pos. B – creeper disengaged

NOTE: While the tractor is moving, carry out range/gear

shifts as any other operation mode.
5
To disengage the creeper:
1. Stop the tractor moving, move the FNR shuttle lever
to Neutral in central position.
2. Let the engine run at idle speed rate.
3. Disengage the creeper moving the black lever (1) to B.

NOTE: In the transmission display area, the instrument

cluster will display the symbol instead of to
confirm the disengagement of the creeper.

Creeper not engaged

A small amount of gear clash may occur when engaging

and disengaging creep speeds.
Engagement effort will be high, especially when changing
from creep to direct drive when the oil is cold.

THE CREEPER SHOULD BE ENGAGED ONLY FOR LIGHT

DRAFT LOADS.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-17

Operation

HOW TO TRANSPORT THE TRACTOR

Towing the tractor [4.1.j]

WARNING: Make sure that the weight of a trailed vehicle that is not equipped with brakes NEVER EXCEEDS
the weight of the tractor that is towing the vehicle or any national weight limitations which may apply.
Stopping distance increases with increasing speed as the weight of the towed load increases, especially
on slopes.

NOTE: For the tow hooks fixed on the machine, see the Towing Attachments chapter in the Technical specifications sec-
tion of this book.

WARNING: Use only the appropriate tow hooks to tow the tractor.

Due the complexity of the transmission and pressure
lubrication requirements, special rules apply when the
tractor engine is running or not running. Use the following
procedures as applicable.
A. Engine NOT running
DO NOT tow this tractor if the engine is inopera-
tive. Serious damage to the transmission could
result. Contact your dealer for assistance.
B. Engine running (at a idle speed of 1200 rpm)
The tractor may be towed for max. 10 Kph at a max.
speed of 10 Kph.
If the tractor must be towed:
1. Disengage the parking brake by moving the lever (1)
all the way down.
5. Use a rigid tow bar and safety chains to pull the trac-
tor. Attach the tow bar and safety chains to the front
support.
Check brake operation before starting to tow.
Limp home operation
Transmission
In the event of a fault with the transmission or on the its
control system the transmission will enter a limp home
mode. A fault code will be displayed on the instrument
cluster. Report the fault code and any other relevant in-
formation to your dealer.
Engine
In the event of a fault with the engine or on its control
system the engine speed will default to approximately
1300 rpm to enable the tractor to be moved and allow your
dealer to diagnose/repaired the problem. A fault code will
be displayed on the instrument cluster. Report the fault
code and any other relevant information to your dealer.

In the unlikely event of a major failure rendering the tractor

immobile, your dealer has provisions to provide a means
of moving the tractor. If a failure occurs and the tractor
will not move contact your dealer.

Limp home mode is only a temporary device which will

allow you to get the tractor home or back to your dealer
and is NOT to be used as a means of continuing tractor
operation.

2. Make sure four wheel-drive (4WD) and the Differen-

tial Lock are NOT engaged.

3. Put the Forward/Reverse shuttle lever and Range lever

(if applicable) into NEUTRAL.

4. Depress and hold both down both gear buttons for

about 1 second to shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
The display will show the indication N-1.

5-18 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Transport by truck or rail

WARNING: The tractor can slip and fall from a trailer or ramp and cause serious injury or death. Make
sure the trailer or ramp is not slippery.
Remove all oil, grease, mud, ice etc. When moving the tractor take extra care, be vigilant, make sure the
tractor is in the centre of the trailer and does not overhang.

When you transport the tractor by truck or rail specific

rules or laws will be applicable depending in which country
you are in. Make sure you are familiar with these rules or
laws before transporting the tractor.

STEP 1
Make sure the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position,
as per correct procedure quoted on previous page.

STEP 2
Engage the PARKING brake.

STEP 3


If equipped with front tie down brackets (as shown by the
figure) tie the front of the tractor down putting the safety
chains through the loop of each bracket rather than using
the front axle.

IMPORTANT:DO NOT use the tie down brackets (if 5

Secure the tractor to the trailer. Tie the tractor down
around the front and rear axles with safety chains having
a rating greater than the gross load of the tractor (refer
to tractor P.l.N. plate).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT tie chains around the front ballast
weight support bracket to hold the tractor down.
equipped) to lift or pull the tractor. The tie down brackets
are only to be used to secure the tractor to the trailer.
STEP 6
Install blocks/wedges to prevent the wheels rolling.
WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow
hook.

STEP 5

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-19

Operation

DRAWBAR
WARNING: Rear upset can result if pulling from wrong location on tractor. The three point hitch must
only be used with the implements designed for its use, not as a drawbar.

WARNING: Try to balance the load primarily on the implement wheels as in loading a machine with harvest
crops. Avoid overloading the drawbar. Add front end weights for improved stability. Engage the clutch
smoothly, avoid jerking and use the brakes cautiously to avoid jack- knifing.
In certain markets pulling trailers on public roads is not permitted unless a special approval note has
been supplied with the machine documents. Always make sure you have the relevant approval before
pulling trailers on public roads.

The drawbar can be set in various positions, see following pages for greater details on preparation and operation.

WARNING: Use exclusively the provided hooks to tow the machine.

WARNING: Refer to licensing documents issued by the Ministry of Transport to know data relating to max. verti-
cal and horizontal loads on tow hooks and max. trailer weights.

Fore/aft position Left/right offset position

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera- WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned. tion concerned.

Remove the fixing split pin (1) of the pin and draw out
the pin (2).
Slide the drawbar backward or forward to the required
drawbar position as indicated on the implement or in the
implement operator's manual.
When the correct position of the drawbar has been set, fit
the pin (2) and the retainer split pin (1) back again.
Remove the split pins (3) depending on the required side
(right or left) to which the bar should be moved and move
the bar accordingly. Install the retaining pin.
When using the offset positions raise the lower links to
full height. With the lower links in this position the hitch
will not interfere with the side movement of the swing-
ing drawbar.
The drawbar must not be offset in the fully forward posi-
tion.
The drawbar must be locked in the centre position when
doing any of the following operations:
A. Towing implements at transport speed (15 Kph (10
mph) or more) in the field.
B. Towing an implement or trailer on the highway at all
speeds.
C. Operating a drawbar pulled, PTO driven implement.
D. Moving the tractor in reverse with an implement at-
tached.

5-20 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Drawbar positions

Drawbar positions a b c d e f g

Distance from PTO shaft end to the hitch pin centre 650 mm 600 mm 550 mm 500 mm 450 mm 400 mm 350 mm

Maximum vertical load 1250 kg 1350 kg 1500 kg 1600 kg 1800 kg 2000 kg 2300 kg

5
Max towable weights[4.2.i]

Max. towed weight (kg)

Ref. Hook: type and model
X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460

U Manual, GTF30-015

V Automatic, GTF30-014

W Drawbar, GTF30-008
40000
X PICK-UP hitch, 99034

Y Piton-fixe, GTF30-032

Z Ball type, GTS80-001

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-21

Operation

Maximum vertical load depending on tyres and hook type

[4.2.j]

X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460

Max. vertical load on hitch point
Hook reference (see table on previous page)
Rear tyres W
U V Rear overhang X Y Z

1183 1133 1083 1033 983 933 883

420/85 R38 (16.9 R38) / 141 A8 820 820 720 730 740 750 780 770 780 840 830 830
480/70 R38 / 145 A8 1300 1300 1150 1150 1200 1200 1200 1250 1250 1350 1350 1350
460/85 R38 (18.4 R38) / 146 A8 1450 1450 1250 1300 1300 1350 1350 1350 1400 1500 1500 1500
520/70 R38 / 150 A8 2000 2000 1250 1350 1500 1600 1800 1900 1900 2050 2100 2000
600/65 R38 147 A8 1600 1600 1250 1350 1400 1450 1450 1500 1500 1600 1650 1600
600/65 R38 / 154 A8 2000 2000 1250 1350 1500 1600 1800 2000 2300 2450 2500 2400
580/70 R38 / 155 A8 2000 2000 1250 1350 1500 1600 1800 2000 2300 2450 2500 2400
520/85 R38 (20.8 R38) /155 A8 2000 2000 1250 1350 1500 1600 1800 2000 2300 2450 2500 2400

Maximum permitted operating weights

WARNING: comply with the max. load capacity of the automatic hitch and of the drawbar. Do not work
with loads greater than the maximum allowed ones. This could damage the automatic hitch and the rod.
It also reduces stability of the front part.
Maximum loads on axles also depend upon the capacity of the rear tyres fitted.
Ask your Dealer for further information.

5-22 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Connecting an implement/trailer to the tractor

Before connecting any trailed equipment to the tractor, read and understand the following:

WARNING: Rear upset can result if pulling from wrong location on tractor. The three point hitch must
only be used with the implements designed for its use, not as a drawbar.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera- EXAMPLE B
tion concerned.
Make sure local regulations are followed when towing
implements/trailers. Specific speed limits are prescribed
when using drawbars or tie down brackets on public
roads. Moreover, the road circulation codes of some
countries prescribe that suitable brakes are installed on
vehicles that are towed on public roads.
Before circulation on public roads, be sure your tractor
complies with ALL the legal requirements.
1. TRACTOR DRAWBAR
For towed vehicles not equipped with brakes, the follow-
2. IMPLEMENT DRAWBAR
ing indications must be observed:

−− Do not tow equipment that weighs more than twice
the tractor weight.
−− If the weight of the towed trailer is greater than the
tractor's, do non drive at a speed over 16 Kph.
−− If the weight of the towed trailer is lower than the trac-
tor's, do not drive at a speed over 32 Kph.
1. Connect towed implements to the drawbar only.
2. Use the hardened steel hitch pin supplied to connect
the implement to the drawbar. Make sure the pin is
held securely in place with a lock pin.
IMPORTANT: Only use a 50 mm inner diameter towing
eye. See DRAWBAR DIMENSIONS FOR TRAILERS/IMPLE-
MENTS in this section of the manual.
3. If both the tractor and the implement are equipped
with a drawbar clevis, remove the clevis from the trac-
tor OR implement. DO NOT PUT A LONG HITCH PIN
THROUGH BOTH THE IMPLEMENT CLEVIS AND THE
DRAWBAR CLEVIS. See examples A and B below for
correct methods of using a clevis type hitch.
4. Adjust the drawbar so that the centre line of the pulling
force of the tractor will be aligned with the centre line
of the implement.
5. When working with the drawbar, raise the lower links
as high as possible to prevent interference between
the lower links and the implement.
6. When working with PTO equipment, use the following
positions in the drawbar:
Position A: PTO shaft at 540 rpm (6 splines).
5
Position B: PTO shaft at 1000 rpm (21 splines).
NOTE: For non-PTO work, the drawbar must be set
in any of the fore/aft positions, depending on maximum
required vertical load.
See Drawbar Positions for PTO Operation in this section
of the manual for more information.
7. The clevis (if equipped) must be removed from the
drawbar or mounted under the drawbar (See example
B), to prevent possible interference between the clevis
and the implement driveline.

EXAMPLE A

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-23

Operation

Safety chain
(For NAO markets)

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

When towing an implement (1) on public roads, as sup-

plementary coupling between towbar (3) and implement
(1) a safety chain (2) must be used whose capacity is
higher than the gross weight of the towed implement.

To know the implement's weight and any technical specifi-

cations of the attachments, refer to the operator's manual
provided with the implement itself.

Make sure the chain is correctly mounted after connect-

ing it. Drive the tractor for a short while, turning to the
right and to the left to check that the chain is neither too
short or too long.

Adjust the chain length as required.

5-24 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE TRAILER HITCHES (if equipped)

Adjustable trailer hitches can be adjusted up or down to match the implement hitch height and for PTO operation. These
hitches are equipped with either an automatic or a manual clevis.

Hitches with automatic clevis

This hitch connects automatically when the implement towing eye contacts the release mechanism inside the hitch coupling.

Hitches with automatic clevis

5

 TYPE A TYPE B TYPE C

The operator must manually inset the hitch pin to secure the implement to the tractor.

NOTE: Make sure local regulations are followed when towing implements/trailers. Only use trailers with a towing eye
that matches the flat-head pin diameter that does not have excessive clearance. For further information, see Implement/
trailer drawbar dimensions chapter in this section of the manual.

IMPORTANT: Maximum vertical load capacity depends upon the capacity of the rear tyres fitted (see tables on page 5-22).

IMPORTANT: Keep the hitch clean and protect all moving parts of the hitch from corrosion (including the inner slide rails),
by cleaning and greasing at regular intervals. All moving parts should be checked for free movement and correct operation.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-25

Operation
Automatic type
(if equipped).
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
This hitch connects automatically when the implement
towing eye contacts the release mechanism (3) inside
the hitch coupling. Before connecting an implement make
sure the operating lever (2) is in the vertical position, as
shown.
NOTE: Before adjusting the drawbar height, be sure that
the partition (5) that protects the PTO is raised.
Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
To adjust the height, support the weight of the hitch cou-
pling assembly with one hand and with the other hand
pull the quick release lever (1) in anticlockwise direction.
Move the hitch coupling assembly to the required position.
Push the quick release lever (1) in clockwise direction to
lock the coupling assembly in position.
5-26
WARNING: DO NOT touch the inside of the
hitch coupling assembly when the release
mechanism is under tension, (operating lever
(1) in the vertical position). Serious injury
can result.
IMPORTANT: Check that the locking pins have fully en-
gaged in the holes in the side support (locking pins level
with the outer surface).
Before connecting an implement make sure the operating
lever (2) is in the vertical position.
The connecting pin engages automatically as the imple-
ment towing eye contacts the release mechanism inside
the hitch coupling or it can be engaged manually by strik-
ing the operating lever (2) downwards (away from the
tractor). Before moving the tractor make sure:
1. The indicator pin (4) is fully in.
2. The operating lever (2) is in the horizontal position.
3. The connecting pin (3) is fully in the hole of the pin
guidance bushing (fully engaged). Do not tow or move
the tractor if the pin is not fully engaged.
NOTE: When the automatic hitch is not being used,
make sure the hitch connecting pin (3) is down and the
operating lever (2) is horizontal.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1
 Operation

Automatic clevis - Internal release or

the trailer hitch
(if equipped).

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

It is useful to release the implement towing eye without

leaving the tractor.

To activate, pull the lever to release it, then turn the lever
180 degrees. The implement connecting pin will disen-
gage from the trailer towing eye.

The hitch release lever must automatically return to the 5

locking position.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-27

Operation

Manual fork (if equipped).

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.

NOTE: Before adjusting the drawbar height, be sure that

the partition (4) that protects the PTO is raised.
Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.

To adjust the height, turn the release knob (1) anticlock-

wise and while supporting the weight of the coupling as-
sembly with the other hand, raise or lower the assembly
to the required position.

Lower the release knob (1) to lock again the hitch coupler
assembly into position.

IMPORTANT: Check that the retaining pins have fully

engaged in the holes in the side support (retaining pins
level with the outer surface).
To connect an implement/trailer, remove the split pin (2 - if
present) and the hitch pin (3).

Enter the implement/trailer towing eye into the clevis,

install the hitch pin to secure the implement/trailer. Fit
the split pin back, if present.

5-28 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Piton- Fixe (if equipped)

To connect an implement/trailer, remove the spring clip

and pin (1) and lift the retaining hook (2).

Install the implement towing eye over the towing pin (3)
and lower the retaining hook (2).

Install the pin and spring clip (1).

IMPORTANT: Maximum vertical load capacity depends

upon the capacity of the rear tyres fitted. See table on
page 5-22.
5

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-29

Operation
AUTO HITCH (if equipped, depending on market)
Connecting an implement
STEP 1
Move the Intermix knob to the Position control position
(see chapter “Rear hitch” on page 5-59).
STEP 2
Raise the hitch to maximum height.
STEP 3
 indicates the hook is not fully retracted.
Unlock the locking latches by pulling in the handle.
To unlock, pull the lever and turn it 180°.
WARNING: Tow hook with automatic Pick Up
Hitch (PUH) - PUH hitching and unhitching
must necessarily be performed with the hitch
in position control to ensure the correct op-
eration of the coupling/uncoupling system.
STEP 4
Lower the automatic hitch.
STEP 5
Extend the hook rearwards, by moving the corresponding
hydraulic remote control until the hook is aligned under
the implement towing eye.
5-30
STEP 6
Raise the auto hitch until the hook is engaged in the im-
plement towing eye.
STEP 7
Pull back the hook by moving the correct remote lever
rearwards ensure the tractor or implement can move as
the hook is pulled in.
IMPORTANT: The gap between the tip of the hook and
the keeper plate must be less than 8 mm. A larger gap
STEP 8
Raise the auto hitch to maximum height.
STEP 9
Raise the hook completely until the hitch stops its upward
movement and the locking latches are latched.
STEP 10
Lower the hitch onto the locking latches to take the weight
off the hydraulic system.
Engage the parking brake and check that the hook is
correctly locked. Before riding on roads, make sure that
the trailer and electric braking equipment is correctly con-
nected and operating.
IMPORTANT: The hitch must always be supported on the
locking latches and NOT by the hydraulic system.
If the locking latches do not lock, adjust the lift rods. If
after adjustment the locking latches still do not lock, see
your dealer.
IMPORTANT: To prevent accidents, make sure the hook
is fully retracted and the frame is correctly latched.
NOTE: After the automatic hitching of an implement, be-
fore starting again, make sure that all hooks are correctly
closed to avoid that the trailer unhitches suddenly while
driving on roads.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1
 Operation

Hook/clevis change over STEP 3

STEP 1

Remove the hook or clevis. Install the hook or clevis in

the storage bracket located at the front of the tractor on
Lower the auto hitch half way. Extend the hook/clevis
the left hand side.
by moving the corresponding hydraulic remote control.
Install the hook or clevis. The clevis can be installed in
two positions: fore/aft. Install the lock pins.
IMPORTANT: After lowering and extending the auto
Retract the assembly and raise auto hitch until locked,
hitch, stop the engine, and engage the parking brake
then lower onto latches.
before leaving the tractor.
NOTE: Make sure local regulations are followed when
STEP 2
towing implements/trailers. Specific speed limits are
prescribed when using drawbars or tie down brackets
on public roads. Moreover, the road circulation codes of
some countries prescribe that suitable brakes are installed
5
on vehicles that are towed on public roads.
Before circulation on public roads, be sure your tractor
complies with ALL the legal requirements.

Remove the hook/clevis locating pins.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-31

Operation

TOWING ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS FOR IMPLEMENT/TRAILER

A) For Piton-Fixe, auto hitch (B.S.2)
and swinging drawbar


30 mm

50
mm

120°

110
mm

When using Piton-Fixe, auto hitch or swinging drawbar,

the drawbar for trailers/implements must comply with the
dimensions prescribed by ISO5692 standard. Any other
hitch or drawbar could damage the tractor.

5-32 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

TRAILER BRAKE COUPLINGS (if equipped, depending on market)

Trailer air brakes [4.2.i]
(Fig. TF1)

1. Yellow coupling - brake service line (dual line system)

2. Red coupling - brake emergency line (dual line system)
3. Black coupling - feed and return (single line system)
- (optional)

WARNING: Connect the yellow service cou-

pling first.

WARNING: Take great care while splitting

the trailer from the couplings. The couplings
could be expelled with great force. Always use
specific personal safety devices.
Fig. TF1
WARNING: Make sure the system is at working
pressure before operating the brakes with a
trailer(s) fitted. Failure to do this can result
in injury or death.

WARNING: DO NOT park an unattended trac-

tor/trailer(s) combination using air pressure
to apply the brakes (Dual Line Pneumatic
Braking System). The mechanical park brake
on both the tractor and trailer(s) MUST be
applied.
5
NOTE: the coupling (1 - Fig. TF2) in the right side of the
reservoir can be used to inflate a tyre: if so then a regulator
and air pressure gauge MUST be fitted.

NOTE: The couplers on the tractor and trailer must be kept

perfectly clean to prevent dirt and dust from entering the
brake system.

See also paragraph “Hitch damping function (Antidamp-

Fig. TF2
ing)” on page 5-63.

The air reservoirs store air under pressure to operate the

trailer brakes.

Maximum permitted pressure ............................12.5 bar

Working pressure
Dual line system ...................................................7.5 bar
Single line system .................................................5.0 bar

NOTE: If the system pressure falls under 4 bar, the indica-

tor on the instrument cluster comes on along
with a warning sound (only if the engine is running). See
also paragraph “Hitch damping function (Antidamping)”
on page 5-63.

Reservoir capacity (each)............................... 10 litres

Drain reservoirs ........................................... Automatic
Bleeding of left reservoir.............At regular intervals

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-33

Operation

The reservoirs are provided with an automatic drain (1 -

Fig. TF3) of condense water.

The reservoir to the left should be bled at each scheduled

maintenance of the tractor. Pull out the plug (2 - Fig. TF3)
to bleed.

Before any service operation on the air braking system,

air in the system MUST be discharged by means of the
discharge valves in the air reservoirs.

If the tyres are replaced, always take care that a suitable

space is left to the tubes and reservoirs of the air braking
system to avoid any malfunctions.

The air dryer (1 - Fig. TF4) is installed before the rear

final drive, on the left side. It avoids any moisture in the
air braking system. It is provided with a desiccant dryer
Fig. TF3
cartridge that soaks up any water vapour.

NOTE: The dryer cartridge should be replaced every 12

months or 2,000 work hour of the tractor. Any time the
dryer cartridge is replaced, check up the whole air braking
system before resuming work.

NOTE: Dispose of the dryer cartridge according to laws

in force.

Fig. TF4

5-34 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Hydraulic trailer brake WARNING: It is extremely important to ALWAYS carry

out this operation before detaching the trailer from
(if equipped) [4.2.i] the tractor since it ensures the immediate action of
the automatic safety braking system with which this
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
trailer braking system is obligatorily equipped.
tion concerned.
There is a specific indicator light (if equipped) on the
control panel of the tractor which keeps the operator
constantly informed about the operating conditions of
the trailer brake oil tap.

Indicator light off:

- When the oil tap is not connected to the trailer.
- When the pressure of the oil in the circuit is regular with
the trailer connected.

Indicator light on:

- When the engine is at a standstill and the ignition key is
turned to first position.
- When the hand brake is engaged with the engine running.
To connect the hydraulic system of the trailer:
WARNING: If the indicator light should come
−− Slide the sleeve back on the trailer brake coupler and
on in other conditions than those mentioned
push it into the coupler (1).
above, this means that there is a fault in the
−− Release the sleeve.
braking system and that use of it must im-
mediately stop and the breaking system be
checked for obvious safety reasons.
To disconnect the hydraulic system of the trailer:
−− Slide the sleeve back on the trailer brake coupler, then
pull it toward yourself. 5
NOTE: When the trailer brake coupler is not used, always
protect it with its dust guard (is equipped).

NOTE: For the max. towing capacity of the hydraulically

controlled trailer, see the table on page 5-22.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

The tractor braking system can be equipped with a hy-

draulic valve which allows the trailer itself to be braked
along with the tractor.
Comply with the following instructions to correctly con-
nect and disconnect the flexible trailer brake hose to and
from the union (1) at the rear of the tractor and to always
operate in conditions of the utmost safety.

The trailer-tractor connecting tube can be connected

and disconnected with the engine either running or at a
standstill:

−− With the engine at a standstill. There are no difficulties

when either connecting or disconnecting as there is
no oil pressure in the brake circuit.

−− With the engine running. It is absolutely essential to

engage the hand brake since this ensures that no pres-
sure remains in the brake circuit.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-35

Operation

Stationary When the Stationary function is enabled, the PTO area in

the display is refreshed as follows:
NOTE: To activate the Stationary function, the tractor must
be stationary and the operator correctly seated.

The Stationary function lets the operator leave his/her seat

without disabling the following functions:

−− front and rear PTO

−− Front hitch When the Stationary function is active, the cab can be left
−− Rear remote valves (Avc valves) without the functions being switched off.

When the Stationary function is activated, the operator To disable this control, just seat yourself in the driver's seat
present sensor, contacting the seat, is disabled. and press the button (1). The switch light will go out. The

When the Stationary function is activated, the outer but- icon on the display is replaced by the tractor's icon.
tons on the rear fenders are enabled.

NOTE: The functions of the rear hitch are not connected NOTE: The Stationary function is automatically disabled
to the Stationary function. as soon as the tractor starts moving.

When pressing the button (1), its indicator lights up and

the following pop-up will be displayed for 5"on the instru-
ment cluster.

5-36 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Engine Set Point - Fig. MC1

Using this function it is possible to set a constant engine
rpm which is maintained in varying loads for both draft
and PTO operations.

NOTE: This function does not maintain a constant ground

speed (e.g. as with cruise control), but aims to maintain a
constant engine RPM depending on load. Travel speed is
relevant to the range/powershift engaged.

Activation of the Engine Set Point function is confirmed

by the lamp in the button and the icon displayed in
the instrument cluster:

Fig. MC1 - Engine set point button (1):

• Longer press: store RPM point
• Short press: function activated/deactivated

To memorize the required RPM:

• Use the throttle pedal or hand throttle to reach the
required engine speed.
• Press button (1) and hold for at least 1 second (long
press) to memorize. This is confirmed by:
−− illumination of the lamp in the button
−− the instrument panel displays engine speed and the 5
icon (see “Constant engine RPM” on page 4-32
for further details on the screen displays and indi-
cations).

Activation/deactivation of Engine Set Point

After memorizing the engine RPM speed, the function
can be activated or deactivated by a brief press on the
button (1).

The set speed memory remains until the tractor is keyed

off.

To memorize a new engine speed proceed as follows:

−− De-activate the function.
−− Set the engine RPM to the new level.
−− Press the button (1) and hold for at least 1 second (long
press) to store.

NOTE: When the tractor engine is stopped (Key Off),

the value memorized in the Engine Set Point function is
deleted.

NOTE: When the Engine Set Point function is active, the

engine RPM rate can be increased using the throttle pedal
or the hand throttle.
When active, the minimum engine rpm is based on the
hand throttle setting.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-37

Operation

My Switch (selection of preset func-

tions) - Fig. FM1
Briefly press My button (1) to activate the function as-
signed to the button.
The associated function is displayed on the instrument
cluster and is also indicated by one of the 4 indicator
lamps around the button:
A. Differential lock engaged
B. 4WD engaged
C. Declutch
D. Automatic powershift (APS)

NOTE: When the ignition key is on the system carries out

a self check. All four lamps are temporarily lit. The lamp
associated to the My button (1) remains on.

Changing the function associated to the My button

To change access the relative menu on the instrument
cluster (see “My function” on page 4-33).
Having saved a new function associated to the My button
the associated indicator lamp will come on.

NOTE: The association procedure of the function to the

My button can be carried out with ignition on or tractor
running at both standstill and driving.

NOTE: When the engine is turned off (key position Key

Off), the function associated to the My button is saved in
the memory.
Fig. FM1

5-38 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Use of the front suspension

Fig. SA1

A suspended front axle (optional) ensures greater driving

comfort as it absorbs shock loads on the road and in the
field, this increases vehicle stability due to better contact
with the road and field surface.

The front axle position can be adjusted by the operator

to suit the work required (transport or work in the fields).

NOTE: Always turn the axle suspension mode OFF when

operating the tractor on slopes.
AUTO suspension mode
The front suspension engages AUTOMATICALLY as soon
as tractor speed is over 14 Kph (8.5 mph), regardless of
the button (1) in the armrest. When the AUTO mode is
active, a light comes on in the button (1).
The AUTO mode of the front suspension can also be
manually set by the operator by means of the button (1)
on the armrest.
When the AUTO mode is active and tractor speed goes
under 14 Kph (8.5 mph), the AUTO mode remains active.
Press button (1) on the armrest to deactivate. If the AUTO
mode is active, when the tractor engine is stopped the
axle remains blocked in the actual position (generally in an
intermediate position). When the tractor is started again,
the AUTO mode will not be active and the axle will remain
in the same position.
When the AUTO mode is active, it is also possible to ad-
just the axle position in MANUAL mode. To adjust, enter
the menu dedicated on the instrument cluster (see “Front
axle suspension adjustment” on page 4-29) and regulate the
axle position. The indicator in the button (1) goes off as
soon as the operator starts regulating the position (UP or
DOWN) .
NOTE: With the engine off and the ignition key on 1, the
AUTO mode cannot be activated. The AUTO mode can
be activated, manually or automatically, only when the
engine is running.
Fig. SA1 - Suspended axle switch (1)
• indicator light on: AUTO mode active
• indicator light off: AUTO mode not active
actual position. When the tractor engine is ignited again,
the axle will remain in the same position as in that moment.
NOTE: If the lamp in the button (1) is flashing at regular
intervals, the axle needs to be calibrated.
If the lamp in the button (1) is flashing intermittently, the
electronic controller of the suspended axle has detected
an error. Refer to your Argo Tractors Dealer to diagnose
the fault and reset the system.
5
WARNING: The tractor could move unexpect-
edly!
If a speed range is selected while the engine is
running and the machine is supported on axle
bearing stands, the auto-levelling function
of the suspension could trigger the required
adjustments for the axle, that can be moved
up or down.
To ensure stability, the suspension MUST be
blocked. Failure to comply with these direc-
tions could cause injuries or death.

MANUAL suspension mode

The position of the suspended axle can be adjusted manu-
ally by the operator, regardless of tractor ground speed,
by the menu on the instrument cluster (see “Front axle
suspension adjustment” on page 4-29). If the indicator in the
button (1) was on, it goes off as soon as the operator
starts regulating the position (UP or DOWN) .
After a manual adjustment of the axle position, if the
tractor slows down to less than 14 Kph (8.5 mph), the
electronic management system activates the AUTO mode
as soon as this limit is exceeded again.

NOTE: With the engine off and the ignition key on 1, the
MANUAL adjustment of the axle position cannot be car-
ried out. The engine must be running for this adjustment.
After a manual adjustment of the axle position, when the
tractor engine is stopped the axle remains blocked in the

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-39

Operation

Operating the four-wheel drive

Fig. DT1 - DT2

The four-wheel drive (4WD) can be engaged while the

tractor is moving or stopped. The 4WD provides additional
traction and pulling power when engaged.

WARNING: On electrically operated 4WD trac-

tors, the 4WD clutch is spring loaded into
engagement and relies on hydraulic pressure
for disengagement.
A failure in the 4WD hydraulic system will Fig. DT1
therefore automatically engage the 4WD even
though the 4WD switch is in the disengaged
position.
This is a built in safety feature. DO NOT oper-
ate 4WD tractor transmissions with the rear 3
wheels off the ground or removed, UNLESS
THE FRONT WHEELS ARE ALSO JACKED UP
CLEAR OF THE GROUND OR THE FRONT AXLE
DRIVE SHAFT IS DISCONNECTED.
Failure to do this can result in the tractor being
pulled off the rear supports by the front axle.
Fig. DT2

4WD engagement/disengagement in 4WD engagement/disengagement in

manual mode
To engage the 4WD manually, proceed as follows:
1. Start the engine.
2. Press the button (1), short pressure.
When the 4WD is engaged, the following lamps will be lit:
−− The lamp in the button (1)
−− The lamp (3) in the instrument cluster.
To disengage the 4WD, press the button (1) (short
pressure). The lamps in the button and instrument cluster
will go off.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT leave the 4WD engaged when
travelling faster than 16 Kph (10 mph) (except when in the
field), as this can cause damage to the 4WD and other
transmission components as well as premature tyre wear.
automatic mode
To engage the 4WD automatically, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Start the engine.
2. Press button (1) for at least 2 seconds (long press) In
this status the lamp (2) behind the button will light up.
Both lamps shown (1) and (3) will light illuminate when
4WD is engaged. After this function is enabled, the 4WD
is automatically engaged subject to the following:
−− Position of the hitch
−− Tractor speed
−− Steering angle
The above criteria are factory set.

NOTE: When the tractor engine is turned off, the func-
tion previously set by the operator (manual or automatic
4WD) will not be stored in the memory by the electronic
management system. When the engine is off, the 4WD is
always engaged by mechanical engagement. At the next
ignition, the 4WD will be disengaged. A new engage-
ment procedure, either manual or automatic, is required
to engage it.
If one of these conditions is not met, the 4WD will not be
engaged, but the AUTOMATIC mode will remain engaged.
The 4WD will be engaged as soon as all the required
conditions are met.
To disengage the AUTO mode of 4WD, press the
button (1) (long press). The warning lamps will go off.

5-40 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Automatic 4WD engagement at brak-

ing
The 4WD is engaged by the electronic management
system each time that:

−− both brake pedals are operated

−− and/or the park brake is engaged

regardless of the status of the 4WD button (1).

The off lamps in the button and instrument cluster will
light up.

WARNING: Danger! Danger of losing control.

The machines provided with the 4WD func-
tion, either engaged or not, must not exceed
50 Kph (31 mph) if allowed.
An excessive speed when towing a trailer or
driving downhill with a depressed clutch or
the transmission in neutral can cause loss
of control, personal injuries to the driver or
bystanders or mechanical problems.
Failure to comply with these directions could
cause injuries or death.

NOTE: Front tyres must not be inflated to a higher pres-

sure than recommended.
In theory, the pressure in the rear tyres should be al least
0.4 bar (6 lbf/in 2) higher than in the front tyres, provided 5
the values recommended by the tyre maker are not ex-
ceeded.

WARNING: Risk of overturning! The 4WD func-

tion greatly increases the tractor draft. Pay
great care when driving on slopes.
The 4WD machines maintain the draft on
steeper slopes that the 2WD machines, thus
increasing the danger of overturning.
Failure to comply with these directions could
cause injuries or death.

NOTE: To avoid an excessive wear of tyres, it is advisable

to disengage 4WD whenever driving on roads or hard
surfaces in general.
Always mount front and rear tyres in the prescribed com-
binations to ensure an acceptable wear.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-41

Operation

Diff lock control

Fig. BD1 - BD2

The tractor is equipped with hydraulically operated front

and rear differential locks. When the traction of one wheel
decreases, or more traction is needed, the differential lock
should be engaged. The differential lock can be engaged
manually or can be set to engage automatically.

WARNING: Do not drive on roads, or at high

speed anywhere, with the differential lock
engaged. Difficult steering will occur, and can Fig. BD1
result in an accident.
In field operation, use the differential lock for
traction improvement, but release for turning
at row ends.

3
Diff lock engagement/disengagement
in manual mode
To engage the diff lock manually, proceed as follows:
1. Start the engine.
2. The brake pedals must be released. Fig. BD2
3. Press the button (1), short press.
When the diff lock is engaged, the following lamps (1 and
3) will be illuminated.

To disengage the differential lock:

−− Press the button (1), short press.
−− Fully depress one or both the brake pedals.
−− The steering angle (factory set), automatically disen-
gages the differential lock for safety reasons.
In all cases above, the lamps 1 and 3 will go off.
NOTE: When the tractor engine is turned off, the function
previously set by the operator (manual or automatic dif-
ferential lock) will not be stored in the memory.
Diff lock engagement/disengagement
in automatic mode
To engage the differential automatically, proceed
as follows:
1. Start the engine.
2. Press the button (1) for 2 seconds at least (long pres-
sure). In this status the lamp (2) just under the button
will light up.
Both lamps shown (1) and (3) will light illuminate when
the diff lock is engaged.
After this function is enabled, the diff lock is automatically
engaged subject to the following:

−− Position of the hitch

−− Tractor speed
−− Released brake pedals
−− Steering angle

The above criteria are factory set.

If one of these conditions is not met, the diff lock will

not be engaged, but the AUTOMATIC mode will remain
engaged. The diff lock will be engaged as soon as all the
required conditions are met.

5-42 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

To disengage the AUTO mode of the differential

lock, press the button (1) (long press). The lamp (2) behind
the button will go off.
The eventually lit lamps in the button and instrument
cluster will go off.

WARNING: Steering is difficult when the dif-

ferential lock is engaged. This could cause an
accident.
Engage the differential lock when working
in the field to improve draft, but disengage it
to turn at the end of a row. Do not drive on
roads, or at high speed anywhere, with the
differential lock engaged.
Failure to comply with these directions could
cause injuries or death.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-43

Operation

FIELD OPERATION
REAR POWER TAKE-OFF
Precautions when using the PTO DANGER: Before connecting, adjusting or
working on implements operated by the PTO,
disengage the PTO, stop the engine, remove
When using power take-off operated equipment the fol-
the key from the dashboard and engage the
lowing rules MUST be followed:
parking brake. Do not work under raised
1. Always follow the implement manufacturers recom-
implements.
mendations (refer to implement Operator's Manual)
when adjusting and aligning the implement and the
DANGER: Check to make sure that all imple-
implement driveline with the tractor.
ments operated by the PTO are fitted with the
correct protections, are in a good condition
2. On a tractor with a three point hitch, both lift links must
and comply with the provisions established
be set as specified in the implement Operator's Manual.
by law.
3. Set the three point hitch so as to limit the lateral move-
DANGER: Before driving an implement
ment of any implement attached.
through the PTO, ALWAYS make sure that all
bystanders are well away from the tractor.
4. The upper limit (maximum lift) for the hitch must be set
correctly. Refer to the adjustments for the electronic
WARNING: To avoid any damages to the drive-
hitch for instructions adjustment of the lifting height.
line of 540 or 540E rpm PTO or injuries to per-
sons, do not attach any implements requiring
5. If attaching an implement to the drawbar:
more than 56 kW (75 hp) for their operation.
Implements that require more than 56 kW (75
A. Hold the drawbar in the centre location on the rear
hp) should only be attached to the 1000 rpm
support with the retaining pins.
PTO driveline.
B. Raise the three point hitch as high as possible to
WARNING: When attaching implements AL-
prevent possible interference between the lower links
WAYS make sure they are matched to the
and the implement.
tractor PTO SPEEDS. Do not exceed the rec-
ommended speeds of the driven machine. Do
C. The drawbar clevis (if equipped) must be removed
not operate the PTO unless the shaft and drive
or mounted under the drawbar, to prevent possible
line shields are in position and the tachometer
interference between the clevis and the implement
is working correctly.
driveline.

WARNING: Fix the drawbar in the central posi-
D. Connect the implement to the drawbar with a hard-
tion when using implements that are driven
ened steel pin. Make sure the pin is securely held in
by the PTO of the tractor.
place with a cotter pin or lock pin and does not contact
the implement driveline.
WARNING: PTO driven machinery can cause

serious injury. Before working on or near the
E. Connect the implement to the tractor drawbar before
PTO shaft, or servicing or clearing the imple-
connecting the implement driveline to the power
ment, ALWAYS DISENGAGE the PTO and STOP
take-off. When connecting the implement driveline
the engine.
to the tractor, check the driveline for correct length,
allowed slant and free telescopic movement. The
WARNING: When using the PTO drive with
correct length is important to prevent the driveline
a stationary tractor, ALWAYS make sure that
from hitting bottom or from separating in any tractor
the gears are in neutral and that the parking
or implement operating position. An excessive slant
brake is applied.
could damage also the power take-off guards.
WARNING: Before starting up any PTO-driven
6. Always stop the engine before changing PTO shaft and
implement hitched to the three-point linkage,
before connecting an implement to the PTO shaft. This
lift the implement to its full height using posi-
releases the tractor PTO brake and allows the PTO shaft
tion control and check that at least 1/4th of
to be turned by hand so that the splines of the tractor
the total length of the telescopic section of
and implement PTO shafts can be aligned.
the drive shaft is engaged. Adjust the height
limiter on the electronic hitch control panel
WARNING: Before connecting or using imple-
(if fitted) to limit the maximum height of the
ments and trailers, ALWAYS read thoroughly
stroke.
and follow the instructions of the operator's
manual provided by the manufacturer.

5-44 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

WARNING: Attach the implement to the drawbar of the PTO safety guards
tractor before connecting the implement transmission
to the power take-off. When connecting the implement
WARNING: NEVER operate without the PTO
driveline to the tractor, check the driveline for correct
shield (1) or cap (2) mounted. These parts
length, allowed slant and free telescopic movement.
protect persons from injuries and the shaft
The correct length is important to prevent the drive-
splines from damage.
line from hitting bottom or from separating in any
tractor or implement operating position. An excessive
All tractors with a power take-off have a safety guard (1)
slant could damage also the power take-off guards.
and a cap (2) for the splined output shaft.

To prevent injury to the operator, the tractor power take-

off safety guard and the shields for the telescopic shaft
assembly must be used.

When possible raise the guard (1) when connecting an

implement and lower the guard to horizontal when using
the 3 point hitch and a non driven PTO implement.

WARNING: PTO guards must be mounted for

most operations to avoid any injuries to the
operator and bystanders. Where attachments,
such as pumps, are installed on the PTO shaft
(especially if the tractor PTO guard is moved
upward or removed) extended shielding
equivalent to the PTO guard must be installed
with the attachment. Install the PTO guard
again to its original position immediately after
removing the attachment.

Faulty PTO
See “Error Codes/Alarm Messages” on page 4-36, section
"Instrument cluster and programming".

NOTE: In case of PTO malfunction, the instrument cluster

will display an alarm code. The Dealer's personnel has
specific competences to locate the error and the type of
operation to be performed.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-45

Operation

Changing the PTO Shaft

WARNING: The PTO shaft must be replaced

with the engine off and the parking brake
engaged. Remove the ignition key.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

The tractor is provided with a PTO shaft with 6 splines

(Fig. AP1) that can be replaces, if necessary, with a shaft
with 21 splines (Fig. AP2).

Proceed as follows to replace the PTO shaft: Fig. AP1 - PTO shaft with 6 splines
−− Lift the PTO guard.
−− Loosen the screws (1 - Fig. AP3) and remove the shaft
(6 or 21 splines)
−− Clean the removed shaft accurately, wrap it up in a
clean cloth and store it in the tool box.
−− If necessary, clean the shaft (21 or 6 splines) before
reinstalling it in its seat.
−− Tighten the screws (1) to lock the shaft in its seat.
Tighten to about 115 Nm.

Fig. AP2 - PTO shaft with 21 splines

Fig. AP3

5-46 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

PTO speed [4.2.d]

(Fig. VP1)
By means of the PTO speed selection (1) and the PTO type
selection lever (2) one of the following speeds can be set:

PTO speed Engine rate

540 2005
1000 1995
540ECO (Economy) 1608
1000ECO (Economy) 1600
Table 1

Speed selection must match the type of PTO shaft in-

stalled:
PTO speed Fig. VP1
Shaft type 540 1000 540ECO 1000ECO
6 splines YES NO YES NO
21 splines YES YES YES YES
Table 2 Selection of PTO speed and mode
(Fig. VP1)
Detection of PTO speed-PTO shaft combination
(only NAO market) Shift the lever (1) to select the PTO speed:
When the PTO is running, the tractor's electronic system • Down for speed 540
can detect if the selected speed is the correct one for the • Up for speed 1000
shaft in use. If the selected speed (e.g. 1000) is not suited • Centre for NEUTRAL
to the shaft (e.g. 6 splines), the controller will switch the
PTO out. Select a suitable speed for the shaft or replace Shift the lever (2) to select the PTO mode:
the shaft (see Table 2). • Down for Normal mode
• Up for Economy mode 5
PTO overspeed
If the maximum allowed speed rate of the PTO is exceed- IMPORTANT: Always disengage the PTO (if running)
ed, on the display an exclamation mark comes on and the before changing speed.
present PTO speed indication will flash (see “Power Take
Off Menu” on page 4-40). Reduce the engine rated speed to Economy PTO (540ECO/1000ECO)
reduce the PTO speed. Economy PTO is a feature where 540 or 1000 rpm PTO
speed can be obtained using a lower engine rpm. This
PTO overspeed for NAO market has a number of advantages, including a reduction in fuel
In case of PTO overspeed, the controller will act to limit consumption, noise and vibration.
PTO speed to the allowed RPM rate: therefore the RPM
rate of the PTO will not increase though the engine rate Engine power management system.
is increased. The tractor is equipped with an engine power manage-
ment system that monitors and boosts engine power
during PTO operations.
IMPORTANT: When using the PTO, to avoid damage to
the driveline, implement or injury to bystanders make sure When the torque load applied through the PTO driveline
the implement input shaft rpm never exceeds the recom- increases the power management system will increase
mended rpm for the implement. When using the 540 or horsepower to maintain the PTO performance. As the
540E rpm PTO driveline, do not attach implements that load reduces the system will lower the horsepower as
require more than 56 kW (75 hp) to operate. Implements necessary.
that require more than 56 kW (75 hp) should only be at-
tached to the 1000 pr 1000E rpm PTO driveline. The engine power management system basically changes
the maximum engine torque curves electronically as and
when load is applied to the engine.

This system will operate within all PTO speeds.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-47

Operation

Engagement of the rear PTO (Fig.

VP2)
Proceed in the following way to engage the rear
PTO:
• Operator seated: the PTO CANNOT be started if you
are not seated.
• Select speed and mode by the relative levers (see on
page 5-47).
• Lift and block in the ON position the control (1) to en-
gage the rear PTO. The lamps in the control (1) and the
button (2) will light up and also the icon of the rear PTO
on the display (see “Power Take Off Menu” on page 4-40
for further information on the indications).
The PTO shaft starts turning. Fig. VP2

IMPORTANT: If the operator stands leaves his/her seat for

longer than 5 seconds, in addition to a warning buzzer, the
controller will deactivate the PTO as safety measure. In this
case, to start the PTO again, first push down the control (1)
to the OFF position, then to the ON position again.

NOTE: If the control (1) is in the ON position at engine

ignition, the lamps in the control (1) and button (2) will start
flashing to indicate that the control (1) must be pushed
down to the OFF position.
In this condition, the engine will start normally, but the PTO
Fig. VP2A - Control (1) in OFF position
shaft will not operate.
Push down the control (1) to the OFF position: the lamps
will go out.

To disengage the rear PTO, push down the control (1)

to the OFF position.

NOTE: If the PTO response during operation is not satis-

factory, this can be corrected by means of the dedicated
menu of the instrument cluster. See “PTO Drive Engage-
ment” on page 4-35. Fig. VP2B - Control (1) in ON position

5-48 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

External PTO controls

Fig. VP4 - VP5

2 1
WARNING: Danger of entanglement. Keep well
away from spinning shafts. Take care NOT to
remain caught up by the PTO driveline. Keep
all the guards mounted at any time on the
transmission shafts of the tractor or imple-
ments.

WARNING: High-inertia implements do not

become stationary immediately when PTO is
disengaged. Allow sufficient time for imple-
ment to “run down” to a halt before cleaning
or adjusting. Fig. VP4

The external control are located both on the right and

left fenders.
The external controls may be used to start the PTO only
with stationary tractor.

The button (2) STOP stops the PTO regardless of the fact
that the PTO had been started by the cab control or by
the button (1) START.

The button (1) START starts the PTO only if engaged in

the cab and the button (3) STATIONARY was pressed (see
“Stationary” on page 5-36).

The correct procedure to use the button (1) START is the

Fig. VP5
following:
• Park the tractor (see “Parking The Tractor” on page 5-16).
• Start the PTO and press the button (3).
• Get out of the tractor and stop the PTO with the but-
ton (2) STOP.
• Carry out the required operations, e.g. connecting an
implement.
• Start the PTO with the button (1) START.
NOTE: The PTO can be stopped either with the external
button (2) STOP or in the cab by moving the relative control
to the OFF position (see “Rear power take-off engage-
ment” on page 5-48)
NOTE: When the PTO is disengaged, the PTO shaft can
turn freely to be correctly aligned with the implement
coupling.
DANGER: External controls must be operated
at a safe distance, standing on one side out-
side the tractor and out of the overall width
of fenders or tyres. It is expressly forbidden
to operate the controls from the rear of the
tractor or standing on the inner side of wheels.
5
DANGER: Danger for bystanders! Before us-
ing the outer switches of the power take-off
(PTO), make sure that there are no persons
or objects in the reach of the implement or
of the three-point linkage.
Failure to comply with these directions could
cause injuries or death.
DANGER: Never reach with arms, legs or any
part of your body in the area near the three-
point linkage or the implement when operat-
ing the outer switch. Never let another person
operate the other control group. Walk around
the tractor or the implement to go from a
control group the other. NEVER pass between
implement and tractor.
NEVER service the implement while the PTO
IS RUNNING, but shift the PTO into neutral,
turn off the engine and remove the key.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-49

Operation

Auto PTO
Fig. AT1

With the Auto PTO function the PTO can be automatically

started or turned off according to hitch position. The Auto
PTO function can be used immediately because the hitch
positions that switch the PTO on or off are already set at
the factory.

Auto PTO activation

• Start the PTO with the control (1).
• Press the button (2) until the lamp (3) lights up.

NOTE: When the Auto PTO is active, the lamp (3) will be
always be on regardless of the running or stopped PTO. Fig. AT1

At this point the Auto PTO is activated and the PTO shaft
can:
A. Stop turning because the hitch is over the OFF position
(the lamp in the button (2) is off).
B. Go on turning because the hitch is under the ON posi-
tion (the lamp in the button (2) is on).
• Within 10 seconds from this sound, move the hitch
to the position where it is required that the PTO is
switched off (OFF position).
• Press the button (2) longer than 1 second. The buzzer
will give two sounds (short and then long) to signal
memorization of the ON and OFF positions.

If the PTO is running, just raise the hitch to the OFF posi-
tion to stop it: the lamp (2) will go out.
If the PTO is stopped, just lower the hitch to the ON posi-
tion to start it: the lamp (2) will come on.
Auto PTO deactivation
To deactivate the Auto PTO press the button (2) until the
lamp (3) goes out.
NOTE: When Auto PTO is being deactivated, the PTO
will go on running if it was already running (hitch beyond
the ON position).
NOTE: If the procedure is not complete, the previously
stored values are valid and the system will continue to
use them,
NOTE: The PTO ‘OFF’ set-point should be set at the point
where the implement has just cleared the ground, when
raised by the hitch.
NOTE: The PTO ‘ON’ set-point should be set at a position
which ensures that the PTO is ON and fully engaged before
the implement enters the ground.

NOTE: If the Auto PTO is being deactivated while the

PTO is not running (hitch beyond the OFF position), to start
manually the PTO it is necessary first to move the control
(1) to off, then pull and lock it in the ON position.

Memorization of the ON and OFF positions

NOTE: The positions can only be memorized when the

PTO is off, the engine is running and the tractor at standstill.

To memorize both hitch positions to switch the PTO on

or off, proceed as follows:
• Move the hitch to the position where it is required that
the PTO is switched on (ON position).
• Press the button (2) for less than 1 second, release and
press it again within the next 5 seconds for longer then
1 second. The buzzer will give a short sound.

5-50 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

FRONT POWER TAKEOFF (if equipped)

Fig. PF1
The front power take-off has a 6 spline output shaft
which rotates at 1000 rpm (fixed gear). The engagement
is electro-hydraulic and is operated by the button (1 - Fig
PF1). Depending upon market requirements, the front
PTO can be supplied with two different directions of rota-
tion (clockwise or counter-clockwise).

IMPORTANT: When using implements that cause shock

loads, always use a safety coupler between the implement
and the PTO drive shaft.
Before using the implement, check the correct operation Fig. PF1A - Control (1) in OFF position
both of the safety coupler and of the implement.

IMPORTANT: When using implements with quickly mov-

ing parts (such as mowers, reapers, snowplows) ALWAYS
fit an overrun device on the implement drive shaft, as a 5
protection against possible PTO faults.

IMPORTANT: Ensure that the implement PTO shaft is

not too long or the PTO is not damaged when the front
mounted implement must be lifted fully up.
Fig. PF1B - Control (1) in ON position
WARNING: Before connecting or using imple-
ments and trailers, ALWAYS read thoroughly
and follow the instructions of the operator's
manual provided by the manufacturer. IMPORTANT: If the operator leaves his/her seat for longer
than 5 seconds, the controller will deactivate the PTO as
Engagement of the front PTO Fig. PF1 safety measure. In this case, to start the PTO again, first
push down the control (1) to the OFF position, then to the
To engage the front PTO proceed as follows. ON position again.
• Sit down in your seat: the PTO CANNOT be started if
you are not seated. To disengage the front PTO, push down the control (1)
• Lift and block in the ON position the control (1) to en- to the OFF position.
gage the front PTO. The lamps in the control (1) and
the front PTO icon on the instrument cluster will light
up (see “Power Take Off Menu” on page 4-40 for further
information on the indications).
The PTO shaft starts turning.

IMPORTANT: If the operator stands leaves his/her seat for

longer than 5 seconds, in addition to a warning buzzer, the
controller will deactivate the PTO as safety measure. In this
case, to start the PTO again, first push down the control (1)
to the OFF position, then to the ON position again.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-51

Operation

REAR THREE-POINT HITCH

The three-point hitch system gives position control and load control of soil engaging implements.

According to its tailored specifications, the tractor may be suited to Cat. III or IIIN implements, compliant with SAE-ASAE
standard dimensions:

X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460

IMPLEMENT Category III N Category III

Diameters of hitch balls 60.0 mm 60.0 mm
Diameters of hitch pins 36.6 mm 36.6 mm
Lower hitch pin, inner shoulder spread 825 mm 965 mm
Gap on top of implement mast 52.4 mm 52.4 mm
Diameter of holes on top of implement mast 31.7 mm 31.7 mm

WARNING: Before connecting or using imple-

ments and trailers, ALWAYS read thoroughly
and follow the instructions of the operator's
manual provided by the manufacturer.

WARNING: Never work under an implement

that is kept raised only by the hydraulic hitch,
but always secure it with a suitable support.
Engage the first gear, engage the parking
brake, turn the engine off and remove the
ignition key.

When using the three point hitch ensure there is sufficient

clearance between the rear tyres and the lower links by
adjusting the stabilizers and/or tread positions.

The top and lower links must be adjusted correctly so

that the implement can work at the required depth and
that the lower links are free to move up and down in
undulating ground.
After making any adjustments, carefully raise the imple-
ment to make sure there is clearance between the tractor
and implement.
Make sure tyre pressures, wheel equipment and ballasting
are correct before making hitch adjustments.
WARNING: Extreme care must be exercised
when adjusting and checking the hitch and
control linkage when the engine is running
and when linkage is under hydraulic or me-
chanical load. Study the linkage and hitch
travel, keep hands, arms, legs and feet out of
the travel arc of the hitch and linkage.
Make sure that no persons are in the danger
area.

5-52 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Lower Link Adjustments WARNING: Always keep clear of the implement

operating area [4.2.b].
STEP 1 Do not stand between the tractor and the
Put the tractor on a hard level surface and lower the hitch three-point linkage when the hitch controls
to the lowest position. are operated.
Always check that all persons are well clear of
STEP 2 the operating area and the surrounding areas.

Lift the turnbuckle lock (1) to release.

STEP 3
Turn the turnbuckle lock clockwise to lower and counter-
clockwise to raise.

NOTE: Be sure to place the turnbuckle locks in their

locked position after adjusting the lower links.
5
Important notes on use and adjustment of the
three-point linkage.

WARNING: before any adjustments in the

three-point linkage, the following operations
are required: engage the first gear, engage the
parking brake, turn the engine off and remove
the ignition key.

WARNING: Always use the lift in position

control mode for transports with implements
mounted on three-point linkage.

DANGER: Always use the hitch in position

control mode when hitching or unhitching an
implement to the three-point linkage.

WARNING: After stopping the tractor, always

lower implements connected to the three-
point linkage.

DANGER: Never work under an implement

that is kept raised only by the hydraulic hitch,
but always secure it with a suitable support.
Engage the first gear, engage the parking
brake, turn the engine off and remove the
ignition key.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-53

Operation
Top link adjustments
WARNING: Only use the special swivel type
top link supplied with the tractor when con-
necting to the top bracket. Serious damage
and possible injury can result, if you use other
types of top link.
The mounting holes inside the top link bracket make it
possible to obtain various lifting angles of the implements.
Use the hole most suited to match the implement to the
tractor.
To adjust the mounting position of the top link, remove
the split pin (1) and the top link bearing pin (2). Move the
top link to the required position.
After mounting the top link in the required position, make
sure that its length has been properly adjusted. For infor-
mation about the length, refer to the Operator's manual
provided with the implement.
To adjust the length of the top link, move the adjustment
handle (1) to the vertical position. Turn the handle clock-
wise to shorten the link or counter-clockwise to lengthen
the link.
5-54
Claw end lower links
(if equipped).
Connecting an implement
Reverse the tractor until the claw ends of the lower links
are aligned under the connecting points of the imple-
ment. Raise the lower links until the claws engage and
the latches (3) lock. The spring spacer between the lower
links will give the Cat. III width setting.
Disconnecting an implement
Lower the implement to the ground. Pull the remote re-
lease rope (if equipped) to release the claw end latches
and lower the lower links until clear of the implement. Lift
the top link off the implement upper connecting point and
store in the bracket provided.
Move the tractor forward away from the implement.
Telescoping lower links
(if equipped).
Pull the latch handle up and pull the end of the lower link
out. Connect the extended lower links to the implement.
The lower links will retract and lock in place when the
tractor is moved rearward.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the lower links are fully
retracted and locked in place before operating the tractor.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1
 Operation

Left hand stabilizer (option A) Left hand stabilizer (option B)

(if equipped). (if equipped).

The stabilizer locking device is operated by an adjust-

able chain and spring. The chain length can be altered
by connecting different links of the chain to the hook on
the rear left fender.

Rigid operation

Rigid operation
Install the pin (3) through the hole (1) for RIGID operation.

Sway operation
Install the pin (3) through the hole (2) for WORK operation.

With the three point linkage fully lowered, adjust the chain When the three point linkage is raised the stabilizer DOES
by putting a different link on the fender hook so the chain NOT lock to prevent sway during transportation.
becomes loose and there is no tension in the spring. The
stabilizer will be locked for rigid operation.

Sway operation Right hand stabilizer

5
(if equipped).

If equipped with 'Option A' stabilizer:

When the three point linkage is raised the chain will
loosen, the top flap will drop and lock the stabilizer to
prevent sway during transportation.

If equipped with 'Option B' stabilizer:

When the three point linkage is raised the stabilizer DOES
NOT lock to prevent sway during transportation.

With the three point linkage fully lowered, adjust the chain
by putting a different link on the fender hook so the chain
is tight and the spring is under tension.
This will hold the top latch of the stabilizer up. The stabi-
lizer will be free to float for sway operation.
When the three point linkage is raised the chain will
loosen, the top flap will drop and lock the stabilizer to
prevent sway during transportation.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-55

Operation

Cam stabilizers (if equipped) for Adjustment of stabilizers

North America The space between the lower links can be adjusted for
Cat. III or Cat. IIIN implements by shims placed between
Cam stabilizers for three point linkages can be mounted
the bumper cam and the lower link.
in two (2) positions on the drawbar frame to check the
side sway of the three point linkage.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the implement category
setting suits the implement. Otherwise the linkage could
Rigid operation
be damaged.

During the side sway adjustment, the same number of
shims should be used on each lower link. The adjustment
may be made with the cam stabilizers both in rigid and in
sway position, with the hitch raised in transport position.

The lower links should move freely without interfering with

the stabilizers during the whole travel of the hitch with the
raised implement. Add shims between the spacer and the
bumper cam as required.

The stabilizers can be mounted for RIGID operation with

the pin in the lower hole (1) to guarantee a minimum
side sway both in the work and in the transport position
of the linkage.

Sway operation

The cam stabilizers can also be mounted in the STABI-

LIZATION position with the pin in the top hole to obtain
maximum side sway.

In the STABILIZATION position the stabilizers are tapered

to automatically obtain maximum stabilization when the
linkage is lowered, and no stabilization when the linkage
is lifted (transport position).

5-56 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

CATEGORY III (for NAO market)

When operating Cat. III equipment, install the spacer (2) between the sway cam bumper (3) and the lower links (1) as shown.

CATEGORY IIIN (for NAO market)

When operating Cat. IIIN equipment, install the sway cam bumper (3) onto the lower links (1) as shown. Install the spacer
(2) and shims (5) on the outside of the lower links (1).

Key
1. Lower link assembly 5. Shim
2. Spacer 6. Washer (22 x 37 x 4 mm)
3. Sway bumper cam 7. Nut (prevailing torque)
4. Bolt (M20 x 130)

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-57

Operation

Lower link flotation

IMPORTANT: Check the implement Operator’s Manual
to see if mechanical flotation can be used.

One or both lower links can be set to move up or down

approximately 40 mm. The mechanical lower link float is
used when operating in variable field surface conditions
allowing the implement to follow the surface conditions.

Mechanical flotation is also used when the mounted im-

plement width is more than the wheel base of the tractor.

For RIGID operation with no up or down movement, the

retainer plate (1) in the lower fork of the lower lift links
must be in the upper hole, as shown above.

For the WORK position, the retainer plate (1) of the lower
fork of the lower lift links must be in vertical position to
let the pin (2) slide freely up and down.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

To swing the retainer plate to the vertical position, remove

the split pin (3) and the pin (2). Place the plate (1) in the
vertical position and fit the pin (2) back. Lock with the
split pin (3).

5-58 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

REAR HITCH

The controls involved in the use of the rear hitch are (Fig. SOL1):

1. Hitch control selector

2. Implement work depth/height control knob
3. Intermix knob (position or draft control or a mix of both)
4. Potentiometer for hitch lowering speed adjustment
5. Potentiometer to adjust maximum hitch height setting

Fig. SOL1

Use of the hitch control selector (1 -

Fig. SOL2)

The selector has three positions: a middle stable position

and two momentary ones: top and bottom. Momentary
position means that the selector, when released, automati-
cally returns to the central position. From hence, if not
otherwise specified, the expression "Push the selector"
(or an equivalent one) means that the operator should
act as follows:

• Push the selector (down or up) and release it.

Fig. SOL2

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-59

Operation

Hitch activation
(Fig. SOL3)

To use the hitch, the engine must be running. After starting

the engine, the hitch is not yet active. The led (1) is RED.

To activate the hitch, proceed as follows.

a. Make sure that the handle (3) that controls the hitch
position is not placed on the padlock symbol.
b. Press and hold up the selector (2) for 3 seconds. The
led (1) will go out. Now the hitch can be used.

Fig. SOL3

Hitch lock (OFF)

(Fig. SOL4)

To lock the hitch, turn knob (1) to the padlock symbol. The
LED (1 - Fig. SOL3) on the selector will turn RED.

NOTE: The hitch can be locked in any moment. If the hitch

is locked while moving, the hitch will stop in the position
reached in that moment.

NOTE: To use the locked hitch, follow the procedure de-

scribed in the paragraph "Rear hitch activation".

Fig. SOL4

5-60 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Hitch Switch Operation

(Fig. SOL5)

When the hitch is activated (LED on selector is off and

hitch position control knob not on the padlock symbol):

• Raising and Transport position. Push the selector

(1) up: The LED (2) turns YELLOW to indicate that the
hitch is in the lift status.
• Lowering and Working position. Push the selector (1)
down. The LED (2) turns GREEN to indicate that the
hitch is in the lower status and working.

NOTE: If the selector (1) is pushed up or down when the

hitch is stationary, the hitch will start moving.

NOTE: If the selector (1) is pushed up when the hitch is Fig. SOL5
moving downward, the hitch will stop.

NOTE: If the selector (1) is pushed down when the hitch

is moving upward, the hitch will stop.

NOTE: When operating a machine that requires a pause

during the raising or lowering cycle press the enable but-
ton and hitch selector (1) at the same time, this will stop
the hitch moving. To continue press the selector in the
required direction

Fast lowering (Float)

The fast lowering (float) function lets the hitch be quickly
lowered below the setting of the position control knob (6).

To activate the quick lowering function, push down and

hold the selector (1 - Fig. SOL5).

NOTE: As soon as the quick lowering function is started,

if the selector is released the hitch will return to the set-
ting of the position control knob for. example, Fig. SOL6.

NOTE: During the quick lowering the LED in the selector

turns GREEN. Fig. SOL6

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-61

Operation

Hitch Raising and Lowering SLOW

Method
(Fig. SOL7)

The hitch can be operated in the cab to mirror the same

way as with the external controls on the rear fenders.
This way of using the hitch the hitch lets the operator take
advantage of the slow raise or lower operation).

NOTE: After using the hitch in this mode, you do not need
to activate the hitch again as in the case of using them
through the external controls.

To use the hitch in slow mode, push the button (2) Enable
and in the same time:

• Move the selector (1) up: the hitch starts moving up

and the led in the selector turns YELLOW.
• Push the selector (1) down: the hitch starts moving
down and the led in the selector turns GREEN.

NOTE: When the selector or the Enable button or both

are released, the hitch stops any movements.

NOTE: The hitch can be moved down regardless of the

position set with the knob that controls the hitch position.

Fig. SOL7

5-62 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


Hitch damping function
(Antidamping)
During the transport of an implement connected to the
hitch, e.g. a plough, it is useful to activate the antidamp-
ing function at the transport speed. If the antidamping
function is activated, the hitch is raised or lowered by
the electronic controller to oppose swings caused by the
carried implement.
To activate the antidamping function:
• Enable the hitch system.
• Set the hitch in transport position hitch raised yellow
LED.
The antidamping system starts operating only when the
tractor's speed is higher than 10 Kph. The function is deac-
tivated when the tractor's speed drops to less than 8 Kph.
NOTE: The antidamping control is disabled, regardless of
tractor's speed, if the hitch is not in the transport position, or
if it is locked by means of the hitch position control knob.
NOTE: When the antidamping function is active, the led
on the selector turns BLUE.
NOTE: When the antidamping function is active, it is de-
activated by pushing the selector down (selector led is off)
and if the hitch is not moving. If the selector is now pushed
down again, the hitch will activate the work function and
therefore could start dropping!
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Operation
Drop speed control
(Fig. SOL8)
The knob (1 - Fig. SOL8) is used to adjust the maximum
drop speed of the hitch. Set the drop speed to fast (knob
on the “hare” symbol) for light weight implements, or
slow (knob on “tortoise” symbol) for heavy implements
such as ploughs.
NOTE: The lowering speed can be adjusted while the
hitch is moving: the hitch will adapt to the new speed in
real time.
Maximum height setting
(Fig. SOL8)
Knob (2 - Fig. SOL8) is used to adjust the maximum
height of the hitch. It limits the height when using either
the selector or the position control. Turn the knob in
clockwise/anticlockwise to set the highest/lowest height,
respectively, the hitch can reach when moving up/down.
This control can be used with fully mounted PTO driven
implements where the angle of the IPTO shaft needs to
be limited to prevent noise, chatter and damage due to
excessive angles.
The knob (2) adjusts the maximum height of the hitch
even when the antidamping device is active.
5

Fig. SOL8
5-63
Operation

Hitch Operating Mode

Position Draft or Intermix Control
(Fig. SOL9)

Turn the knob (1) to position (A) to operate in position

control mode. In position control the implement can be
set to a constant height. The height is set by the position
control knob (fig. SOL10):

Turn the knob (1) to position (B) to operate in draft con-

trol mode. The draft control aims to maintain a constant
draft load on the implement. The value of draft is set by
the position control knob:
• Position between 0 and 1= max. controlled draft
• Position 10 = minimum draft Position control

Turn the knob (1) to any positions between (A) and (B)
to obtain the intermix mode. In the intermix mode there
is a mix of draft and position control.

• The nearer is the knob (1) to the (A) position, the greater
is the position control in comparison to draft.

• The nearer is the knob (1) to the (B) position, the greater
is the draft control in comparison to position.

Draft control

Intermix
Fig. SOL9

5-64 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Hitch position control knob (Fig.

SOL10)

Knob (1) can be turned to:

−− Provide hitch transport lock.
−− Give precise control of the work depth.

• Position between 0 and 1 = lowest controlled position

• Position 10 = highest position

Operation via control knob:

Fig. SOL10
OUTER RING - This is an adjustable mechanical stop for
the inner knob. This can be set so the inner dial will detent
anywhere between No 10 and 1

INNER KNOB - Used to precisely control the position of

the hitch. Turning the knob anticlockwise (higher number)
will raise the hitch or clockwise (small number)will lower
the hitch.

Floating mode.
Turn position control knob (1) between “0” and “1”. The
hitch will operate in float. This is useful for implements 5
that have their own depth wheels and will follow the
ground contours.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-65

Operation

External hitch controls

(Fig. SOL11)

The external switches (1 and 2) can be used to raise or

lower the hitch from outside the cab.
The external buttons make fine adjustments possible, that
are very useful, for instance, when hitching implements
to the three-point hitch.

NOTE: the external controls of the hitch are enabled even

when the hitch is not directly activated from inside the cab.

DANGER: External controls must be operated

at a safe distance, standing on one side outside
the tractor and out of the overall width of rear
fenders or tyres. It is expressly forbidden to
operate the controls from the rear of the trac-
tor or standing on the inner side of wheels.
Fig. SOL11
DANGER: Never reach with arms, legs or any
part of your body in the area near the three-
point linkage or the implement when operat-
ing the outer switch. Never let another person
operate the other control group. Walk around
the tractor or the implement to go from a
control group the other. NEVER pass between
implement and tractor.

Always operate the external switches according to the

following procedure:

Shift the transmission to neutral. Engage the park brake.

Press the switch (1) to raise the hitch. Press switch (2) to
lower the hitch.
When the switch is released, the hitch stops.
If both switches are pressed together the hitch will not
move.

NOTE: With the external switches the hitch moves at a

lower speed than with the controls in the cab.

NOTE: When the lowering switch (2) is pushed, the hitch

lowers regardless of the setting given to the hitch position
control knob.
657
NOTE: For safety purposes, when at least one of the 2
external hitch switches are operated, the internal cab hitch
controls are automatically disabled (LED on selector will
turn RED). The procedure to activate the hitch must be
repeated before handling the hitch with the cab controls.

5-66 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

FRONT HITCH (if equipped)

Hitch System Multi Valve

The valve is mounted at the rear of the tractor.

The multi valve has two operation modes.

The front hitch is operated via the tractors remote hy-
draulic valve circuit and is double acting (the linkage is
powered up and down). NOTE: To move the lever L2, raise it slightly and select
the required position.
The hitch is designed for Category IIIN implements.
The top link has a ball end.
5
Valve Positions:
Maximum lift capacity (at 610 mm in front of lift point):
3,500 kg
1st mode - Single acting
IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the maximum permitted
front axle operating weight when using the front hitch, see
the Technical specifications section for more information.
Comply with tyre load capacities and any possible legal
limitations.

NOTE: On request, a front 900 kg ballast kit on the front

hitch is available.

2nd mode - Double acting

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-67

Operation

3rd mode - Disengaged (Transport) - For system safety Lower links

during transport or travel on road. The lower links have three positions. When changing the
position of the lower links, support the links when remov-
ing the retaining pins.
Both lift links must be set in the same position.

Rigid Position

IMPORTANT: The front hitch is operated using one of the

tractors remote valves. In order to use the rear couplers of
this valve the front hitch MUST be disengaged as shown. For operation with no vertical movement, install the retain-
ing pins in the rear hole.

Float position

For operation with vertical float, independently of each

other, install the retaining pins in the front hole.

5-68 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Link

When not being used, store the Top Link as shown above.

When operating on the public highway without equipment

attached, always store the top link correctly.

Front hydraulic quick couplers for

auxiliary control valves (if equipped) 5

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-69

Operation

Front hitch operation (Fig. SF1)

To handle the front hitch by means of the mini joystick

(1) on the armrest, the hydraulic system of the auxiliary
control valves must be activated (see “Auxiliary control
valves” on page 5-75).

• To lower the hitch: push the mini joystick forward

(position A) without reaching the detent. Releasing
mini joystick it will go back into the central position
(neutral), thus stopping hitch lowering.

• To raise the hitch up: pull the mini joystick backwards

(position B) without reaching the detent. The releasing Fig. SF1
mini joystick it will go back into the central position
(neutral), thus stopping hitch raising.

NOTE: before using the front hitch check the flow rate
setting for the valve operating the front linkage.

Floating position of the hitch

(Fig. SF2)

Push the mini joystick (1) forward to the detent position

(F) to activate the floating mode of the hitch. This mode
is useful for implements that follow ground contours. To
deactivate the floating mode, just pull the mini joystick
back to release it from the detent position (F). The mini
joystick will return automatically to the neutral position.

NOTE: the front hitch cannot be used in hydraulic motor

mode.
Fig. SF2

5-70 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Hitch Operation
STEP 1
Activate the hydraulic system of the auxiliary control
valves.

STEP 2
Lower the lower links by pushing the mini joystick (1)
forward and set for Rigid or Float application, as required.

STEP 3
Attach the implement to the hitch. Make sure the correct
category implement is attached. A category indication is
stamped on each lower link.
Make sure the claws on the front hitch engage with the
implement and the latches lock. 5

STEP 4
Use the mini joystick to raise or lower the front hitch.

WARNING: Stand well clear of the linkage or

implement when operating the external con-
trols or injury can result from contact with
moving parts. Watch for possible pinch points
between the implement and tractor when the
hitch is moved.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-71

Operation

Front hitch external controls (Fig. SF3)

The external switches (1 and 2) can be used to raise or
lower the hitch front from outside the cab.

DANGER: Keep at a safe distance when using

the external controls. It is expressly forbidden
to operate the controls from the front of the
tractor or standing on the inner side of wheels.

DANGER: Never reach with arms, legs or any

part of your body in the area near the front
linkage or the implement when operating the
outer switch. Never let another person operate
the other control group. NEVER pass between
implement and tractor, but go around the
tractor or the implement.

Always operate the external switches according to the Fig. SF3

following procedure:

• Shift the transmission to neutral. Engage the park

brake.

• Activate the auxiliary control valves on the arm rest

switch (AVC).

• Press the “Stationary” button. Now you may leave

the cab.

• Press the switch (1) to raise the hitch. Press the switch
(2) to lower the hitch.
When the switch is released, the hitch stops at that
point.
If both switches are pressed together the hitch will
not move.

5-72 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Use of the front auxiliary control

valve
(If equipped) - (Fig. SF4)

To use the front auxiliary control valve, the auxiliary control

valves must be activated (see “Auxiliary control valves”
on page 5-75).

NOTE: The signs (+) and (-) show the oil flow toward the
outlet with the same sign on the auxiliary control valve.
The implement movment depends on the connection
with the valve.

−− Activation of valve outlet (+)

Move the mini joystick (1) to the left, without reach-
ing the detent position (M), and hold in the required Fig. SF4
position to allow oil to flow from the outlet (+) of the
valve. The released mini joystick will go automatically
back in the neutral position, thus stopping the opera-
tion of the valve.

−− Activation of the hydraulic motor

Move the mini joystick (1) to the left until the detent
position (M) is reached. To deactivate the function, pull
the mini joystick to the right to release it from detent.
The released mini joystick will go automatically back Activation of time-delay mode
in the neutral position, thus stopping the operation of (Fig. SF5)
the valve.
If the front auxiliary control valve is set up to operate
in time-delay mode, to activate this function, going off
5
−− Activation of valve outlet (-)
Move the mini joystick (1) to the right, without reach- from the neutral position, move quickly the mini joystick
ing the detent position (M), and hold in the required to the left (LH) or to the right (RH) to the max. position
position to allow oil to flow from the outlet (-) of the before detent, then release it. The whole operation must
valve. The released mini joystick will go automatically be shorter than 1” (within 0.7 seconds).
back in the neutral position, thus stopping the opera-
tion of the valve. NOTE: See “AVC - Auxiliary control valves” on page 4-22 for
setup instructions.
−− Activation of floating mode
Move the mini joystick (1) to the right until the detent 
position (F) is reached. To deactivate the function, pull
the mini joystick to the left to release it from detent.
The released mini joystick will go automatically back
in the neutral position, thus stopping the operation of
the valve.

NOTE: Before using the front valve, check the flow rate
setting to ensure safe operation.

Fig. SF5

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-73

Operation

Front Ballast
On request, a front ballast kit is available, to be mounted
on the front hitch.

WARNING: use suitable lifting equipment

when handling the ballast.

WARNING: when servicing work is required,

lower the front hitch to the ground and un-
hitch the implement. NEVER carry out servic-
ing work standing under the front hitch.

5-74 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVES (AVC) [4.2.f]

NOTE: Each auxiliary control valve is setup by means of the relative menu of the instrument cluster. See “AVC - Auxiliary
control valves” on page 4-22 in this manual.

The controls involved in the use of the auxiliary control valves are (Fig. DA1):

1. AVC button: to enable the hydraulic system

2. Stationary button: to let the auxiliary control valves operate even when the operator is not sitting in the cab (see page 5-36)
3. Selector Levers: to control the associated remote valve
4. Selector button for hydraulic rod control (if the diverter valve is present)
5. Selector button for hydraulic top link control (if the diverter valve is present)
6. Control button 1st auxiliary control valve
7. Mini joystick: to control any front equipment (see on page 5-70)

Fig. DA1

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-75

Operation

System enabling
The auxiliary control valve system must be enabled before
being used.
To enable the system, make sure that the following condi-
tions are met:

−− Engine running
−− Operator seated
−− All controls (finger, mini joysticks) are in neutral

Press button (1 - Fig. DA2) AVC for 3 seconds. The system

enabling is confirmed when the lamp in the AVC button
comes on.
Fig. DA2
When the system is enabled, the relative controls can be
used to operate the associated valves.

NOTE: If the lamp in the AVC button is off, the auxiliary

control valves cannot be used.

NOTE: If the operator leaves his/her seat longer than 5"

while at least one auxiliary control valve is operating, the
auxiliary control valves are disabled for safety reasons.
When the operator sits down again, it is not necessary
to enable the system again. It is only required that the
activation control of the auxiliary control valve you want
to use is moved to neutral (it it is not in neutral already),
then operate the activation control.

NOTE: If the button (2 - Fig. DA3) Stationary is activated,

you may leave your seat while the operating control valves
go on operating normally. For further details on the Station- Fig. DA3
ary function, see page 5-36.

5-76 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Use of the controls on the armrest

The buttons (1) and (2) in Fig. DA4 and the lever switches
indicated in the Fig. DA5 control the rear remote valves
(Fig. DA6). The controls have different colours to match the
colours of the caps of the remote valves they are working.

Example:
−− The blue buttons work the remote valve
with blue caps (1st valve on the left side, Fig. DA6).

−− The brown lever works the remote valve with brown

caps.
Fig. DA4
Using buttons (Fig. DA4)

The buttons are coupled respectively to the outlets (+)

and (-) stamped on the blue caps (1st control valve on the
left side, Fig. DA6).
• Push the button to allow oil flow from the outlet
(+) of the control valve.

• Push the button to allow oil flow from the outlet

(-) of the control valve.

When the pushed button is released, oil flow through the

control valve will stop.
5
NOTE: The signs (+) and (-) show the oil flow toward the
outlet with the same sign on the rear valve. The movement Fig. DA5
thus obtained in the connected implement depends on
the connection with the valve.

Activation of floating mode

1st CONTROL VALVE
When both buttons are pushed at the same
time, the floating mode for the valve is activated.
The floating mode will remain active as long as both but-
tons are pushed at the same time.

NOTE: For the 1st control valve the hydraulic motor func-
tion is not available.

Activation of time-delay mode Fig. DA6

If the valve controlling the first valve was set up for op-
eration in time-delay mode, to activate this function push
down and immediately release one of the buttons (1, 2
fig. DA4). The whole operation must be shorter than 1”
(about 0.7 seconds).

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-77

Operation

Button of the 2nd and 3rd hydraulic function

(if the diverter valve is present)

If a diverter valve is present, it is possible to choose

between piloting, by a combination of the buttons (1 and
2 - Fig. DA7) and of the buttons (3 and 4 - Fig. DA7), the
hydraulic top link of the hydraulic rod connected to the
first hydraulic remote valve.

To work the hydraulic top link:

• Push for 3 seconds the button , the lamp will
light up.

• Use the buttons and to move the top link.

• Push for 3 seconds again the button , the lamp

will go off.

To work the hydraulic RH levelling ram:

• Push for 3 seconds the button , the lamp will
light up.

• Use the buttons and to move the hydraulic

ram.
Fig. DA7

• Push for 3 seconds again the button , the lamp

will go off.

NOTE: Both functions cannot be activated at the same

time.

5-78 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Using the levers (Fig. DA8)

From the neutral position, as shown in Fig. DA8, each

lever has the following positions:

• Fully raised into the detent, oil will flow according to

the flow rate set on each valve Raised From neutral
towards the detent provides a progressive flow of oil.
• Fully lowered into the detent, Float, oil can transfer
freely between each port on the valve. Lowered from
neutral towards the detent provides progessive flow
of oil.

Lever upward Fig. DA8

By moving the finger up, the following activations are
possible:

−− Activation of a hydraulic motor

Move the lever (1 - Fig. DA9) until the detent position
(M - Fig. DA9) is reached. To deactivate the function,
push the lever down into the float position this allows
hydraulic motors to stop freely. The lever can then be
returned to neutral position.

NOTE: If the control valves are used in the hydraulic motor

function, the oil return should be connected to the free
flow return.

−− Activation of valve outlet (+) 5

Move the lever (1 - Fig. DA10) up, without reaching the
detent position, continue holding until the desired op- Fig. DA9
eration is completed, release the lever and it will return
to neutral position stopping the operation of the valve.

NOTE: The signs (+) and (-) show the oil flow toward the
outlet with the same sign on the rear valve. The movement
obtained by the connected implement depends on the
connection of the hoses with the valve.

Fig. DA10

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-79

Operation

Use of lever downward

By moving the finger down, the following activations are
possible:

−− Activation of floating mode

Move the lever (1 - Fig. DA11) into the detent position
(F - Fig. DA11). To deactivate the function, pull the lever
up to release it from detent it then goes to neutral posi-
tion, thus stopping the operation of the valve.

−− Activation of valve outlet (-)

Move the lever (1 - Fig. DA12) down, without reaching
the detent position, continue holding until the desired
operation is completed, release the swtich and it will
return to neutral position, stopping the operation of
the valve.
Fig. DA11

NOTE: The signs (+) and (-) show the oil flow toward the
outlet with the same sign on the rear valve. The movement
thus obtained by the connected implement depends on
the connection of the hoses with the valve.

Fig. DA12

Activation of time-delay mode

(Fig. DA13)

If a control valve has been set up to operate in time-delay

mode, briefly move and release the lever in the required
direction. This must be done in under 1 second or the
timer will not run.

NOTE: See ““AVC - Auxiliary control valves” on page 4-22 for

setup instructions.

Fig. DA13

5-80 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


Quick couplers
The tractor is equipped with female couplings according
to laws in force. These couplings will fit standard male
hose couplers made to current standards.
Your dealer can give you all required information to con-
nect different combinations of implements.
WARNING: Hydraulic fluid escaping under
pressure can have enough force to penetrate
the skin. Hydraulic fluid may also infect a
minor cut or opening in the skin. If injured by
escaping fluid, see a doctor at once.
Serious infection or reaction can result if
medical treatment is not given immediately.
Make sure all connections are tight and that
hoses and lines are in good condition before
applying pressure to the system. Release all
pressure before disconnecting the lines or
performing other work on the hydraulic sys-
tem. To find a leak under pressure use a small
piece of cardboard or wood. Never use hands.
WARNING: When using the auxiliary con-
trol valves, quick couplings may reach high
temperatures. Therefore it is mandatory to
use suitable safety gloves when hitching or
unhitching implements connected to these
couplings.
WARNING: The hydraulic rams of the implements be-
ing hitched to the tractor contain the same oil used in
the transmission of the tractor. This excludes any oil
contamination that could cause malfunction.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Operation
Connecting Remote Hoses
The implement couplers can be connected or discon-
nected with the tractor or implement hydraulic system
under pressure.
To connect a coupler do the following:
STEP 1
Remove the dust cap. Clean the implement male coupler
before connecting.
STEP 2
Push the implement coupler into the tractor coupler. The
implement couplers can be connected or disconnected
with the tractor or implement hydraulic system under
pressure.
IMPORTANT: All implements must be connected to
suitable couplers, which are available at your dealer's.
If an implement is not fitted with suitable couplers there
will be restricted oil flow through the couplers resulting
in inefficient machine operation, especially where high
flow rates are required.
STEP 3
To equalize the pressure in the hydraulic lines move the
control back and forth.
5
IMPORTANT: When connecting the implement hose to
the tractor, make sure the hose is long enough to permit
the tractor to turn in both directions.
IMPORTANT: Implements and other attachments can
have several large remote cylinders that need as much
as 15 litres of fluid to fill. Always check the transmission
fluid level after charging cylinders of implements and
attachments. Never operate the tractor under load if
the fluid level is low. Check oil level as described in the
Maintenance section: “Check oil level in the transmission”.
5-81
Operation

Disconnecting hoses and implements Check valve within auxiliary control

valves
STEP 1
To reduce the possibility of oil leakage when disconnect- (Fig. DA14)
ing the couplers, run the engine and set the remote valve
to float position. Each rear auxiliary control valve has a check valve (1)
within. Its operation is automatic and prevents oil leakages
STEP 2 from the outlet marked by (+).
Stop the engine and disconnect the hoses from the
couplers. 
To disconnect the coupler, just pull. Clean the coupler
dust cap and install.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT pour the reservoir contents back

into the hydraulic system. Dispose of contents in accord-
ance with local regulations. DO NOT drain the contents
on the ground or into a drain. Be responsible for the
environment.

Oil spillage collector

Each quick coupling is connected to a tray that collects
oil spilt when connecting or disconnecting the quick
couplings. When oil reaches the maximum level in the
collector, this should be emptied into suitable containers
to avoid polluting the environment.

Fig. DA14

5-82 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Operation

Power Beyond Fittings

(Fig. DA15)

Hydraulic fittings are available on the rear of the tractor

for external hydraulic valves and equipment, these have
the following functions:

1. Return to reservoir (T)

2. Output pressure, direct (P)
3. Load sensing line (LS)

Connection to the LS line, means an implement can,have

a flow available according to demand reaching the maxi-
mum amount supplied by the tractor’s pump.

NOTE: The free return (T) is directly connected to the

auxiliary hydraulic tank of the tractor.
Fig. DA15
IMPORTANT: The fluid flowing through this fitting goes
directly back to the tank. Make sure that no dirt can
contaminate the system.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 5-83

Operation

Hydraulic suspension cab

(if equipped).

The cab on hydraulic suspensions provides a high comfort

level for the operator. This reduces the tractor's jolts felt
by the operator while driving.
The system uses two hydraulic cylinders (1) mounted on
the rear couplings of the cab.
An electronic position sensor detects the cab's height to
account for any change in the weight of the driver and
passenger (if any). These changes are corrected by the
levelling valve that delivers or removes oil to or from the
system. A nitrogen accumulator is coupled to the system
and acts as a shock absorber making the ride smoother.

5-84 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Section 6
Tyres, wheels, ballasting 6

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-1

Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Page left intentionally blank.

6-2 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


TYRE INFLATION SPECIFICATIONS
For maximum tractor performance, always adjust the tyre
pressure within the minimum/maximum range, to conform
with the actual load on the tyres. Under normal conditions
use the minimum pressure rating for general drawbar
work. Use the higher pressure rating, up to the maximum,
for heavy three point hitch mounted equipment.

MAXIMUM INFLA-
TION PRESSURE
MINIMUM LOAD
EXAMPLE "B"
Example ‘A’ shows the cross section of a tyre inflated
for maximum load but with a minimum load on the tyre.
The tyre tread is not making full contact with the ground
which will give poor performance.

INFLATION
PRESSURE
ADJUSTED
TO TRACTOR
WEIGHT
EXAMPLE "A"
Example ‘B’ shows the cross section of a tyre with the
inflated pressure correctly adjusted to the load on the
tyre. The tyre tread is making full contact with the ground
which will give maximum performance.
Tyre pressure can also be adjusted as required to satisfy
the following requirements.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Tyres, wheels, ballasting
A. Severe service. Tyre pressure can be increased 38
kPa, 0.27 bar, (4 psi) more than the maximum pressure
shown in the charts, for tyres used in severe service. Se-
vere service includes the furrow tyre in regular ploughing
operations, and in hillside operations.
B. Tyres with liquid ballast. Inflate the tyres 14 kPa,
0.14 bar, (2 psi) more than the normal operating pressure
required for your operation. This will compensate for aera-
tion that occurs when the tyres are in motion.
WARNING: A tyre can explode during infla-
tion and cause serious injury or death. Never
increase air pressure beyond 241 kPa, 2.4 bar
to seat the bead on the rim. Replace a tyre if
it has a defect. Replace a wheel rim which has
cracks, wear or severe rust. Make sure that all
the air is removed from a tyre before removing
the tyre from the rim. Never use force on an
inflated or partially inflated tyre, make sure
the tyre is correctly seated before inflating.
Make sure the tyre is correctly positioned
before inflating.
See Tyre and Wheel Service on page 169 for instructions
on safe tyre inflation procedure, recommended tyre main-
tenance and tyre/rim repair. See further in this section.
IMPORTANT: During transportation, by rail or road,
tractor tyres are inflated to higher than normal operating
pressures. Before using your tractor check the air pressure
in the tyres to make sure that the air pressures are correct.
6
6-3
Tyres, wheels, ballasting

TYRE PRESSURES, LOAD CAPACITIES AND SERVICE

Tyres can be marked in two ways, as shown in the examples below:

CROSSPLY STRUCTURE: Example

12.4-24 8PR
12.4 = Nominal tyre width in inches
- = Crossply structure
24 = Internal diameter
8PR = 8 ply rating

For correct tyre pressures/load capacities for CROSSPLY tyres see your dealer or tyre manufacturer.

RADIAL - Example

16 5
B



18.4R38 710/75R34
18.4 = Nominal tyre width in inches 710 = Nominal tyre width in mm
R = Radial structure 75 = Nominal aspect ratio (ratio of sidewall height/sec-
38 = Internal diameter tion width)
142 = Load index number, 142 =2.650 kg (see R = Radial structure
chart 1) 34 = Rim diameter at the bead seat in inches
A8 = Speed code for 40 Kph, (see chart 2) 168 = Load index number, 168 = 5,600 kg (see chart 1)
A8 = Speed code for 40 Kph, (see chart 2)
165 = Load index number, 165 = 5.150 kg (see chart 1)
B = Speed code for 50 kph, (see chart 2)

The performance of a radial tyre is determined by the load index and speed code which have replaced the ply rating
found on crossply tyres.
The maximum load which can be carried by a tyre is dependant upon the Load Index quoted on the tyre wall. Charts 1
and 2, on the following page, give a guide to the maximum load a tyre can carry and a percentage (%) variation depend-
ing upon the speed code or travel speed.

6-4 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting

IMPORTANT: The charts below are only a guide. Loads may vary slightly with makes of tyres. For correct loads see your
dealer or tyre manufacturer.

Chart 1 - Load index codes and loads per tyre

TABLE OF TABLE OF TABLE OF TABLE OF TABLE OF TABLE OF

kg kg kg kg kg kg
CONTENTS CONTENTS CONTENTS CONTENTS CONTENTS CONTENTS
90 600 105 925 120 1400 135 2180 150 3350 165 5150
91 615 106 950 121 1450 136 2240 151 3450 166 5300
92 630 107 975 122 1500 137 2300 152 3550 167 5450
93 650 108 1000 123 1550 138 2360 153 3650 168 5600
94 670 109 1030 124 1600 139 2430 154 3750 169 5800
95 690 110 1060 125 1650 140 2500 155 3875 170 6000
96 710 111 1090 126 1700 141 2575 156 4000 171 6150
97 730 112 1120 127 1750 142 2650 157 4125 172 6300
98 750 113 1150 128 1800 143 2725 158 4250 173 6500
99 775 114 1180 129 1850 144 2800 159 4375 174 6700
100 800 115 1215 130 1900 145 2900 160 4500 175 6900
101 825 116 1250 131 1950 146 3000 161 4625 176 7100
102 850 117 1285 132 2000 147 3075 162 4750 177 7300
103 875 118 1320 133 2060 148 3150 163 4875 178 7500
104 900 119 1360 134 2120 149 3250 164 5000 179 7750

Chart 2 - Speed codes

SPEED CODE kph mph % VARIATION FACTOR (*) OF VARIOUS SPEEDS

A2 10 6 + 67%
A3
A4
15
20
9
12
+ 50%
+ 39%
6
A5 25 15 + 28%
A6 30 19 + 11%
A7 35 22 + 4%
A8 40 25 0
B 50 31 - 9%
D 65 40

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-5

Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Air pressure check Tyre inflation procedure

NOTE: Tractors are supplied by the manufacturer with tyres
inflated at higher pressures than recommended. The pres-
sure should be adjusted afterwards by the user according
to values given in the tables of tyre manufacturers and to
the anticipated use for the tractor.
DO NOT inflate a tyre that has had a complete loss of air.
If the tyre has lost all air pressure, have a qualified tyre
mechanic service the tyre.
WARNING: A tyre must always be inflated with-
in a restraining device (tyre inflation cage).

Check the tyre inflation pressure every 50 hours of opera-

tion or once per week.

NOTE: For best tyre life check tyre pressures as regular

intervals. Too low a pressure causes early wear of the
tyre rubber wall. Too high a pressure causes higher tread
wear or damage.

Check the condition of the tyres and wheels for wear or

damage. Keep the tyres inflated to the recommended
pressures.

NOTE: Cross ply tyres can have the pressure reduced to

increase traction in field work. For speeds below 16 km/h
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the op-
(10 mph), loads can be increased by 20%.
eration concerned.
NOTE: Never use radial ply tyres below 1.2 bar (17 psi).
Proceed as follows to inflate a tyre:
It is not necessary to reduce the pressure in radial tyres to
get better traction in the field.
- Use a safety hose of suitable length, equipped with
air nozzle, double-valve gauge and graduated scale to
IMPORTANT: Before leaving the factory the tyre pres-
measure pressure.
sures are increased. Check and adjust the pressures before
operating the tractor.
Keep at a safe distance from the tyre and warn all by-
stander on the tyre side to keep away before inflating
For tyres equipped with liquid ballast, check the air pres-
the tyre.
sure as follows:
- Inflate the tyre to the recommended air pressure. DO
STEP 1
NOT INFLATE THE TYRE MORE THAN THE RECOM-
Use an air-water gauge. The valve must be at the bottom
MENDED PRESSURE.
of the tyre to get an accurate reading.

STEP 2
Use a standard air gauge as follows:

A. The valve must be at the top of the tyre.

B. Measure the wheel diameter.

Add 0.04 bar (1/2 psi) for each 305 mm (12 inches) of rim
diameter to the standard gauge reading.

6-6 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Tyre and wheel service Tyre installation

WARNING: Do not remove, install or make To get the correct traction and cleaning action of the lugs,
repairs to tyres or rims. Take the tyre and the tyres must be installed on the wheels so the tread
rim to a tyre specialist where persons with pattern is turning as shown. DO NOT try to remove, repair
special training and special safety tools are or install a tractor tyre on a wheel.
available. If the tyre is not correctly positioned
on the rim, or if over inflated, the tyre bead
can loosen on one side and cause air to leak
at high force and can thrust the tyre in any
direction. Explosive separation of the tyre can
cause serious injury.

WARNING: DO NOT weld to wheel or rim when

a tyre is installed. Welding will cause an explo-
sive air/gas mixture that will be ignited with
high temperatures. This can happen to tyres
inflated or deflated. Removing air or breaking
bead is not adequate. The tyre MUST be com-
pletely removed from the rim prior to welding.

WARNING: Explosive separation of the tyre

and/or rim parts can cause injury or death.
When tyre service is necessary, have a quali-
fied tyre mechanic service the tyre.

Always have a qualified tyre mechanic service the tyres

and wheels on this machine.
If the tyre has lost all air pressure, take the tyre and wheel
to a tyre specialist for service. The use of correct equip-
ment and correct service/repair procedures will prevent
accidents.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-7

Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Wheel removing procedure [4.1.k]

WARNING: If a wheel has to be removed (e.g.

to remove a punched tyre), this operation
must be carried out by a suitably equipped
workshop. If the suitable equipment or such
a workshop are not available, take the tractor
to a specialised workshop, where the tractor
will be lifted with an equipment suited to its
weight and dimensions.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.
Fig. A

Procedure
- Turn off the engine, engage the parking brake and the
first gear. Engage the Park Lock (if equipped).
- To remove a front wheel apply a jack lift of suitable ca-
pacity at the front axle next to the wheel to be removed
(Fig.A).
- To remove a rear wheel, use wooden wedges on the front
axle to block completely any tractor swing. Use a jack lift
of suitable capacity in the centre of the rear axle (Fig.B).
- Loosen the nuts (bolts) fastening the wheel of about one
turn by the provided wrench.
- Before lifting the tractor, check there are no persons
next to it and do not touch the tractor again until it is
not again lowered to the ground.
- Lift the tractor a few centimetres.
- Unscrew all nuts (bolts) that fasten the wheel and remove Fig. B
the wheel
- Inflate the tyre if required. See the inflating procedure
in this chapter.
- Mount the wheel taking to exactly match the locating
pins. Screw the nuts (bolts) down again.
- Lower the tractor to the ground. Remove the jack and
fully tighten the nuts (bolts) alternating a nut (bolt) with
the opposite one.
- As soon as possible, take your tractor to the service
workshop to tighten the wheel nuts (bolts) to the pre-
scribed torque.

6-8 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting

SETTING THE FRONT WHEEL TOE-IN

 A = FRONT B = REAR

STEP 1 Adjustment
Park the machine on hard level ground, engage the park
brake and stop the engine. 4WD...................................................................... ±3 mm

STEP 2 4WD Axle with suspension................................... ±3 mm

Raise the front of the tractor so that both front wheels are (middle position)
off the ground and the steering is free to turn through the
full range LEFT AND RIGHT.
NOTE: The value for DIVERGENCE of independent front
STEP 3 suspension should be calculated with the axle fully down.
Mark the inside front of the rims at the tyre/rim interface
and at the same height as the centre of the hub.
This gives a neutral toe-in (zero) when the suspended axle
is raised in mid position of its full range.
6
STEP 4
- Adjust the length of each tie rod, by the same amount,
Measure the distance between the rim edges at the front
as required.
(dimension A in the diagram).
- Make sure the tyres do not contact the steering cylinder
STEP 5
when on full lock.
Rotate each wheel 180 degrees so that the marks are
at the rear, at the same height as the centre of the hub.
WARNING: Before carrying out servicing on
STEP 6 tractors equipped with independent front
Measure the distance between the marks at the rear suspension make sure the key switch is in the
(dimension B in the diagram). OFF position, and the axle is fully lowered to
the bottom mechanical stop. Failure to do this
STEP 7 may result in serious injury.
Subtract the front dimension (A) from the rear dimension
(B), this is the toe -in measurement.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-9

Tyres, wheels, ballasting
FRONT AXLE - STEERING STOPS
Adjusting the steering stops
The steering stops are used to give the required steering
clearance between the front tyres and tractor frame.
The stops are located on the rear of each swivel housing.
The angles you can set the stops to depends upon:
- The size of the front tyres installed.
- The wheel tread width setting.
- If front fenders are installed.
- If the tractor is equipped with a front hitch.
IMPORTANT: NEVER operate the tractor without
the steering stops installed.
IMPORTANT: When installing a front loader check the
manufacturers recommendations for axle steering and
oscillation stops.
6-10
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
STEP 1
Park the tractor on hard, level ground and apply the park
brake. Stop the engine and remove the key from the key
switch.
STEP 2
Loosen the lock nuts (1). Adjust the steering stop bolts (2)
in or out to achieve the correct steering angle.
WARNING: Before carrying out any servicing
on tractors equipped with Independent Front
Suspension make sure the key switch is in the
OFF position, the suspension ON/OFF switch
is in the OFF position and the axle is fully low-
ered to the bottom mechanical stop. Failure to
do this may result in serious injury.
IMPORTANT: After adjustment:
1. Raise the front of the tractor so the axle can be moved
into maximum oscillation.
2. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel to full lock
in both directions.
3. Check to make sure the tyres or fenders (if equipped)
DO NOT touch the tractor frame.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1
 Tyres, wheels, ballasting

ADJUSTMENT OF TRACK WIDTHS

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the op- Important Information For EEC Mem-
eration concerned.
ber States
This tractor is manufactured with rear lamps which meet
WARNING: When servicing or making adjust-
all lighting regulations for travelling on the public road.
ments to the tractor with one set of wheels
supported on a stand, NEVER attempt to ro-
According to the law in force, when travelling on public
tate the wheel either by hand or by starting
roads the distance between the outmost edge of the
the engine. This could propel the tractor of
tractor and the lens of the rear stop lights must be not
the stands. Either support all wheels off the
greater than 400 mm - dimension A.
ground or disconnect the front axle drive
shaft.

IMPORTANT: The steering stops on the axle must be

installed in the correct position for the tread width and
tyre size being used.

WARNING: When you lift up the tractor to

adjust the wheel tracks, follow the directions
for lifting in the Safety Notes section.

WARNING: Maximum attention must be used

when dismounting the front or rear wheels:
because of their weight, a suitable hoist must
be used to remove and handle the wheels.
If the track width is set on values greater than the factory
setting, it could be required that the rear lights are repo-
sitioned or that additional lights are installed to comply
IMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back
with the law in force.
again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by
means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:
- Overall widths above 3000 mm (118 in) WILL REQUIRE
- First check after 10 work hours.
local authorization for use on the highway. An overall
- Second check after 50 work hours.
- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.
width of 2550 mm to 2550÷3000 mm (8 to 10 feet)
MAY REQUIRE local authorization for use on the 6
highway, check before operation.
See the following pages for the driving torques of the front
and rear wheel bolts.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-11

Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Table 6-1 - 4WD front track width and rear track width adjustment

Wheel disc pointing inwards Wheel disc pointing outwards

1A 1B

2A 2B

3A 3B

4A 4B

Key to the front and rear track width tables:

P 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 1B, 2B, 3B, 4B = Available assembly positions
Front interflange: 1,940 mm.; Rear interflange: 1,890 mm.
C.A: Front track; L.F.T.A.: All-out front width; L.I.A.: Internal front width
C.P: Rear track; L.F.T.P: All-out rear width; L.I.P.: Internal rear width

Rear track widths

Reference track widths indicated by boldface characters.
All available tracks are shown here.

Front track widths

Reference track widths indicated by boldface care.
Front tracks should be selected according to alignment with rear wheels. Also check that there are no interferences
between wheels and tractor body when steering. Adjust the max. steering angle in case of interference.

6-12 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Model X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460 - Rigid axle

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2329 1479 1860 2383 1337
420/70 R28 520/70 R38 2A 1800 2225 1375 1750 2273 1227
Rims 3A 1700 2125 1275 1656 2179 1133
Front Rear 4A 1596 2021 1171 - - -
W12 x 28 DWW15L x 38 1B 1996 2421 1571 1946 2469 1423
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2525 1675 2056 2579 1533
Front Rear 3B 2200 2625 1775 2150 2673 1627
425 523 4B 2304 2729 1879 2260 2783 1737

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2353 1455 1860 2403 1317
420/85 R28 (16.9 R28) 520/85 R38 (20.8 R38) 2A 1800 2249 1351 1750 2293 1027
Rims 3A 1700 2149 1251 1656 2199 1113
Front Rear 4A 1596 2045 1147 - - -
W15L x 28 DWW18L x 38 1B 1996 2445 1547 1946 2489 1403
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2549 1651 2056 2599 1513
Front Rear 3B 2200 2649 1751 2150 2693 1607
449 543 4B 2304 2753 1855 2260 2803 1717

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2390 1418 1860 2447 1273
480/70 R28 580/70 R38 2A 1800 2286 1314 1750 2337 1163 6
Rims 3A 1700 2186 1214 - - -
Front Rear 4A 1596 2082 1110 - - -
W15L x 28 DWW18L x 38 1B 1996 2482 1510 1946 2533 1359
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2586 1614 2056 2643 1469
Front Rear 3B 2200 2686 1714 2150 2737 1563
486 587 4B 2304 2790 1818 2260 2847 1673

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2389 1425 1860 2457 1263
480/65 R28 600/65 R38 2A 1800 2279 1321 1750 2347 1153
Rims 3A 1700 2179 1221 - - -
Front Rear 4A 1596 2075 1117 - - -
W15L x 28 DWW18L x 38 1B 1996 2475 1517 1946 2543 1349
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2579 1621 2056 2653 1459
Front Rear 3B 2200 2679 1721 2150 2747 1553
479 597 4B 2304 2783 1825 2260 2857 1663
NOTE: Consult the “Key to the front and rear track width tables” on page 6-12 in order to interpret the table correctly and
find out which track widths are available.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-13

Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2435 1373 1850 2499 1201
540/65 R28 650/65 R38 2A 1800 2331 1269 1740 2389 1091
Rims 3A 1700 2231 1169 - - -
Front Rear 4A 1596 2127 1065 - - -
W15L x 28 DWW20B x 38 1B 1996 2527 1465 1956 2605 1307
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2631 1569 2060 2709 1411
Front Rear 3B 2200 2731 1669 2140 2789 1491
531 649 4B 2304 2835 1773 2250 2899 1601

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2265 1543 1860 2308 1412
340/85 R28 (13.6 R28) 420/85 R38 (16.9 R38) 2A 1800 2161 1439 1750 2198 1302
Rims 3A 1700 2061 1339 1656 2104 1208
Front Rear 4A 1596 1957 1235 1546 1994 1098
W12 x 28 DWW15L x 38 1B 1996 2357 1635 1946 2394 1498
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2461 1739 2056 2504 1608
Front Rear 3B 2200 2561 1839 2150 2598 1702
361 448 4B 2304 2665 1943 2260 2708 1812

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2285 1523 1860 2308 1412
380/70 R28 420/85 R38 (16.9 R38) 2A 1800 2181 1419 1750 2198 1302
Rims 3A 1700 2081 1319 1656 2104 1208
Front Rear 4A 1596 1977 1215 1546 1994 1098
W12 x 28 DWW15L x 38 1B 1996 2377 1615 1946 2394 1498
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2481 1719 2056 2504 1608
Front Rear 3B 2200 2581 1819 2150 2598 1702
381 448 4B 2304 2685 1923 2260 2708 1812

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2265 1543 1860 2344 1376
340/85 R28 (13.6 R28) 480/70 R38 2A 1800 2161 1439 1750 2234 1266
Rims 3A 1700 2061 1339 1656 2140 1172
Front Rear 4A 1596 1957 1235 - - -
W12 x 28 DWW15L x 38 1B 1996 2357 1635 1946 2430 1462
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2461 1739 2056 2540 1572
Front Rear 3B 2200 2561 1839 2150 2634 1666
361 484 4B 2304 2665 1943 2260 2744 1776

NOTE: Consult the “Key to the front and rear track width tables” on page 6-12 in order to interpret the table correctly and
find out which track widths are available.

6-14 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2285 1523 1860 2344 1376
380/70 R28 480/70 R38 2A 1800 2181 1419 1750 2234 1266
Rims 3A 1700 2081 1319 1656 2140 1172
Front Rear 4A 1596 1977 1215 - - -
W12 x 28 DWW15L x 38 1B 1996 2377 1615 1946 2430 1462
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2481 1719 2056 2540 1572
Front Rear 3B 2200 2581 1819 2150 2634 1666
381 484 4B 2304 2685 1923 2260 2744 1776

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2299 1509 1860 2344 1376
380/85 R28 (14.9 R28) 480/70 R38 2A 1800 2195 1405 1750 2234 1266
Rims 3A 1700 2095 1305 1656 2140 1172
Front Rear 4A 1596 1991 1201 - - -
W12 x 28 DWW15L x 38 1B 1996 2391 1601 1946 2430 1462
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2495 1705 2056 2540 1572
Front Rear 3B 2200 2595 1805 2150 2634 1666
395 484 4B 2304 2699 1909 2260 2744 1776

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2299 1509 - - -
380/85 R28 (14.9 R28) 460/85 R38 (18.4 R38) 2A 1800 2195 1405 - - -
Rims 3A 1700 2095 1305 - - - 6
Front Rear 4A 1596 1991 1201 - - -
W12 x 28 DWW15L x 38 1B 1996 2391 1601 - - -
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2495 1705 - - -
Front Rear 3B 2200 2595 1805 - - -
395 485 4B 2304 2699 1909 - - -

NOTE: Consult the “Key to the front and rear track width tables” on page 6-12 in order to interpret the table correctly and
find out which track widths are available.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-15

Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2329 1479 - - -
420/70 R28 460/85 R38 (18.4 R38) 2A 1800 2225 1375 - - -
Rims 3A 1700 2125 1275 - - -
Front Rear 4A 1596 2021 1171 - - -
W12 x 28 DWW15L x 38 1B 1996 2421 1571 - - -
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2525 1675 - - -
Front Rear 3B 2200 2625 1775 - - -
425 485 4B 2304 2729 1879 - - -

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2329 1479 - - -
420/70 R28 520/70 R38 2A 1800 2225 1375 - - -
Rims 3A 1700 2125 1275 - - -
Front Rear 4A 1596 2021 1171 - - -
W12 x 28 DWW15L x 38 1B 1996 2421 1571 - - -
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2525 1675 - - -
Front Rear 3B 2200 2625 1775 - - -
425 523 4B 2304 2729 1879 - - -

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2353 1455 - - -
420/85 R28 (16.9 R28) 520/85 R38 (20.8 R38) 2A 1800 2249 1351 - - -
Rims 3A 1700 2149 1251 - - -
Front Rear 4A 1596 2045 1147 - - -
W15L x 28 DWW18L x 38 1B 1996 2445 1547 - - -
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2549 1651 - - -
Front Rear 3B 2200 2649 1751 - - -
449 543 4B 2304 2753 1855 - - -

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1904 2390 1418 - - -
420/70 R28 520/85 R38 (20.8 R38) 2A 1800 2286 1314 - - -
Rims 3A 1700 2186 1214 - - -
Front Rear 4A 1596 2082 1110 - - -
W15L x 28 DWW18L x 38 1B 1996 2482 1510 - - -
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B 2100 2586 1614 - - -
Front Rear 3B 2200 2686 1714 - - -
486 543 4B 2304 2790 1818 - - -

NOTE: Consult the “Key to the front and rear track width tables” on page 6-12 in order to interpret the table correctly and
find out which track widths are available.

6-16 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Model X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460 - Suspended axle

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 1960 2491 1429 2020 2669 1371
540/65 R28 650/65 R38 2A 1936 2467 1405 1784 2433 1135
Rims 3A - - - - - -
Front Rear 4A - - - - - -
W16 x 28 DWW20B x 38 1B - - - - - -
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B - - - - - -
Front Rear 3B - - - - - -
531 649 4B - - - - - -

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 2004 2453 1555 1980 2523 1437
420/85 R28 (16.90 R28) 520/85 R38 (20.8 R38) 2A 1900 2349 1451 1824 2367 1281
Rims 3A - - - - - -
Front Rear 4A - - - - - -
W15L x 28 DWW18L x 38 1B - - - - - -
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B - - - - - -
Front Rear 3B - - - - - -
449 543 4B - - - - - -

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 2004 2490 1518 1980 2523 1437
480/70 R28 520/85 R38 (20.8 R38) 2A 1900 2386 1414 1824 2367 1281 6
Rims 3A - - - - - -
Front Rear 4A - - - - - -
W15L x 28 DWW18L x 38 1B - - - - - -
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B - - - - - -
Front Rear 3B - - - - - -
486 543 4B - - - - - -

Tyres P C.A. L.F.T.A. L.I.A. C.P. L.F.T.P. L.I.P.

Front Rear 1A 2004 2483 1525 1980 2577 1383
480/65 R28 600/65 R38 2A 1900 2379 1421 1824 2421 1227
Rims 3A - - - - - -
Front Rear 4A - - - - - -
W15L x 28 DWW18L x 38 1B - - - - - -
Tyre section width (middle value) in mm 2B - - - - - -
Front Rear 3B - - - - - -
479 597 4B - - - - - -
NOTE: Consult the “Key to the front and rear track width tables” on page 6-12 in order to interpret the table correctly and
find out which track widths are available.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-17

Tyres, wheels, ballasting

FRONT WHEEL BOLT TORQUES

IMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back Ten stud wheel hub arrangement
again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by
means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:
- First check after 10 work hours.
- Second check after 50 work hours. 1
- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Eight stud wheel hub arrangement

2
Tighten the centre disc to rim nuts (1) to a torque of 280
to 340 Nm (206 to 229 ft lb) in the numbered sequence
shown. The center disc must fit flush against the rim lugs
when assembled.
Tighten the centre disc to axle hub nuts (2) to a torque of
300 to 350 Nm (221 to 258 ft lb) for NEW nuts and 400 to
450 Nm (295 to 332 ft lb) for USED nuts in the numbered
sequence shown.

Tighten the centre disc to rim nuts (1) to a torque of 280

to 340 Nm (206 to 229 ft lb) as shown by the figure. The
center disc must fit flush against the rim lugs when as-
sembled.
Tighten the centre disc to axle hub nuts (2) to a torque of
300 to 350 Nm (221 to 258 ft lb) for NEW nuts and 400 to
450 Nm (295 to 332 ft lb) for USED nuts in the numbered
sequence shown.

6-18 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting

REAR WHEEL BOLT TORQUES

IMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back
again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by
means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:
- First check after 10 work hours.
- Second check after 50 work hours.
- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT lubricate the threads.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Flanged axle


TIGHTENING SEQUENCES

1. Central disc-rim nuts

–– Torque nuts on central disc-rim (1) at 280÷340 Nm fol-
6
lowing the sequence shown.

2. Central disc-axle flange nuts

–– Torque nuts on central disc-axle flange (2) at 485-550
Nm following the sequence shown.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-19

Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Tyres
The following is a list of possible tyre types and front/rear combinations: consult your dealer for any further information
concerning possible combinations.

Front to rear tyre size combinations

WARNING: Use bolted rims only for speeds under 50 Kph.

Front Tyres Rear tyres Models

Tyre Rim Tyre Rim X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460

420/70 R28 W12 x 28 520/70 R38 DWW15L x 38 •

420/85 R28 W16L x 28 520/85 R38 DWW18L x 38 •
480/70 R28 W16L x 28 580/70 R38 DWW18L x 38 •
480/65 R28 W16L x 28 600/65 R38 DWW18L x 38 •
540/65 R28 W16L x 28 650/65 R38 DWW20B x 38 •
340/85 R28 W12 x 28 420/85 R38 DWW15L x 38 •
380/70 R28 W12 x 28 420/85 R38 DWW15L x 38 •
340/85 R28 W12 x 28 480/70 R38 DWW15L x 38 •
380/70 R28 W12 x 28 480/70 R38 DWW15L x 38 •
380/85 R28 W12 x 28 480/70 R38 DWW15L x 38 •
NOTE: Some of the tyre combinations considered here as acceptable MIGHT not be suited to all tractor models. To know
the tyre combinations not listed here or for further information, see your dealer.

6-20 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Front to rear tyre size combinations with welded rims

WARNING: Welded rims are mandatory for speeds over 50 Kph.

Front Tyres Rear tyres Models

Tyre Welded rim Tyre Welded rim X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460
420/85R28 W15L x 28 520/85R38 DWW18L x 38 •
480/70R28 W15L x 28 520/85R38 DWW18L x 38 •
480/65R28 W15L x 28 600/65R38 DWW18L x 38 •
540/65R28 W16L x 28 650/65R38 DW1W20B x 38 •

NOTE: Some of the tyre combinations considered here as acceptable MIGHT not be suited to all tractor models. To know
the tyre combinations not listed here or for further information, see your dealer.

Front to rear tyre size combinations with rear dual wheels

WARNING: DO NOT use rear dual wheels for speeds of equal to or over 50 Kph.

Front Tyres Rear tyres Models

Tyre Welded rim Tyre Welded rim X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460
380/85R28 W12 x 28 460/85R38 DWW15L x 38 •
420/70R28 W12 x 28 460/85R38 DWW15L x 38 •
420/70R28 W12 x 28 520/70R38 DWW15L x 38 •
420/85R28 W16L x 28 520/85R38 DWW18L x 38 •
480/70R28 W16L x 28 520/85R38 DWW18L x 38 •

NOTE: Some of the tyre combinations considered here as acceptable MIGHT not be suited to all tractor models. To know 6
the tyre combinations not listed here or for further information, see your dealer.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-21

Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Bar axle adjustment Use the following procedure to change the tread setting:

STEP 1
Park the machine on hard level ground, engage the park
brake and stop the engine.

STEP 2
Clean any paint, dirt or rust from the axle shafts area where
the hubs are to be located.

STEP 3
Loosen the tapered bushing bolts.

STEP 4
To prevent accidental tractor movement if the spring
clutch engages when a rear wheel is rotated; raise the
front wheels off the ground and install supports under
the axle.

MAXIMUM TRACK WIDTH STEP 5

The maximum track width is obtained with the hubs at Lift the rear of the tractor until the rear tyres are just clear
the end of the axle shafts and the wheel rims and discs of the ground. Install supports under the axle.
outwards.
STEP 6

Remove the bolts (1) from the tapered bushing.

MINIMUM TRACK WIDTH
The minimum track width is obtained with the hubs at the
beginning of the axle shafts, and the wheel rims and discs
inwards. Position the hubs on the axle shafts so that there
is a gap of at least 50 mm between the tyres are the rear
mudguard components.
Clean the threads of the three threaded holes (2) in the
tapered bushing and apply oil. Install three of the bolts
removed and install into the threaded holes and use as a
jack to separate the hub and bushing. Tighten the bolts
evenly to separate the wheel and hub from the tapered
bushing.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
STEP 7
Install a wedge into the bushing slot just enough so that
the bushing can be moved on the shaft to the new tread
position.

6-22 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting

STEP 8 Wheel offset direction change

Apply a suitable anti-seize compound to the hub, bushing, If you need to change the direction of the wheel offset (in
bolt threads and washers. or out), remove the tire and wheel from one side of the
tractor and mount on the other side of tractor. The tire
STEP 9 pattern must face the same direction.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Remove the 3 bolts used as jacking bolts, install the

bolts (1) and tighten evenly in 50 Nm intervals, up to the
prescribed torque in the sequence shown.

Apply a suitable anti-seize compound to the exposed

axle shafts.

1. TAPERED BUSHING BOLT 4. HUB BODY

2. BUSHING TO AXLE KEY 5. WHEEL RIM
3. TAPERED BUSHING 6. WHEEL MOUNTING BOLT

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-23

Tyres, wheels, ballasting

FRONT FENDERS
All tractor models are equipped with wholly adjustable Horizontal adjustment
front fenders to ensure the tyre is covered at all tread
widths. Loosen the 2 fender bracket mounting bolts (3) on the end
of the mudguard bracket and slide the fender bracket left
The front fenders provide greater safety and keep the trac- or right until the fender is central over the tyre. Tighten
tor cleaner, therefore improving operation and durability. the mounting bolts.

To provide the necessary clearance between the fender

and other tractor components, the fender mounting posi-
tion and the total amount of swivel must be adjusted for
the tread width and tyre size being used.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Vertical adjustment
Loosen the support brace mounting bolts (1) and slide
the support brace (2) up or down to the correct position.
Tighten the mounting bolts to a torque of about 50 Nm
(37 Ib ft).

Swivel limit adjustment (if equipped)

Loosen the nut (1) and adjust the retainer rod to have the
right amount of mudguard rotation. The retainer rod must
hit the support plate (3) mounted on the axle housing.
Then tighten the lock nut (1).

NOTE: The distance between tyre and support brace must

be 50-100 mm (2 to 4 in).

NOTE: The images show, only as an example, an installed

mudguard in the version with suspended axle. The adjust-
ments are the same for the installation with a rigid axle.

6-24 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


TRACTOR BALLAST [4.2.h]
Loads matched to tractor Tractor weight distribution
The life of the tractor will be increased by operating in the
highest possible gear without labouring the engine. Match
the implement to the tractor to get the best forward speed.
Operating at 8 Kph (5 mph) or above is best for long life of
main components. Too much ballast and excessive loads
decrease tyre life, wastes fuel and often reduces output.
• The best traction occurs when wheel slip is between
12 - 16%.
• Remove the ballast when not needed for lighter loads.
• Pull lighter loads at a faster speed to do more work and
increase efficiency. Do not overweight the tractor to
pull very heavy loads.
Operating a tractor with too much weight can cause:
A. A decrease in horsepower available at the implement
and then, a decrease in amount of field worked.
B. An increase in amount of fuel used.
C. A decrease in tyre life.
D. The soil to be compacted.
E. Too much force on the power train which will decrease
the life of the power train and cause high operating cost.
The most important item in field operations is the amount
of horsepower available at the hitch or drawbar. Power
needed to move a tractor that has too much weight will
decrease the power that is available to pull the implement.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Tyres, wheels, ballasting
The optimum static weight distribution for this size trac-
tor is:
4WD
% FORECARRIAGE % REARCARRIAGE
40% 60%
The weight distribution ratios are based upon the trac-
tor (including ballast) with mounted equipment in the
lowered position.
The correct static weight distribution and the correct
amount of wheel slip will give maximum tractive efficiency,
maximum productivity and extended service life for the
tractor components.
The amount and type of front and rear mounted equipment
being used will affect the weight distribution to the front
and rear tyres. Add or remove ballast as necessary, to
your fully equipped tractor, to achieve the recommended
static weight distribution.
IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with full equipment
and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum
allowed operating weight. See Maximum permitted
operating weights in the Technical specifications section
of this manual. Observe tyre capacities and any possible
legal limitations.
IMPORTANT: Whatever the state of loading of the tractor,
6
the weight transmitted to the road by the wheels of the
front axle must not be less than 20 percent of the unladen
weight of the tractor.
6-25
Tyres, wheels, ballasting
Front end weights, rear wheel weights and liquid ballast
in the tyres can be used to ballast your tractor. Inadequate
traction and excessive wheel slip can waste up to thirty
percent of tractor horsepower.
IDEAL WHEEL SLIP 12÷16%
Do not try to reduce wheel slippage to zero. Stay within
the a 12÷16% slip.
If you add weight to the tractor to reduce wheel slip to less
than 12%, the added weight will consume more engine
power due to the increased rolling resistance caused by
the tyres sinking into the soil.
Add ballast weight only as necessary to maintain the
correct tractor weight distribution and the recommended
amount of wheel slip.
Wasted energy, increased fuel consumption, decreased
tyre life and loss of productivity are all principle ingredients
that can increase operating cost.
6-26
Determine the amount of wheel slip as follows:
A. With true ground speed sensor
B. Without true ground speed sensor
A. True ground speed sensor (if equipped)
The sensor will accurately determine the true ground
speed of the tractor.
Precise application of chemicals and planting inputs can
be achieved with the Ground Speed Sensor. This will re-
duce your input costs for planting, fertilizing and chemical
application for weed and pest control.
You can also use the Ground Speed Sensor to determine
the actual percentage of rear wheel slip under all operat-
ing conditions. This will allow you to maintain the recom-
mended amount of wheel slip for maximum productivity
and operating efficiency.
WARNING: Do not look directly into the face
of the sensor. Micro-wave signals emitted by
the sensor can cause eye damage.
IMPORTANT: Keep the face of the sensor clean. Scrape
mud off with a plastic scraper. DO NOT use a metal scraper.
Wash the face of the sensor with soap and water or steam
clean. DO NOT disconnect the harness while cleaning.
IMPORTANT: To read wheel slip on the digital instru-
ment cluster make sure the slip limit control is ON. See
the Instruments and programming section in this manual
for more details.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1
 Tyres, wheels, ballasting
B. Measuring wheel slip without a true STEP 7
ground speed sensor Find the percent of slip as follows:

If your tractor is not equipped with a True Ground Speed
Sensor, measure the amount of wheel slip you will need
the assistance of a second person:
STEP 1
Put a reference mark on the side of the tractor rear tyre.
STEP 2
Operate the tractor with the implement IN THE GROUND.
Revolutions of wheel
with implement raised. Slip (%)
9-1/2............................................................................ 5
9................................................................................ 10
8-1/2.......................................................................... 15
8................................................................................ 20
7-1/2.......................................................................... 25
7................................................................................ 30

STEP 3
While the tractor is moving put a marker on the ground,
outside the implement width, where the reference mark
on the tyre comes down to the ground.
STEP 4
Continue to walk along with the tractor and count ten
wheel revolutions. Put a second marker on the ground
outside the implement width, where the reference mark
on the tyre comes down to the ground for the TENTH time.
NOTE: When you have too much ballast installed on the
tractor, you will see the clear shape of the tyre tread in
the ground which is an indication of no slippage. With too
little ballast, the tyre tread marks will not show because
of the tyre slippage.
1 2 3

STEP 5
Lift the implement out of the ground. Put the tractor in
position with the rear tyre next to the first ground marker
and put a new reference mark on the rear tyre aligned
with the first ground marker.

STEP 6
Operate the tractor, with the implement RAISED, from
the first ground marker to the second ground marker. 1 - WITHOUT SLIPPAGE: TOO MUCH BALLAST
Count the number of wheel revolutions between the two
ground markers. 2 - SLIP: CORRECT BALLAST

3 - TOO MUCH SLIP: TOO LITTLE BALLAST 6

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-27

Tyres, wheels, ballasting
Front Ballast Weights
Front end weights can be mounted on the front of the
tractor with a weight frame. The weights and weight frame
are available from your Dealer.

The standard frame (if installed) is equipped with up to 12

weights, each weighing 45 kgs = 540 kgs.
The extended frame is equipped with up to 16 weights,
each weighing 45 kgs = 720 kgs.

Use front end weights as needed to provide effective

steering control and front end stability and to achieve
maximum operating efficiency and tractor field perform-
ance.

IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with full equipment

and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum
allowed operating weight. See Maximum permitted
operating weights in the Technical specifications section
of this manual. Observe tyre capacities and any possible
legal limitations.

WARNING: Due to the great weight of each

ballast, manual lifting of front and rear ballast
weights could be dangerous for your safety.

Always lift the front and rear ballast by means

of a hook or similar device.

Always use suitable personal safety devices

(safety gloves and shoes) when applying or
removing ballast.

Front end weights (if equipped)

6-28 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting
Assembly of front ballast STEP 7

WARNING: Due to the great weight of each

ballast, manual lifting of front and rear ballast
weights could be dangerous for your safety.

Always lift the front and rear ballast by means

of a hook or similar device.

Always use suitable personal safety devices

(safety gloves and shoes) when applying or
removing ballast.

STEP 1
Park the tractor on hard level ground. STOP the engine
and apply the park brake. Remove the key.

STEP 2
Hook one weight (1) over the top lip of the weight frame
(2) towards its outer edge. Slide the weight towards the
centre of the frame until it is against tab (A) on the weight
frame. The bottom of the weight will interlock behind the
tab at the centre of the weight frame. A bracket is available that can be mounted on the front of
the weights with bolts. Before mounting a bracket (3), let
STEP 3 the fixing bas (8) through the front weights.
Repeat STEP 2 and install the second weight onto the Assemble the washer (9) and the nut (10). Tighten the nut.
opposite side.
NOTE: The retainer must be positioned so as to hold the
STEP 4 flat headed bolts fixed.
Continue to install weights equally to each side until the
required weight pack is installed. The tab on each weight WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow
will interlock into the previous installed weight. hook.

IMPORTANT:The total tractor weight with full equipment

and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum
allowed operating weight. Check tyre capacities and any
possible legal limitations.
6
STEP 5
Once the correct quantity of weight is installed, mount
both ends (a) and check they do match both outer weights.

STEP 6
Push the stud (5) into the holes of the ballast unit. Install
the washer (6) and nut (7) to the opposite end of the stud.
Tighten the nut.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-29

Tyres, wheels, ballasting
Rear wheel weights

WARNING: Due to the great weight of each

ballast, manual lifting of front and rear ballast
weights could be dangerous for your safety.

Always lift the front and rear ballast by means

of a hook or similar device.

Always use suitable personal safety devices

(safety gloves and shoes) when applying or
removing ballast.

Rear wheel weights, 85 kg each, are available from your

Dealer.

Use the wheel weights as needed to provide safe and

efficient tractor operation. Do not add more weight to the
rear wheels of your tractor than is needed to achieve the
correct tractor static weight distribution and the correct
amount of wheel slip.
A maximum of 3 weights per wheel can be used. The 3
weights can be installed on the outside of the wheels
as shown.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use rear wheel weights when
operating the tractor at travel speeds greater than 50 km/h.
One, two or three cast iron rings can be applied to each
wheel, each weighing 85 kg. The first is fixed straight on
to the wheel, while the second is fixed to the first ring
and the third to the second.
- Total of two rings: weight 170 kgs
- Total of four rings: weight 340 kgs
- Total of six rings: weight 510 kgs
See the following page for installation instructions.

IMPORTANT: Wheel weights CAN NOT be used when

dual wheels are installed. Liquid weight can only be
added to the inner wheel and front end weights can also
be installed.

IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with full equipment

and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum
allowed operating weight. See Maximum permitted
operating weights in the Technical specifications section
of this manual. Observe tyre capacities and any possible
legal limitations.

IMPORTANT:
- Do not ballast the tractor over its rated carrying weight.
- When using the tractor for light work, transport and on-
road towing, remove the ballast to avoid unnecessary
strain on the mechanical components.
- With semi-mounted and fully mounted implements
(which inevitably increase the load on the rear axle
of the tractor), ballast must only be used when strictly
necessary. There is no point in increasing grip beyond
the level necessary for efficient work as this will reduce
tyre life.
- Carefully check the tyre inflation pressure since this will
make the tyre last longer and ensure a more regular
wear.
- The softer the soil, the lower tyre inflation must be, while
the tyre should be inflated to a greater extent as the soil
becomes more compact.

6-30 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


Installing rear wheel weights
STEP 1
Park the tractor on hard level ground. STOP the engine
and apply the park brake. Remove the key.
Tyres, wheels, ballasting
STEP 3 - TWO WEIGHT KIT
Then secure the second weight using three spacers (3)
screwed on the spacers fixing the first weight. Secure
with three washers (4) and nuts (5).

STEP 2 - 1 WEIGHT KIT NOTE: Torque all nuts to 200÷220 Nm

Secure the first weight (1) to the rim (6) using three screws
(2) and three spacer bolts (3). Secure with three washers
(4) and nuts (5).

2 x set of weights 1 x set of weights

Weights/wheel 1 x SET 2 x SET

1. Weight 85 kg 1 2
2. Screw 3 3 6
3. Spacer 3 6
4. Washer 3 3
5. Nut 3 3
6. Wheel rim - -

WARNING: Due to the great weight of each ballast, manual lifting of front
and rear ballast weights could be dangerous for your safety.

Always lift the front and rear ballast by means of a hook or similar device.

Always use suitable personal safety devices (safety gloves and shoes)
when applying or removing ballast.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-31

Tyres, wheels, ballasting
Tyre liquid ballast IMPORTANT: DO NOT use liquid ballast while driving
on roads.
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all equipment
tion concerned.
and ballast weight must never be more than the maximum
recommend operating weight. See Maximum permitted
WARNING: Ballasting with water and calcium chlo-
operating weights in the Technical specifications section
ride antifreeze solution can increase corrosion of the
of this manual. Observe tyre capacities and any possible
components that come into contact with the mixture.
legal limitations.
Use tyre liquid ballast as needed to provide safe and ef-
ficient tractor operation. See Tractor weight distribution in
the previous pages in this section for more recommenda-
tions. The chart shows the liquid weight each tyre will hold
when 75 percent filled (filled to valve level), with water or
calcium chloride and water solution.

Calcium chloride (CaCl2) keeps the water from freezing.

Water will start to freeze at 0°C.

When liquid ballast is used, inflate the tyres 0.14 bar (2 PSI)
more than the recommended pressure. This will compen-
sate for aeration that occurs when the tyre is in motion.

When dual wheels are installed, use liquid ballast in the

inside tyres only.

Liquid ballast for tyres, in litres and kilograms

Water only Protection at -15 °C Protection at -35 °C Protection at -50 °C

Tyre Size Total Total Total
Litres Weight Litres CaCl2 Litres CaCl2 Litres CaCl2
weight weight weight
water kg water kg water kg water kg
kg kg kg
18.4R34 361 361 337 61 398 310 130 440 293 176 469
16.9R38 317 317 296 53 349 272 114 386 257 154 411
18.4R38 390 390 364 66 430 335 140 475 317 190 507
20.8R38 509 509 475 85 560 436 183 619 413 248 661
460/85R38 390 390 364 66 430 335 140 475 317 190 507
480/70R38 337 337 314 57 371 289 121 410 273 164 437
520/85R38 509 509 475 85 560 436 183 619 413 248 661
20.8R42 633 633 591 106 697 543 228 771 514 308 822
520/85R42 633 633 591 106 697 543 228 771 514 308 822
14.9R46 303 303 - - - 257 108 365 246 147 393
18.4R46 325 325 - - - 280 117 397 265 159 423
380/85R46 303 303 - - - 257 108 365 246 147 393
460/85R46 325 325 - - - 280 117 397 265 159 423

NOTE: For any tyres not listed in the above chart, refer to the tyre manufacturers specifications or alternatively see your
dealer.

NOTE: This table contains only indicative data. The operator should ballast wheels with water on the base of the tables
issued by the tyre manufacturer and according to the use anticipated for the tractor.

6-32 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Tyres, wheels, ballasting
Filling procedure

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

STEP 1 (Mixing the solution)

WARNING: When you prepare a solution of

calcium chloride to ballast the tyres, NEVER
EVER pour the water on to the calcium chlo-
ride since this could lead to a violent reaction.
This danger can be avoided by adding the
calcium chloride very slowly to the water and
stirring until it has completely dissolved.

Add the correct amount of calcium chloride (CaCl2) into

the correct amount of water. See previous charts for the
required degree of protection from freezing.

STEP 2
Raise one side of the tractor and turn the wheel so that
the valve is at the top, see illustration opposite.

STEP 3
Remove the valve core and connect the hand pump.
1. Air
STEP 4
2. Water entering tyre
Measure the amount of solution added to the tyre and
3. Water supply
use the figures in the previous charts to calculate the
4. Air supply
weight added.
5. Air vent
STEP 5
When sufficient weight has been added, remove the
pump. Install the valve core. Inflate the tyres to the cor-
rect pressure.

NOTE: When liquid ballast is used, inflate the tyres 0.14

6
bar (2 PSI) more than the recommended pressure. This
will compensate for aeration that occurs when the tyre
is in motion.

How to deflate the tyres

–– Jack up the tyre to be drained and set it with its valve
pointing downwards.
–– Unscrew the mobile union of the valve and allow the
water to drain from the tyre.
–– Screw the required union on the valve seat.
–– Introduce air at a pressure through the union (4).
–– When all water is drained, remove the union and replace
it with the valve retainer, then inflate the tyre to the
prescribed pressure.

NOTE: Never use ballasting systems differing from the

ones indicated above.

WARNING: Ballasting with water and calcium chlo-

ride antifreeze solution can increase corrosion of the
components that come into contact with the mixture.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 6-33

Tyres, wheels, ballasting

Page left intentionally blank.

6-34 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance

Section 7
Maintenance 7

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: service operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking brake
are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-1

Maintenance

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE TABLE

The numbers in the second column refer to the operations described in the following pages, listed in chronological order.

Check efficiency
Replacement
Top up level
Work hours

Lubrication
Cleaning
Step N°

Adjust
Maintenance operations

1 Nuts of front and rear wheels

2 Fuel level in the tank
3 Level in the AdBlue™ reservoir or DEF
4 Engine oil level
Every 10
hours 5 Oil level in transmission
(or daily)
6 Coolant recovery reservoir level
7 Cab suspension (if equipped)
8 Window washer water level
9 Front PTO oil level
10 Air pressure in tyres
11 Suspended front axle grease points
Every 50 12 Rigid front axle grease points
hours service
(or weekly) 13 Fuel water trap - fuel filter (6)
14 Radiator and coolers
15 Cab air recirculation filter

Every 100 16 Rear three point linkage

hours service
(or every 2
17 Front three point linkage
weeks) 18 Cab air intake filter
19 Trailer hitch, moving parts (2)
20 Front axle differential and planetary oil (5)
Drawbar bolt torques
21
Every 250 Tow hook bolt torques
hours service
(or monthly) Compressor belt
22
Fan and alternator belt
23 Parking brake operation
24 Battery

7-2 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance

Check efficiency
Replacement
Top up level
Work hours

Lubrication
Cleaning
Step N°

Adjust
Maintenance operations

25 Engine oil and oil filter

26 Engine fuel filters
27 Engine fuel/water separator filter element
Every 500 28 Engine breather filter element (blow-by)
hours service
(or six 29 Front PTO oil (if equipped)
monthly) Auto hitch locking latches & lift rod adjustment (2) (if equipped, de-
30
pending on market)
Replacement of transmission hydraulic filters (5)
31
Transmission oil replacement (5)
32 Operator detector function
Engine air intake system
33 Engine main air filter (2) (4)

Engine secondary air filter

Transmission oil replacement
34 Replacement of transmission hydraulic filters (5)
Transmission/hydraulic system breather
35 Front axle differential and final drives oil (5)
Every 1000
hours 36 Engine valve clearances
(or once in a
year) 37 Fuel injectors
38 Starter motor and alternator
39 Dehidrator filter of trailer air brakes (if equipped) 7
Cab air intake filter (3)
40
Grease door locks and hinges
41 Air conditioning compressor
Anti-freeze in engine cooling system
42
(yearly before winter)
Every
1500 hours
43 Oil replacement in the rear axle final drives
Every
2000 hours
44 Engine coolant change
(or every 2
years) 45 Fuel system

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-3

Maintenance

Check efficiency
Replacement
Top up level
Work hours

Lubrication
Cleaning
Step N°

Adjust
Maintenance operations

Every
3600 hours Change main filter of AdBlue™ or DEF system. During the second
(or every 2
46
intervention (at 7200 hours), change prefilter on controller
years)
Air conditioning system
Clean viscous fan drive
General mainte- Clean operator and passenger seats (as applicable)
nance
(Before every use) Inspect seat belt
Check hoses and wiring for damage
General tractor inspection (1)

NOTES:
Operations that must be carried out by an authorised Argo Tractor Dealer.

(1) Check the tractor for leaks, rubbing, squeezed or cracked hoses, loose nuts or bolts and dirt build up. Repair all leaks,
hoses and tighten loose nuts/bolts before operation.
(2) Check for wear and function.
(3) In dusty conditions the cab filter will require more frequent cleaning.

(4) Also clean the filter element whenever the service indicator lights up.

(5) Change after the first 150-200 hours. Then replace at the intervals indicated by the table.

(6) Replace the fuel filter after the first 50 and 100 hours. Then replace at the intervals indicated by the table.

7-4 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance

RECOMMENDATIONS BEFORE YOU
SERVICE
WARNING: Before servicing, carefully read the
instructions in this section. There is a risk of
injury or death if servicing is not carried out or
if the following instructions are not followed
correctly. If you do not understand a service
or adjustment procedure see your dealer.
- Establish where your nearest first aid kit and fire extin-
guisher are located. Undertake suitable training to make
sure you know how the fire extinguisher works.
- Put a warning tag, as shown below, on or near the key
switch before carrying out servicing or repairs to the
tractor. Warning tags (publication number 2- 1000) are
available from your dealer.

WARNING: Do not carry out inspections, main-

tenance work or adjustments on the tractor
whilst the engine is running, except when
specifically requested. Wait for all moving
parts to come to a complete stop.
- If the maintenance operation must be carried
out while the engine is hot (e.g. when chang-
ing engine oil), start the engine and let it idle
for the required time, then turn it off before
the maintenance operation.
- If you need to open the bonnet, follow the 
procedure indicated under "How to open the
bonnet". In this case beware the risk of burn-
ing and shearing. Environment
- Always use specific PERSONAL SAFETY DE-
VICES (DPI) for each service operation. NOTE: Always dispose of replaced parts or substances
(filters, oil, battery etc.) according to rules and laws. Refer
Before any adjustments are made carry out to the manufacturer's specifications on the Material Safety
the following:
Data Sheet.
1. Park the tractor on hard level ground and
apply the parking brake.
2. Stop the engine and remove the key. - Before you service this machine and before you dispose
3. Put blocks in front of and behind the front of the old fluids, lubricants and filters always consider
and rear wheels. the environment.
4. DO NOT smoke or use an open flame during - DO NOT pour oil or fluids in the ground, down drains or
the service procedure. Use eye protection into containers that can leak.
and suitable DPI. - Dispose of all old fluids, lubricants and filters in accord-
ance with local regulations.
WARNING: When handling lubricants (oil, grease etc.) - Check with your local environmental recycling centre or
and other chemical products, always follow instruc- your dealer for correct information.
tions for their proper use. Use proper containers to

collect fluid. Dispose of fluids and filters responsibly
and in accordance with the law.
- Read the safety decals and information decals on this
tractor. Read the operator's manual. Understand the
operation of the tractor before you start servicing.
7
Plastic And Resin Parts
- Avoid using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner, etc., when
cleaning plastic, e.g. console, instrument cluster, moni-
tors and gauges etc.
- Use ONLY water, mild soap and a soft cloth when you
clean these parts.
- Using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner etc., will cause crack-
ing or deformation of the part being cleaned.

- Use the correct safety clothing and safety equipment.

If you wear clothing that is too loose or do not use the
correct safety equipment for your job, you can be injured.
Always wear clothing that will not catch on objects.

Extra safety equipment that can be required includes hard

hat, safety shoes, ear protection, eye or face protection,
heavy gloves and reflector clothing.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-5

Maintenance
Lubrication and maintenance
Foreword
This section described the operations required to correctly
service your tractor and keep it in top condition. The Rou-
tine Maintenance Table serves as quick reference. Each
step is numbered for easier reference.
WARNING: Park the tractor on flat ground and, if
possible, extend all the cylinders before you check
the oil levels.
Safety precautions
Read and comply with all the safety precautions in the
“Tractor maintenance” part of the Safety Notes Section.
NOTE: Always dispose of replaced parts or substances
(filters, oil, battery etc.) according to rules and laws. Refer
to the manufacturer's specifications on the Material Safety
Data Sheet.
Sealed units
Please remember that the seals on the following
parts: injection pump and overspeed screw, must not
be removed at any time.
If you need to repair or adjust any of these units, contact
your local dealer or authorised repair shop. The war-
ranty is automatically invalidated if these seals are
tampered with.
Servicing the front power take-off
Periodically throughout the year, additional attention
should be made to the following:
- Check all bolts, screws and fixings etc. are tight.
- Check the PTO housing for any leaks. Operating the
Front PTO at low oil levels can cause damage to the
housing, incorrect operation of the PTO clutch and also
damage to the environment.
- Check the condition of the flexible rubber drive cou-
pling, mounted to the crankshaft pulley. Make sure the
coupling is installed correctly and is not brittle.
- Apply grease to the drive shaft spline.
7-6
Running in
Fade-free efficiency and a long working life largely depend
on how the new tractor is treated during the running in
period. It is therefore extremely important to follow these
instructions:
- Your engine does not require any special running in
when new. You can use it at full power from the start,
but you must never overload it. Avoid using the engine
at full power before it reaches an operating tempera-
ture of at least 60°C (140°F).
- Every time you start the engine from cold, let it run
slowly without load for a few minutes to warm up. This
is particularly important with turbo-charged engines.
- Avoid idling the engine for long periods.
- Regularly check for oil leaks.
- To ensure long clutch life, carefully run in the clutch
plates. To do this, operate the clutch frequently but
gradually during the first 15 hours' service.
After the first 50 hours
• service
Replace the fuel filter twice during the first 100 hours
(after 50 hours and after 100 hours). After this,
replace the fuel filter at the intervals specified in the
'Routine Maintenance Table'.
• Check clutch pedal travel
• Check the brake pedal travel.
• Check all oil levels. If necessary, top up with oil of the
prescribed type.
• Check the tension of the fan belt.
• Grease all points with grease nipples.
• Check to make sure that all bolts, screws and nuts are
correctly torqued.
• Check the tyre pressure.
How to prevent pollution
To prevent pollution when oil, filters and so forth are
changed, always clean the zone around fill, level and
drain plugs, dipsticks and filters. Before connecting the
auxiliary cylinders, make sure that the oil they contain is
clean, that it has not deteriorated owing to long storage
and that it is of the prescribed type.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

Servicing intervals
The intervals suggested in the lubrication and mainte-
nance table are indications to use when the tractor is
used in normal conditions.
These intervals should be adapted to the real environmen-
tal and operational conditions. Servicing must be more
frequent in adverse work conditions (in the presence of
humidity, mud, sand, very dusty environments).
WARNING: If carried out at the prescribed intervals,
the operations described in this section will ensure
that the tractor operates in a regular way. However,
remember to carry out the inspections and adjust-
ments (of variable frequency depending on the envi-
ronmental conditions and type of work carried out)
according to your discretion and experience.
Miscellaneous checks
Periodically check the following components. If faults are
discovered, contact your Dealer's specialised personnel
and have the damaged parts replaced if necessary:
•cracked.
Hydraulic hoses: The hoses must not be pinched or
The outer sheath must not be swollen in any
way and there must be no oil leaks between the hoses
and unions.
• Parking brake lever: make sure that the ratchet locking
mechanism is secure and reliable.
• Make sure that all nuts are well tightened.
• Make sure that the safety frame bolts are well tightened.
• Make sure that all other nuts and bolts are well tight-
ened.
Indicator lights
Your tractor is equipped with indicator lights that keep
you informed about the condition of your machine. Some
of these indicate faults, so act promptly if they come on.
Fuel injection pump
Only your Dealer's specialised personnel may be allowed
to work on the injection pump during the warranty pe-
riod. Removal of the seals from the pump will relieve
the manufacturer from all and every liability in relation to
warranty coverage.
Keeping the environment clean
When you need to fill the fuel tank or change the lubri-
cating oil, never forget to position a vessel under the
component in question in order to collect any fuel or oil
that spills out. These products are polluting, so it is very
important to protect the environment in this way.
Engine cooling system
It is advisable to replace the fluid in the system at least
once a year even if you have not reached 5000 hours
service in total.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Maintenance
Radiator
To ensure that the cooling circuit operates in a perfect
way, it is important to prevent the radiator fins from be-
coming clogged.
NOTE: These fins should be cleaned often, even several
times a day if the place of work is particularly dusty.
Lubrication
Before lubricating any parts provided with grease nipples,
carefully clean the nipples' surfaces and be sure that their
seal ball moves freely.
After the lubrication, remove any trace of grease to avoid
it to collect dirt or dust.
General tractor inspection
- Power steering cylinder hoses: the hoses must not be
pinched or cracked. The outer sheath must not be swol-
len in any way and there must be no oil leaks between
the hoses and unions.
- Hydraulic circuits tubes. Check for leaks, rubbing,
squeezed or damaged hoses, loose nuts or bolts and
dirt build up. Repair all leaks, hoses and tighten loose
nuts/bolts before operation.
- Parking brake lever: make sure that the ratchet locking
mechanism is secure and reliable.
- Check for loose nuts, bolts and components.
- Make sure that the wheel nuts are correctly torqued.
- Check to make sure that all other nuts and bolts are
well tightened.
- Make sure that all shields and guards are in the correct
position.
- Check all wiring for damage. If damaged, contact your
Dealer for the required spare parts.
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
WARNING: service operations must be carried out with
the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking
brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has
been removed. 7
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and
engine parts.
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the
procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
7-7
Maintenance

Lubricants and fuels [4.1.l] Diesel fuel

CAUTION: Only use a Diesel fuel with a low sulphur con-
WARNING: Comply with the following instruc- tent. Otherwise you could experience a reduction in en-
tions when working with diesel fuel. gine power and an increase in fuel consumption (Fig.7-2).
Do not smoke near diesel fuel. In no case must
petrol (gasoline), alcohol or mixtures of diesel
fuel or alcohol be added to the diesel fuel as
such action would notably increase the risk of
fire outbreaks or explosions. In a closed ves-
sel, such as a can, they are even more explosive
than pure petrol (gasoline).
- Never use such mixtures. Moreover, mixtures
of diesel fuel and alcohol are not approved
since the lubrication of the fuel injection sys-  Fig.7-2
tem would be impaired.
- Clean around the plug where the fuel is
poured and keep it clean.
- Fill the tank at the end of the day to prevent
the building up of overnight condensation. Fuel
- Never remove the plug or fuel the tractor For a good operation of the injection system, always use
whilst the engine is running. Keep control of a high grade diesel fuel.
the pump nozzle whilst the tank is being filled. Diesel fuel must contain no suspended impurity. Therefore
- The tank must not be completely filled. - Al- the fuel must be allowed to settle for two or three days
low space for an increase in volume. If the before being used in the tractor.
original tank plug is lost, it must be replaced Fuel oil can be decanted with a cheap, but safe system,
with an original spare which must be fully as illustrated in (Fig.7-1).
tightened.
Never use fuel that has been stored in an open container
- Dry up any fuel spill immediately.
for any amount of time, as it could be polluted by water
or dust.
Fuel requisites The fuel tank should be filled in the evening at the end
It is important to use good quality fuel if the engine is to of the day's work. This will avoid water condensation in
be long-lasting and give a good performance. Fuel must be the tank.
clean, well refined and non-corrosive for the fuel system Plan your fuel purchases so that summer fuels are not
components. Make sure that you use fuel of a known kept for too long and used in the winter.
quality and reliable origin.

NOTE: The fuel used must be compliant with the indicated

standards or equivalent ones: EN 590 (Europe market),
DF2 ASTM D975 (NAO market).
If the used fuel is not correct, the engine and anti-pollution
system could be exposed to damages not covered by
warranty.
Pay the greates attention to the choice and storage of fuel.

Fuelling
Before you fuel the tractor, clean the zone around the fill
plug to prevent foreign matter from entering the tank. After
fuelling, screw on the plug and tighten it well.

WARNING: Do not smoke while filling the

Fig.7-1 Setting up a tank for fuel storage and decant-
fuel tank.
ing.
Keep clear of any sort of flames.
a. 25% slant.
b. Condensation water.
c. Sludge drain plug.

NOTE: Never use galvanised containers to store fuel.

7-8 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance

Fuel tank filling [4.1.l] Filling with AdBlue™ or DEF

(Fig. 7-3a) (Fig. 7-3b)

WARNING: before filling fuel, always turn off the WARNING: avoid any contacts with your eyes, skin
engine. or garments.

WARNING: Never smoke while refuelling. Keep • If ingested. If a great amount of the fluid is ingested,
away from naked flames. seek immediately medical help. DO NOT induce vom-
iting it not expressly indicated by medical personnel.
Do not administer liquids to an unconscious person.

• In case of contact with your skin, wash with plenty of

water and remove the contaminated garments..

• In case of contact with your eyes, wash immediately

with plenty of water. In case of rash, seek medical help.

• If gases should be inhaled, go immediately in the open

air and seek medical help, if necessary.

• Avoid any contacts of AdBlue™ or DEF with other

chemicals.

• Do not drain AdBlue™ or DEF spills into the sewers.

Fig.7-3a

7
Fig.7-3b

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-9

Maintenance

Main battery disconnecting switch WARNING: When the engine is running, the battery
cannot be disconnected in any way.

This switch (1) has two positions:

●● Position A: battery connected, all systems are pow-
ered. The icon is lit up.

●● Position B: battery disconnected, only the instrument

cluster and the courtesy light in the cab are lit up. The
icon is off.

Use the master switch (1) to disconnect supply of the

battery to the electrical systems of the tractor when dis-
mounting. IT IS OBLIGATORY to disconnect the battery
during maintenance.
It is a good habit to always remove the key to prevent
unauthorized use or accidents.

IMPORTANT: Do not use the master disconnect switch

(1) to STOP the Diesel engine, or the machine power units
will be damaged. The engine would not stop anyway. For
safety, the battery is not disconnected when the engine
is running.

Even if not actually required, it is advisable to insulate the

machine electric system at the end of each work day by
means of the master disconnect switch. This operation
increases safety and prolongs battery life.

NOTE: The master disconnect switch must be used for any

operation on the electric system. It is at any rate OBLIGA-
TORY to disconnect the battery completely if welding is
carried out on the machine.

IMPORTANT: In case of fire, immediately detach the

cable from the positive terminal or, if equipped, operate
the master disconnect switch.

The master disconnect switch (3) disconnects the battery

from the tractor electric system.
The master disconnect switch (1) can only be activated
with the ignition key in the OFF position.

WARNING: Before any maintenance opera-

tions, always disconnect the battery by means
of the master disconnect switch and remove
the terminals from the battery.

If the tractor is not used for a long time, it is

advisable to disconnect the battery.

7-10 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance

Access for inspection and mainte-

nance
It may be necessary to open the bonnet in order to ac-
cess the engine components and carry out inspections,
lubrication and servicing operations.

DANGER: Danger of shearing. Open the

bonnet and remove the side panel only for
servicing, with engine off and rotating parts
completely at standstill.

WARNING: All the surfaces inside the bonnet

are hot. High burning danger. Be extremely
careful and wait for the surfaces to cool down
before operating inside the bonnet to avoid
burns.
Fig.7-4a
WARNING: In a few particular cases some
service operations may require an open bon-
net. Always turn off the engine, as with an
open bonnet the protection from rotating
parts is reduced. In this case, pay also great
attention to hot parts. Wear specific DPI and
keep away any persons not required for the
service operations.

WARNING: A gas ram controls opening and

closing of the bonnet. Replace the gas ram if
not properly operating to avoid accidental fall
of the bonnet.

WARNING: If the tractor is equipped with

front hitch and power take-off, before open-
ing the bonnet lower the links completely,
whether there are implements or not.

Bonnet opening
Park the tractor on hard, level ground, engage the parking
brake, turn the engine off and remove the ignition key.
To open the bonnet:
–– Release the detent hook of the bonnet with the aid of 7
a pin driver (1) as shown in Fig. 7-4a.
–– Raise the bonnet (1) that is kept raised by the gas rams
(2 - Fig.7-4b).
–– To shut the bonnet again, lower the bonnet against the
resistance of the gas rams (Fig.7-4b).

WARNING: NEVER use the tractor without the

bonnet.

Fig.7-4b

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-11

Maintenance

Tool Box
(Fig. CA1)

The tool box (if equipped) is located in the front part of

the cab, on the left outer side.

The tool box can be removed by removing the retaining

pin, located at the centre back of the tool box. Lift the
toolbox and pull it out.

The tool box position may vary according to tractor model.

Fig. CA1

AdBlue™ or DEF
(Fig. AB1)

CAUTION: Only use a good quality AdBlue™ or DEF

fluid (for quantity of AdBlue™ or DEF fluid, refer to the
guidelines of DIN 70070).
The use of a poor quality AdBlue™ or DEF fluid could cause
severe engine malfunction.

Fig. AB1

7-12 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance

10 HOURS OR DAILY SERVICE

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

STEP 1
General tractor inspection
–– Power steering cylinder hoses: the hoses must not
be pinched or cracked. The outer sheath must not
be swollen in any way and there must be no oil leaks
between the hoses and unions.
–– Hydraulic circuits tubes. Check for leaks, rubbing,
squeezed or damaged hoses, loose nuts or bolts and
dirt build up. Repair all leaks, hoses and tighten loose
nuts/bolts before operation.
–– Parking brake lever: make sure that the ratchet locking
mechanism is secure and reliable.
–– Check for loose nuts, bolts and components.
–– Make sure that the wheel nuts are correctly torqued.
–– Check to make sure that all other nuts and bolts are
well tightened.
–– Make sure that all shields and guards are in the cor-
rect position.

Daily checks on the engine

Before starting the tractor, it could be best practice to carry
out a series of simple checks that could effectively prevent
even serious malfunctions during tractor's operation.

–– Check levels and any leaks in fuel, coolant and lubrica-

tion systems.
7
–– Inform the service personnel if any problem is found.
Top up where necessary.

When the engine is started and running, carry out the

following checks:
–– Check for any leaks in fuel, coolant and lubrication
systems.
–– Make sure there are no unusual noises and knocks
during operation.
–– Use the vehicle instruments to control the allowed
values of pressure, temperature etc.
–– Visual check of fumes (colour of exhaust gases).
–– Visual check of the coolant fluid level in the coolant
recovery reservoir.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-13

Maintenance

STEP 2 STEP 3
Check fuel level Check AdBlue™ or DEF level

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
 To reduce emissions, a fluid made up of AdBlue™ o DEF
In order to comply with laws concerning emissions from
exhaust gases, electronic engines are equipped with SCR
(Selective Catalytic Reduction).
at 32,5% must be injected into the exhaust gases. When
gases enter the catalytic converter, this fluid causes a
chemical reaction that splits up noxious gases into nitro-
gen and water vapour.
The fluid is contained in the reservoir with a blue cap (1)
beside the fuel tank. The system is provided with a control
unit for fluid injection into exhaust tubes.

Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day after work has
been completed to prevent condensation in the fuel tank.

Diesel fuel
Use a high grade diesel fuel. The use of a low grade
fuel will result in loss of engine power and high fuel
consumption.

IMPORTANT: Different grades of diesel fuel are required

Check level of AdBlue™ or DEF fluid in the reservoir and
for summer and winter operations. See your fuel supplier
fill up through the blue cap (1), if required, to prevent an
for winter fuel requirements in your area.
empty reservoir.
The fluid percentage on fuel consumption is 2 to 5%.
WARNING: Never refuel the machine when
Therefore the reservoir needs a new filling every 2 fillings
the engine is hot or running. Never smoke
of the fuel tank.
while refueling.
The absence of fluid causes a power reduction and if the
worked is carried on without fluid injection, the control
WARNING: Engine fuel is flammable and can
unit finally stops the engine.
cause a fire or an explosion. DO NOT fill the
The instrument cluster displays the percentage of AdB-
fuel tank or service the fuel system near an
lue™ or DEF fluid in the reservoir, and an indicator light
naked flame, welding, burning cigars, ciga-
signals when the level is too low. Top up immediately with
rettes etc.
the fluid specified in the Lubricants and Fuels chart. An
indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on in case
WARNING: Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking
of a fault in the fluid injection system. See the Instruments
under pressure can penetrate the skin and
and programming section in this manual for more details.
cause infection or other injury. To prevent
injury: release all pressure, before disconnect-
For storing AdBlue™ or DEF fluid, follow the instruc-
ing fluid lines. Before applying pressure, make
tions of the fluid manufacturer and ask your Dealer
sure all connections are tight and components
if you need more information. As AdBlue™ or DEF
are in good condition. Never use your hand
fluid hardens at -11°C and decomposes quickly at
to check for suspected leaks under pressure.
temperatures over 35°C, the fluid must be stored in a
Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this
sheltered place, out of direct sunlight and must not be
purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your
stored for a long time at temperature below -11°C or
doctor immediately.
over 35°C. Always handle this fluid carefully and only
with dedicated objects, clean and made of materials
complying with the technical sheet of the fluid you
are using. AdBlue™ or DEF is a clear fluid, not toxic

7-14 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance

and not dangerous when handled.. Not explosive, not

flammable, not dangerous for the environment. If your
hands come into contact with AdBlue™ or DEF, just
rinse with water, Do not pour AdBlue™ or DEF on the
ground, as the surface can become slippery. In case
of spills, rinse with water.

WARNING: Never fill up AdBlue™ or DEF when

the engine is hot or running. Do not smoke
during refilling.

WARNING: DO NOT fill the AdBlue™ or DEF

reservoir or service the system near a naked
flame, during welding, near burning cigars,
cigarettes etc.

WARNING: Fluids leaking under pressure can

penetrate the skin and cause infection or other
injury. To prevent injury: release all pressure,
before disconnecting fluid lines.
Before applying pressure, make sure all con-
nections are tight and components are in good
condition. Never use your hand to check for
suspected leaks under pressure. Use a piece of
cardboard or wood for this purpose. If injured
by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately.
WARNING: WARRANTY for the AdBlue™ or DEF
fluid injection system.
A warranty on the AdBlue™ or DEF injection
system is granted only if a SYNTHESIS PROD-
UCT or equivalent is used. In no case is a war-
ranty granted if dissolved products are used
(urea prills dissolved in demineralised water),
because these products contain additives that
can cause early clogging of the catalytic con-
verter. Use EXCLUSIVELY the fluid indicated
by the fuel and lubricants table or equivalent.
WARNING: Never pour AdBlue™ or DEF into
the diesel fuel tank and, on the other hand,
never pout diesel fuel or lubricating oil into
the AdBlue™ or DEF reservoir.
1. Controller of AdBlue™ or DEF injection system
2. Main filter
3. Prefilter
AdBlue™ or DEF - What is to do
–– Use exclusively the original synthetic product.
–– - Use exclusively suitable, dedicated and clean
equipment to supply and store the fluid.
–– Always keep the handling equipment for AdBlue™
or DEF clean and preserved from dirt and dust.
–– Only pour AdBlue™ or DEF into its own reservoir.
–– If your hands come into contact with AdBlue™ or
DEF, just rinse with plenty of water.
AdBlue™ or DEF - What is not to do
–– Do not expose the product to direct sunlight.
–– Avoid longer exposure to temperatures over 35°C
or below -11°C.
–– Do not pour AdBlue™ or DEF into the fuel tank.
–– Do not pour diesel fuel into the AdBlue™ or DEF
reservoir.
–– Do not mix the product with other substances or
7
dilute it with water.
–– Do not pour AdBlue™ or DEF onto the ground
as the surface could become slippery. In case of
spills, rinse with water.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-15

Maintenance

STEP 4 If necessary, remove the dipstick (1) and add oil up to

the MAX level.
Engine oil level
WARNING: Never ever use the engine with the oil level
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera- below the “MIN” mark.
tion concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [4.1.n]

For the engine, it is necessary to use an oil as indicated

in the Lubricants and Fuels Chart. Detergent oils contain
additives that reduce corrosion, oil oxidation and depos-
its and have a high dispersion power of carbon matters
produced by combustion.

WARNING: The following operations must be carried

out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the
parking brake are both engaged and that the ignition
key has been removed.

Personal safety devices must be worn for the indicated

operations.
Beware of burns caused by hot oil and engine parts.
If required, let the engine idle for the prescribed time to
reach the required temperature to let the oil flow easily.
Then turn off the engine.
If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure
indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

Leave the tractor parked on a flat surface for at least five

minutes before checking the level, to allow the oil to set-
tle in the sump:

–– Take out the dipstick (1), wipe it with a rag and then dip
it into the filler again;

–– Wait 10-15 minutes, then remove the dipstick again

and make sure that the oil level reaches and does not
exceed the level marked on it.

–– If necessary, pour additional oil through the filler (1) until

the MAX level is reached.

7-16 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance

STEP 5 STEP 6
Check the oil level in the transmis- Check coolant level
sion.
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera- tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water
tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]
and engine parts. [4.1.n]

To check the transmission oil level, put the tractor on

level ground.

Check the coolant level when the coolant is cold and with
the engine stopped. DO NOT REMOVE THE RADIATOR
CAP.

The coolant level must be within the normal cold range

marks stamped on the reservoir (1). If the level is below
the minimum mark, fill the reservoir to the top mark with
correct coolant mixture (this will depend upon market
If the oil level is below the n. 1 mark on the dipstick, add
requirements).
the recommended oil in through the fill tube (1) located
at the rear of the transmission.
Precautions against freezing temperatures
To prevent ice from forming in the radiator, add specific
products according to the instructions given by the anti-
freeze manufacturer.
Antifreeze also possesses antioxidant and rust-inhibiting
properties and is suitable for all seasons.
The following amounts are indicatively required:

Quick reference guide

in the following percentages: 7
Ambient temperature (°C) -8 -15 -25 -35
Ambient temperature (°F) -18 -5 -13 -31
Percentage of antifreeze % 20 30 40 50

WARNING: Hot coolant can spray out if the

coolant recovery reservoir cap or radiator
cap is removed while system is still hot. DO
NOT REMOVE THE RADIATOR CAP. To remove
the coolant recovery reservoir cap or radiator
If working in extreme hilly conditions, make sure the oil
cap, let system cool, turn cap to first notch,
level always stays between the n. 2 mark and the max.
then wait until pressure is released. Scalding
level mark.
can result from fast removal of radiator cap.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-17

Maintenance
STEP 7
Clean cab suspension support as-
sembly (if installed)
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor
and engine parts. [4.1.n]
On a daily basis check to make sure the cab suspension
support assembly and corresponding area is clean.
Pay extra attention to the slot in the bracket, make sure
any mud, dust, straw etc. is removed and not restricting
movement.
STEP 8
Check windshield washer reservoir
level
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
If the fluid level is low fill the reservoir.
7-18
STEP 9
Check front PTO oil level (if equipped)
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
To check the power takeoff oil level, put the tractor on
level ground.
Remove the fill/level plug (1) located on the front of the
housing. If the oil level is low, add the recommended oil
type to raise the oil level to the bottom edge of the fill
hole. Install the plug and tighten.
Servicing the front power take-off
Periodically throughout the year, additional attention
should be made to the following:
–– Check all bolts, screws and fixings etc. are tight.
–– Check the PTO housing for any leaks.
Operating the Front PTO at low oil levels can cause
damage to the housing, incorrect operation of the PTO
clutch and also damage to the environment.
–– Check the condition of the flexible rubber drive coupling,
mounted to the crankshaft pulley. Make sure the cou-
pling is installed correctly and is not brittle.
–– Apply grease to the drive shaft spline.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1
 Maintenance
STEP 10

Check tyre pressures

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor
and engine parts. [4.1.n]

To check pressure in the tyres, see “Air pressure check”

on page 6-6 of this manual.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-19

Maintenance
50 HOUR MAIN SERVICE
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

STEP 11
Grease points - Independent front suspension axle
NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type. See the Lubricants and Fuels chart.
NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more frequently.
NOTE: Grease the tractor if it is often washed with pressurised water.

Suspension arms - Front Bearing pin/orientation arm

Suspension arms - Rear Front axle stud (ballast frame removed for photo)

Steering knuckle swivel pins Axle pivot pin - rear

Servicing the independent front suspension axle (if equipped)

WARNING: Before carrying out any servicing on tractors equipped with Front Suspension make sure the
axle is fully lowered to the bottom mechanical stop, the engine is not running and the keyswitch is in the
OFF position. Failure to do this may result in serious injury.

7-20 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
STEP 12
Grease points - Rigid axle
NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type. See the Lubricants and Fuels chart.
NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more frequently.
NOTE: Grease the tractor if it is often washed with pressurised water.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and
engine parts.

Axle pivot pin - front

Axle pivot pin - rear

Steering knuckle swivel pins

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-21

Maintenance
STEP 13 During running-in, replace the fuel filter 2 times after
the first 50 and 100 work hours. Afterwards, replace
Drain the fuel/water separator the fuel filters after every 500 hours service.
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water
and engine parts.
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
Shift the gear to neutral and engage the parking brake.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the
out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand
procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the
dashboard.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot water and

engine parts. [4.1.n]

Regularly drain off the water that collects from the

cock of the water/fuel separator filter (1).

The drain plug is located on the bottom of the fuel/water

separator. Loosen the plug to let any water or sediment
drain from the filter. Tighten the drain plug after the water
has drained.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of fuel and filters in accordance

with local regulations. DO NOT drain on the ground, into
a drain or into a leaky container. Be responsible for the
environment.

7-22 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water and
engine parts.

STEP 14
Clean the grille screens of front cool-
ing packages
(Fig. PR1)

Clean the grille screens of air conditioning condenser,

intercooler, fuel cooler and radiator area every 50 hours of
operation, or more frequently if required when operating
in dusty conditions.
WARNING: This cleaning must be carried out after a
long time the engine was stopped, so that engine and
radiators are cold.
• Open the bonnet as described at the beginning of this
section.
• All grilles can be easily accessed and inspected for
normal maintenance.
• To gain complete access both to the front and rear side
of the condenser unit (1), pull up the lever (2). After
cleaning the grille on both sides, lower the unit again
by means of the same lever (1). A magnet holds the
unit in position.
• To gain complete access both to the front and rear side
of the radiator unit (3), press the retainer (4) and pull up
the lever (5). Two gas rams the whole radiator unit can
be easily raised by the operator to gain complete access
to the grilles for cleaning. After the service operations
are completed, lower the unit again by means of the
same lever (5).
• Close the bonnet as described at the beginning of this
section.

IMPORTANT: Be careful not to bend or damage the fins

during cleaning. Areas with restricted access should be
carefully cleaned with compressed air.
IMPORTANT: If you clean using compressed air, use an
7
air hose with a safety ON/OFF control nozzle and ALWAYS
WEAR FACE PROTECTION.
WARNING: DO NOT steam clean any air con-
ditioning system parts while the system is
charged. The heat will cause the refrigerant to
rise to a pressure that could cause the system
to explode.
NOTE: The best results are obtained with a steam cleaner
that softens up the dirt. Use a lamp to check the cleaning Fig. PR1
between the radiator fins. We recommend a daily clean-
ing when front implements are used, especially front
mower-conditioners.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-23

Maintenance
STEP 15
Clean cab air recirculation filter
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.

If working in very dusty environment, the cab air recir-

culation filters (1) should be cleaned either at suitable
intervals or every 50 work hours if operating in a very
dusty environment.

STEP 1
Remove the recirculation grille and the filter.

STEP 2
Clean the filter using mild soap and water. Rinse with clear
water and squeeze out the excess.

STEP 3
Install the filter in the recirculation grille.

STEP 4
Install the grille and filter.

7-24 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
100 HOUR MAIN SERVICE
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

STEP 16 STEP 17
Greasing points - Rear 3 point hitch Greasing points - Front 3-point hitch
(if equipped)
NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type. See the
Lubricants and Fuels chart. NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type. See the
NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more Lubricants and Fuels chart.
frequently. NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more
NOTE: Grease the tractor if it is often washed with pres- frequently.
surised water. NOTE: Grease the tractor if it is often washed with pres-
surised water.


Top of lift cylinder, 2 points.

Turnbuckles, 2 points each side

Bottom of lift cylinder.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-25

Maintenance
STEP 18
Cab air filter (1 - Fig. FC1)
Check and clean the intake air filter every 100 hours or
more often if needed. Keep the air filter clean for efficient
operation of the heating and cooling system. Replace
with genuine parts if damaged or when the filter cannot
be cleaned.

WARNING: Remember that the cab filter is not

suitable for chemicals in general.
Absolute protection against these products
can therefore only be achieved by taking
the precautionary measures required by the
degree of harmfulness of the actual products
used.
It is essential to strictly conform to this latter
precaution for all types of filter whose use
requires compliance with the envisaged opera-
tion and maintenance instructions.
However, even use of filters to protect against
chemicals in general does not exempt opera-
tors from taking all the personal precautions
recommended for use of such products.
These specific filters must only be mounted
when the actual chemicals are being used and
must then be replaced with the normal paper
filters supplied with the machine at the end
of each treatment.
Do not use them during the other processes
since the dust would quickly clog them.
Carefully comply with the operating instruc-
tions on the filter packages or labels. Contact
your Dealer if specific filters against chemicals
must be used.
IMPORTANT: Always wear protective clothing, e.g.
overalls, goggles, gloves and face mask when preparing
equipment for chemical spraying operations and ALWAYS
follow the chemical manufacturers instructions.
This type of tractor CANNOT be used to spray chemicals,
unless the operator within the cab is wearing a complete
protective suit.
The air filters in the cab should be checked weekly or daily
if used in extreme conditions.
NOTE: This element gives no protection against chemi-
cal spray.
Fig. FC1
WARNING: Take the filter off before washing the cab.
If the cab is washed and the special filter has not been
demounted, take care to prevent the jet of water from
splashing on to the protective grille. otherwise your cab's
special filter will be irreparably damaged.
CAUTION: If active carbon filters are used, mount only
original filters supplied in a sealed package: comply with
the operating instructions on the container and enclosed
in the filter package. Carefully comply with the operating
instructions on the filter packages or labels. Replace the
filters at the intervals specified by the filter manufacturer.
Contact your Dealer if specific filters against chemicals
must be used.
Always wear the right sort of personal protective equip-
ment to protect against the harmful products used.
CAUTION: The Manufacturer has no responsibility
whatever, either direct or indirect, for application of spe-
cial filters and/or changes to the air intake system of the
cab. Every change to the cab intake system can result in
a health hazard for the operator and significantly alter the
performance of the air conditioning system. In any case,
the cab is not guaranteed as perfectly dust-tight. Always
wear individual protections when working in particularly
dusty environment.
Protection level [4.1.p]

WARNING: Always wear individual protections suitable

to the harmfulness of the actual product used.


WARNING: Tractors with cabs have no protection

against dangerous substances, but do have protection
against dust (protection level 2). If the tractor is used
to spray phytosanitary products or chemicals gener-
ally thought of as hazardous to health, the operator
must wear individual protections (mask) suitable to
the harmfulness of the actual product used.

7-26 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
WARNING: Do not stand on the tractor to serv- METHOD A
ice the filter, use the correct equipment for a
safe standing platform or injury can result.

For best performance, this filter should be serviced more

often when working in particularly dusty environment.
Replace with a genuine part if damaged or when the filter
can not be cleaned.

IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment and

protective clothing appropriate to the environment that
the filter has been in contact with MUST be used during
the cleaning of the filter.

STEP 1
If the dirt mainly consists in dust, this method can be
used to clean the filter. Tap the dusty side of the filter on
a flat surface. Do not use excessive force that can cause
damage to the filter.

METHOD B

Loosen both knobs (2) fixing the cover.

Open the filter cover.

STEP 2

Use compressed air to blow dust away. Move the flow of

air up and down the clean the side of the filter. Maximum
air pressure must exceed 2 bar. Too much pressure will
damage the filter.

IMPORTANT: Always use an air hose with a safety ON/OFF

control nozzle and ALWAYS WEAR FACE PROTECTION. 7
STEP 4
Insert the filter element under the filter cover.
Close the cover and fix it with both knobs.

Remove the filter element (1) and clean the filter seat.

STEP 3
The filter element can be cleaned by following two
methods:
A. By tapping against a flat surface.

or

B. By blowing with compressed air.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-27

Maintenance
250 HOUR MAIN SERVICE
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

STEP 19
Greasing points
NOTE: Use lithium grease of the prescribed type. See the Lubricants and Fuels chart.
NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more frequently.
NOTE: Lubricate if not used frequently and also after washing with water pressure hose.

Locking devices for automatic hitch- Trailer hitch slide rails and hitch cou-
ing of the Pick Up Hitch pling operating parts
(if equipped, according to market) (if equipped).

Locking latches and rear pivots, 2 points.

1. The hitch should be carefully cleaned every 250 hour Hitch clevis, 1 point (depending on model)
operation, and the moving parts (also inner slide rails)
The hitch should be thoroughly cleaned and all moving
should be greased to avoid corrosion.
parts, including the inner slide rails, should be greased to
protect from corrosion.
2. Make sure that all moving parts move freely and oper-
ate correctly. Make sure that all moving parts move freely and operate
correctly.
NOTE: In heavy duty operating conditions, the hitch could
require a more frequent greasing to ensure it operates
correctly. 

Pin grease nipple, 1 point (depending on hitch model)

7-28 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

STEP 20
NOTE: See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for the correct type of oil required.
Check front planetary oil level Check Differential Oil Level in Front
Axle



To check the planetary oil level, park the tractor on level RIGID AXLE
ground.

Turn the wheel hub until the plug (1) is in the 3 or 9 o'clock
position.

Remove the plug and check the oil level. The oil must be
level with the bottom of the plug hole, add the recom-
mended oil type to the correct level if required. Install the
plug and tighten.

SUSPENDED AXLE
7
To check the differential oil level, put the tractor on level
ground. Remove the fill/level plug (1).
The oil must be level with the bottom edge of the hole.
Add the recommended oil type to raise the oil to the cor-
rect level if required. Install the plug and tighten.

NOTE: If required, an additive for limited slipping can be
found at your Dealer's. Add 30 ml additive for each litre
of oil in the housing.
1
WARNING: Before carrying out any servic-
ing on tractors equipped with independent
front suspension, make sure the axle is fully
lowered to the bottom mechanical stop, the
engine is not running and the keyswitch is in
the OFF position. Failure to do this may result
in serious injury.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-29

Maintenance

WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

STEP 21 STEP 22

Check drawbar support bracket bolts Check drive belts tension

torques The drive belt should not be slack, as the engine is pro-
vided with an automatic idler that keeps the belt taut. It is
however advisable to check tension of Drive Belt to make
sure it fits correctly.

Check the tension of ALL drive belts, on the longest run of

the belt, every 50 hours during the first 100 hours of op-
eration until constant, then every 250 hours of operation.

The tension is correct when the belt deflects about 10

mm on the longest run of the belt with a thumb pressure
applied.

Check the belt for cuts and wear.

The belt must be replaced if it is cracked or visible damage.

STEP 23
–– Tighten bolts (1) [4 off] to a torque of 295 to 330 Nm. Parking brake operation
Check the torque of the trailer hitch
bolts
(if equipped).

Make sure that the ratchet locking mechanism of the

parking brake is secure and reliable.

The parking brake lever (1) should not be shifted more

than 3-4 marks so that the brakes can hold a fully loaded
tractor on a slope of minimum 18%. Adjust as required.

–– Tighten the rear retaining bolts (2) [10 off] of the PTO
housing, to a torque of 430 to 455 Nm.

7-30 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
STEP 24 Check electrolyte level
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet". tion concerned.
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and
engine parts. [4.1.n]

Periodically check the level of battery acid and add dis-

tilled water if necessary. If you need to top up too often,
have the battery charging system checked by a qualified
technician.

WARNING: Battery electrolyte contains sulfu-

ric acid and can cause serious burns.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. Keep na-
ked flames, sparks and lighted cigarettes well
- Move the master disconnect switch on OFF.
clear of batteries which are being charged.
- Remove the knob (1) and open the steps.
Keep the area in which batteries are being
- Remove the cover (2).
charged well ventilated. [4.1.l]

NOTE: The level of the electrolyte must be checked with

the engine off, the tractor parked on flat ground and the
battery cold.

NOTE: Make sure that the battery terminal nuts are well
fixed to their terminals.

WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling.
WARNING: Do not use acid to top up the bat-
tery. The electrolyte will boil over. Use only
deionised distilled water and top up to a level
of 5/6 mm over the battery cells.
WARNING: According to the Law it is mandatory to
dispose of batteries in suitable containers provided to
this purpose at authorised centres. DO NOT dispose
of them in the environment.
––Remove cell cover plates carefully.
––Add distilled water to just cover the top of the separa-
tors. DO NOT OVER-FILL. The right level should be 5 to
6 mm over the cells.
––When distilled water is added at ambient temperatures
below 0°C (32°F) the batteries must be charged im-
mediately to mix the water and electrolyte or the water
will freeze, because the water will stay on top of the
electrolyte.
NOTE: For further information about battery servicing and
7
charging and about components of the tractor's electrical
system, see the Electrical system section in this manual.
Battery cables and terminals
The battery terminals must be kept clean and tight.
Remove all corrosion with a wire brush, then wash with
a weak solution of baking soda or ammonia. Put some
petroleum jelly or light grease on terminals to prevent
more corrosion.

WARNING: When connecting the battery to a

charger, make sure that the positive (+) lead
of the charger is connected to the positive of
the battery and the negative (-) to the negative.
Incorrect connection will damage the diodes
and the other circuit components. [4.1.l]

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-31

Maintenance
500 HOUR MAIN SERVICE
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

For the engine, it is necessary to use an oil as indicated in the Lubricants and Fuels Chart. Detergent oils contain addi-
tives that reduce corrosion, oil oxidation and deposits and have a high dispersion power of carbon matters produced by
combustion.

WARNING: The operations described hereunder must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the
hand brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.

Personal safety devices must be worn for the indicated operations. Beware of burns caused by hot oil and engine parts.
If required, let the engine idle for the prescribed time to reach the required temperature to let the oil flow easily. Then
turn off the engine.
If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".

STEP 25 IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters in accordance with

local regulations. DO NOT drain the oil on the ground, into
Change engine oil and filter a drain or put in a container that can leak. Be responsible
for the environment.
During the running in period, the engine oil and oil filter 
must be changed after the first 50 hours. Following this,
change the oil after every 500 hours service (1000, 500,
1500 hours, etc...)

NOTE: 500 hours is the maximum tolerated frequency

for oil changes. The oil must be changed more frequently
(e.g. every 250 hours) if the tractor is used in heavy duty
conditions.

To change the engine oil, put the tractor on level ground

and stop the engine.

NOTE: For best results change the oil while the engine
is still warm.

WARNING: Avoid contact with hot oil. Do not Turn the oil filter counterclockwise with a suitable wrench
change a hot filter due to risk of burning skin to remove.
on hands, Wait for the temperature to fall
under 50 °C. ––Apply clean oil to the gasket on the new filter.
 ––Install the filter. Turn the filter clockwise until the gasket
comes in contact with the filter head. Tighten the filter
an additional one half turn by hand.

WARNING: Only use genuine filter cartridges. Use

of spurious cartridges could damage the engine and
shorten its working life.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT use a filter wrench to install the

oil filter or you can cause damage to the gasket and filter.

Put a container of suitable size (see Lubricants and Fuels
chart for engine capacity) under the drain plug (1).
Remove the drain plug and drain the oil. Take care of hot
oil when draining.
––Install a new seal on the drain plug (1). Install the drain
plug in the crankcase and tighten.
––Fill with engine oil of correct grade, up to the MAX. level
(see Lubricants and Fuels chart). Never fill up to a level
higher than the MAX mark on the dipstick.
NOTE: Allow the oil to settle in the engine sump before
checking the level.

7-32 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance

STEP 26 IMPORTANT: Only use an approved fuel filter, these fil-

During running-in, the fuel filters should be changed
for the first two times after every 50 hours. Afterwards,
replace the fuel filter cartridges every 500 hours.
NOTE: Filter positions may vary according to tractor model.
ters have been specifically designed to provide superior
engine protection.
STEP 4
Fill the fuel tank and remove air from the fuel system. See
Fuel System Air Removal on the following pages.

The operations described hereunder must be carried out IMPORTANT: DO NOT crank the engine before removing
when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake all the air from the fuel system or the fuel injection pump
is engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard. can be damaged.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the
procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot water and
engine parts. [4.1.n]
WARNING: Engine fuel is flammable and can
cause a fire or an explosion. DO NOT fill the
fuel tank or service the fuel system near an
naked flame, welding, burning cigars, ciga-
rettes etc. [4.1.l]

STEP 1
Clean the filter head, filter and engine area next to the
filter before removing the filter.

STEP 2
7
Use a filter wrench to remove the filter.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filter in accordance with local

regulations. DO NOT drain fuel onto the ground, into a
drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible for
the environment.

STEP 3
Put clean oil or grease on the filter gasket of the new filter
before installing.

Install the filter by hand. Turn the filter until the gasket
contacts the filter head then turn a further 1/2 turn.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT fill the new filter with fuel before

installing.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-33

Maintenance
STEP 27
Change fuel/water separator filter element

The operations described hereunder must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is engaged
and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
Beware of burns caused by hot water and engine parts. [4.1.n]

STEP 1
Clean the filter head, filter and engine area next to the
filter before removing the filter.

STEP 2
Loosen the drain plug (1) on the bottom of the filter to
drain any water into a suitable container.

STEP 3
Support the filter and remove the retaining screw. Lower
the bottom glass bowl and element (2). Remove the ele-
ment from the glass bowl and discard.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of fuel and filter in accordance

with local law requirements. DO NOT drain fuel onto the
ground, into a drain or into a container that can leak. Be
responsible for the environment.

STEP 4
1
Clean the inside of the filter housing and install new
seals/"O" rings. Lubricate with clean fuel.

STEP 5
Install the filter element into the glass bowl and assemble
into the filter head.

NOTE: Make sure the element is installed in the centre

against the seal in the filter head.

IMPORTANT:Only use an approved fuel filter, these fil-

ters have been specifically designed to provide superior
engine protection.

STEP 6
Install the retaining screw. DO NOT over tighten.

STEP 7
Fill the fuel tank and remove air from the fuel system. See 2
following pages.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT crank the engine before removing

all the air from the fuel system or the fuel injection pump
can be damaged.

WARNING: Engine fuel is flammable and can

cause a fire or an explosion. DO NOT fill the
fuel tank or service the fuel system near an
naked flame, welding, burning cigars, ciga-
rettes etc. [4.1.l]

7-34 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
Remove air from fuel system Use the following procedure to remove air from the fuel
system.
Air can enter the fuel system in the following situations:
STEP 1
Make sure there is fuel in the tank.
A. If the fuel tank becomes empty or is low on fuel.
Turn the key switch to ON to energise the cut off solenoid.
B. After fuel system parts have been removed for service
STEP 2
or repairs.

C. If the tractor has been in a garage for a long period
of time.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT crank the engine before removing

all the air from the fuel system or the fuel injection pump
can be damaged.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
Two persons are required to carry out this operation
safely.

Shift the transmission to neutral and engage the parking

brake.

Always use the specific PPE for the operation con-

cerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water and
Operate the hand primer pump (1) until pressure is felt
engine parts.
against the pump.

STEP 3
Start the engine and check for fuel leaks around the filter,
the fuel lines and fittings.

If the engine fails to start operate the hand primer pump

again. If the engine still fails to start see your dealer.

WARNING: Never start the engine in a closed

place. Always make sure that there is adequate
ventilation.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-35

Maintenance
STEP 28
Replace the Blow-by filter
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried
out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand
brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the
dashboard.
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the
procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot water and
engine parts. [4.1.n]

The Blow-by filter (1) is intended to collect, filter and

condensate vapours of lubrication oil.
The filter body (1) holds two cartridges (2).
Loosen the six screws (4) to remove the filter cover (3)
and pull the cartridges out (2). Install two new cartridges.
Pay attention to the obligatory mounting position. Replace
the seal gasket on the cover. Install this back again and
tighten the screws correctly.

IMPORTANT: Only use original parts; these parts have

been specifically designed to provide superior engine
protection.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filter in accordance with local

law requirements. DO NOT drain fuel on the ground, into
a drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible
for the environment.

7-36 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
STEP 29
Change front PTO oil - Clean the oil filter
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

STEP 1 STEP 3
 

Put the tractor on level ground.
Remove the hose (1) and allow the oil to drain into a suit-
able container.
Remove the pump cover (4). Remove the oil filter (5) from
the pump unit and clean the filter.
STEP 4
Install the clean oil filter, the pump cover (4) and tighten
the bolt (3). Install the circlip (2).

For best results drain the oil after operation when the oil
is warm. Once the oil has completely drained re-attach STEP 5
the hose.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil according to local law re-
quirements. DO NOT DRAIN THE OIL ON THE GROUND
OR INTO A DRAIN. Be responsible for the environment.

STEP 2
 7

Top up with oil of the recommended type until the oil is

level with the bottom edge of the hole.

Wait approximately 5 minutes. Check the oil level again

and add oil as necessary. Install the plug and tighten.
Remove the circlip (2) and loosen the bolt (3).

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-37

Maintenance
STEP 30 STEP 31
Check/Adjust Auto Pick Up Hitch (if Replacement of hydraulic filters and
equipped, according to market) transmission oil
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera- See step “Replacement of hydraulic filters and trans-
tion concerned. mission oil” on page 7-42 .
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried
out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand 
brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the
dashboard.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and
engine parts. [4.1.n]

IMPORTANT: The filter must also be changed if the

service indicator lamp on the instrument cluster comes
on during operation.

IMPORTANT: Only use genuine spare parts.

As necessary or at least every 500 hours check the opera-
tion of the auto hitch and make sure the locking latches IMPORTANT: Dispose of filter in accordance with local
engage and the hitch is operating correctly. law requirements. DO NOT drain fuel on the ground, into
a drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible
WARNING: When checking the operation of for the environment.
the auto hitch, stay well clear of moving parts
or injury can result.

WARNING: Never start the engine in a closed

place. Always sure that there is suitable ven-
tilation.

WARNING: If the locking latches do not engage cor-

rectly the cable and/or the lift rods may need adjust-
ment. See your dealer to allow for necessary adjust-
ments to be carried out.

7-38 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
STEP 32
Check function of the operator de-
tector switch
Check the sensor for correct function every 500 hours of
operation or at least once annually. When doing the fol-
lowing checks, do so in a clear open area with no other
persons or objects near the tractor:

NOTE: For further information on the operator detector

sensor, see “Operator present sensor” on page 3-18 of this
manual.

To check the correct operation of the sensor, reproduce

the conditions described in the following table. If even one
of the conditions is not met, ask your dealer for service
to the system.

WARNING: DO NOT bypass the circuit of the

operator detector sensor. Otherwise the situ-
ation can be risky both for the operator and
the people near the tractor.
If the operator detector sensor circuit is
bypassed, the electronic system will sense
the change and transmit the error code. The
exclamation point in the instrument cluster
will light up. The circuit must be enabled in
any case.
Fig. VPO

With ignition key turned to ON, engine running:

In the cases given in the following table, the indicator on the instrument cluster and the buzzer are active until
the conditions for a correct use of the tractor are restored.

Operator position Operator lever Parking brake Buzzer sounding Indicator on instrument
position cluster
7
Sitting Neutral Engaged OFF Steady on

Sitting Neutral Released OFF OFF

Sitting Selected direction Engaged OFF Steady on

Sitting Selected direction Released OFF OFF

Not seated Neutral Engaged OFF Steady on

Not seated Neutral Released ON On and flashing

Not seated Selected direction Engaged ON Steady on

Not seated Selected direction Released ON On and flashing

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-39

Maintenance
1000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

STEP 33
Engine filter
Check all hoses for damage and that hose clamps are
tight, correct torque is about 3.4 Nm.

Filter restriction indicator lamp

When the air filter restriction indicator lamp (1) on the
instrument cluster comes on, the primary (outer) filter
element needs cleaning. Service the element after the
day's work is completed.

WARNING: Always stop the engine and remove the

ignition key before removing the filter elements.

The primary (outer) filter is a high capacity filter designed

to provide optimum protection to the engine.

The primary filter can be cleaned as required between filter

changes. See the following pages for service procedure.

The secondary (inner) filter gives extra protection to the

engine if there is damage to the primary filter.

IMPORTANT: THE SECONDARY (INNER) FILTER MUST

NOT BE CLEANED. REPLACE THE FILTER IF DAMAGED
OR DIRTY, OR AT THE THIRD CLEANING OF THE PRIMARY
FILTER.
NOTE: If the air filter restriction indicator lamp illuminates 
after the primary filter has been serviced, check the fol-
lowing possible causes:
A. Secondary (inner) element is dirty.
B. Grille screen is dirty.

If the service lamp is still on, ask your dealer.

2
WARNING: Before cleaning the filter with
compressed air, wear individual protections, 1
in particular goggles and a mask to protect
your airways.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filters correctly in accordance

with local regulations. Be responsible for the environment.
1. PRIMARY (OUTER) FILTER ELEMENT

2. SECONDARY (INNER) FILTER ELEMENT

IMPORTANT: ONLY use genuine air filters, as these fil-

ters are specifically designed to provide superior engine
protection.

7-40 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


Engine air filter service
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
1
2 3
WARNING: Before cleaning the filter with
compressed air, wear individual protections,
in particular goggles and a mask to protect
your airways.
STEP 1
Release the cover retaining clips (1) and remove the
cover (2).
STEP 2
Pull out the primary (outer) filter element (3).
STEP 3
Pull out the secondary (inner) filter element (4), if it has
to be changed.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove the secondary (inner)
element unless it has to be replaced.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT start the engine after removing
the air filters.
STEP 4
Clean the inside of the filter body (5).
IMPORTANT: Dispose of filters correctly in accordance
with local regulations. Be responsible for the environment.
STEP 5
Install a new secondary (inner) element (4), if necessary
or after the third cleaning of the primary filter (3). Apply
talcum powder or similar to the inner seal face before
installing the filter.
NOTE: NEVER use a petroleum base lubricant on the
seal area. Petroleum lubricant could “glue” the cover to
the element seal and damage the element.
STEP 6
If most of the dirt is dry, clean the primary element (3)
with compressed air from the inside of the element to
the outside.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Maintenance
4 5
Keep the air nozzle approximately 130 mm (5 inches) away
from the element and move the nozzle up and down while
turning the element.
IMPORTANT: The air pressure must not be more than 207
kPa, 2 bar (30 psi). Use an air hose with a safety ON/OFF
control nozzle and always wear face protection.
STEP 7
Visually check the rubber gasket for damage.
Check the metal cover and filter material for damage.
Replace an element that is damaged.
IMPORTANT: Do not run the engine with the filters
removed.
STEP 8
Before installing the primary (outer) element (3), apply
talcum powder or similar to the inner seal face before
installing the filter.
Install with closed end outwards.
NOTE: NEVER use a petroleum base lubricant on the 7
seal area. Petroleum lubricant could “glue” the cover to
the element seal and damage the element.
STEP 9
Install the air cleaner cover (2), rotate clockwise and push
the locking tabs (1) back into position to lock the cover
in place.
7-41
Maintenance
STEP 34
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

Replacement of hydraulic filters and transmission oil

Park the machine on hard level ground, engage the park brake and stop the engine.

STEP 1
Place suitable vessels under the drain plugs (1) in the following figure. Remove ALL the drain plugs (1). For best results
drain the oil when the oil is warm after operation.

STEP 2
Install and tighten the drain plugs (1) after the oil has drained.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters in accordance with local regulations. DO NOT drain the oil on the ground, into a
drain or put in a container that can leak. Be responsible for the environment.

7-42 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
STEP 3 Replacement of power steering circuit oil
Place a suitable vessel under the oil filter (2). Use a suit-
able filter wrench and remove the oil filter and filter O-ring.
filter
Change the element of the filter on the delivery of the
Turn the filter counter-clockwise.
steering circuit:

STEP 5
Place a suitable vessel under the oil filter (3). Unscrew
the holder (3), remove and discard the filter element (5).



4
5 7

3 6

IMPORTANT: The filter must also be changed if the

service indicator lamp on the instrument cluster comes Steering circuit oil filter
on during operation. 3 - Vessel
4 - Cover
IMPORTANT: Dispose of filter in accordance with local 5 - Filter element
law requirements. DO NOT drain fuel on the ground, into 6 - Washer
a drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible 7 - Retention ring
for the environment.
STEP 6
STEP 4 Fit the new filter element (5) into the cover of the filter (4).
Apply clean oil to the new O-ring 
and position inside the lip of the NOTE: To prevent the filter element from being dirtied
new filter.
Install the new filter by hand. Turn
the filter clockwise until the gasket
(with mud, etc.), only completely remove the plastic pro-
tection after fitting. 7
comes in contact with the filter STEP 7
head then tighten the filter by hand Mount the holder (3) after having oiled its threaded part,
a further 1/3 of a turn. the washer (6) and seal (7) with clean new oil. Take great
care to fit the individual parts in the right directions.

Change the seal (7) and the washer (5) every 1000
hours or whenever necessary.

STEP 8
IMPORTANT: DO NOT USE A FILTER WRENCH TO IN-
Fully screw on the holder (3) by hand.
STALL THE OIL FILTER. If the filter is too tight it can cause
damage to the gasket and filter.
IMPORTANT: Dispose of filter in accordance with local
law requirements. DO NOT drain fuel on the ground, into
IMPORTANT: Only use genuine spare parts.
a drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible
for the environment.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-43

Maintenance
STEP 9 Cleaning of inner metal filter
Place a suitable vessel under the oil filter (8). Unscrew the
filter (8) and replace with a new one. IMPORTANT: Each time the transmission oil is changed,
clean the inner metal filter (9) and (19) located where
indicated in the following figure.

Place a suitable vessel under the metal filters (9) and

(10). Remove the filters from the transmission housing
and clean.
Fit the filters back again after cleaning.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filter in accordance with local

law requirements. DO NOT drain fuel on the ground, into
a drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible
for the environment.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT drain fuel on the ground, into a

drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible for
the environment.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor
and engine parts [4.1.n]

7-44 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
Replacement of transmission housing vent Top up of transmission oil
Unscrew the vent (11) and replace with a new one. Top up with the recommended oil through the fill tube (12)
located at the rear of the transmission to the correct level.

WARNING: See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for the

correct type of oil required.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor
and engine parts [4.1.n]

Start the engine and run for approximately 5 minutes

checking for oil leaks around the drain plugs and hydraulic
filters.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor
and engine parts [4.1.n]

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-45

Maintenance
STEP 35
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

Front axle oil change STEP 3

Install the drain plug and tighten.
WARNING: Before carrying out any servic-
ing on tractors equipped with independent STEP 4
front suspension, make sure the axle is fully 
lowered to the bottom mechanical stop, the
engine is not running and the keyswitch is
not inserted. Failure to do this may result in
serious injury.

STEP 1
Put the tractor on level ground and put a suitable size
container under the drain plug.

STEP 2


RIGID AXLE

RIGID AXLE

SUSPENDED AXLE

Remove the fill/level plug (2). Add the recommended oil

type until the oil is level with the bottom edge of the hole.
Wait approximately 5 minutes. Check the oil level again
and add oil as necessary.

NOTE: If required, an additive for limited slipping can be

found at your Dealer's. Add 30 ml additive for each litre of
oil in the housing.
SUSPENDED AXLE
STEP 5
Remove the drain plug (1), located on the bottom of the Fit the fill/level plug back and tighten.
axle housing at the rear, and drain the oil. For best results
drain the oil when the oil is warm after operation.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters according to local

law requirements. DO NOT drain oil on the ground, into a
drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible for
the environment.

7-46 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

Oil change in the final drives

STEP 1
Park the tractor on level ground and turn each hub until
the plug (1) is at the bottom.

STEP 2
Put a suitable size container under the plug. Remove the
plug. For best results drain the oil when the oil is warm
(after operation).

STEP 3
After the oil has drained, turn each wheel hub until the
plug is at the 3 or 9 o'clock position. Top up with oil of the
recommended type: until the oil is level with the bottom
edge of the hole. Wait approximately 5 minutes for the
oil to settle, then check the oil level again and add oil if
necessary.

STEP 4
Install the plug and tighten.
7
IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters according to local
law requirements. DO NOT drain oil on the ground, into a
drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible for
the environment.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-47

Maintenance
STEP 36 STEP 37
Injectors and fuel system
Engine valves
Have the tappet and valve gaps checked by your Dealer's WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the
authorized personnel. procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
 tion concerned.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried
out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand
brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the
dashboard.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot engine
parts. [4.1.n]

Have the injectors and fuel system checked by your

Dealer's specialised personnel.

NOTE: Thoroughly clean the area in which you must

work before loosening or disconnecting any part of the
injection system.

NOTE: Place covers on all the tubes and injector orifices

to prevent dirt from penetrating.

Check condition of fuel injectors

The fuel injectors must not be cleaned. New injectors
must be fitted by your dealer if there is damage or a fault
occurs as listed below:
–– Engine will not start or is difficult to start.
–– Not enough power.
–– Engine misfires or runs erratically.
–– High fuel consumption.
–– Black exhaust smoke.
–– Engine knocks or vibration.
–– Excessive engine temperature.

7-48 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
STEP 38 STEP 39
Pneumatic trailer brakes
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the
procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet". (if installed)
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned. WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried tion concerned.
out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried
brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand
dashboard. brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot engine dashboard.
parts. [4.1.n] WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and
engine parts. [4.1.n]

Starter motor Replace the dehydrator filter (1) of the trailer air brake
The starter motor (1) should be thoroughly cleaned at system.
least once a year. Particularly check the condition of the
brushes and collector. Unscrew the filter.

Alternator
Have the condition and operation of the alternator (2)
checked by a specialised workshop.

IMPORTANT: The old filter MUST be put into a sealed

container and disposed of in accordance with local regula-
tions. Be responsible for the environment.

Screw down the new filter.

NOTE: Replace the filter only with genuine spare parts.

7

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-49

Maintenance
STEP 40 STEP 2
Replacement of cab air intake filter
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried
out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand
brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the
dashboard.

WARNING: Respiratory protection equipment

and protective clothing appropriate to the
environment that the filter has been in con-
tact with MUST be used during the cleaning
of the filter.

WARNING: Do not stand on the tractor to serv-

Install the new filter (1).
ice the filter, use the correct equipment for a
Close the cover and fix it with the knobs (2).
safe standing platform or injury can result.
NOTE: Replace the filter only with genuine spare parts.
STEP 1
WARNING: See the procedure to check and
clean the cab air intake filter under service
operations at 100 hours, the notes for the cor-
rect use of the cab filters, and the precautions
when using dangerous chemicals.

Cab doors
Grease door locks and hinges

Loosen both knobs (2) fixing the cover.

Open the filter cover and take the filtering element (1) out.
Clean the filter seat.

IMPORTANT: The old filter MUST be put into a sealed

container and disposed of in accordance with local regula-
tions. Be responsible for the environment.

7-50 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
STEP 41 STEP 42

AC compressor Anti-freeze in engine cooling sys-

Have the air conditioning system operation checked by
specialized personnel at your Argo Tractors dealer. Also
check the air conditioning system and the lubricating oil
level in the compressor (1).
tem
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the
procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried
out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand
brake is engaged and the key is not inserted in the
dashboard.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot engine
parts. [4.1.n]

Once a year, before winter, check the anti-freeze fluid in

the engine cooling system.
See “Check coolant level” on page 7-17.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-51

Maintenance
1500 HOUR MAIN SERVICE
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

STEP 43 STEP 4
Install the drain plug (1) and tighten.
Oil replacement in the rear axle final
drives STEP 5
Remove the oil fill plug (2). Add the recommended oil type
Park the machine on hard level ground, engage the park until the oil is level with the bottom edge of the hole. Wait
brake and stop the engine. a few minutes for the oil to settle, then check the oil level
again and add oil if necessary.
NOTE: The following operations are to be carried out on
both rear final drives.

STEP 1
Put a suitable size container under the plug (1).

STEP 6
Fit the plug (2) back and tighten.

WARNING: See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for the

correct type of oil required.
STEP 2
Remove the drain plug (1) and drain the oil. For best results
drain the oil when the oil is warm after operation.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters according to local

law requirements. DO NOT drain oil on the ground, into a
drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible for
the environment.

STEP 3
Install the drain plug (1) and tighten.

7-52 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
2000 HOUR MAIN SERVICE
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out when the engine is off. Make sure that the hand brake is
engaged and the key is not inserted in the dashboard.
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot water and engine parts. [4.1.n]

STEP 44 STEP 4
Close the radiator drain valve (2) and install the drain plug
Engine coolant change (1) when the system is empty.
STEP 1
STEP 5
Remove the radiator cap slowly.
Use a good quality radiator cleaner and fill the system.
Follow the instructions given with the radiator cleaner to
WARNING: Hot coolant can spray out if the
clean the system.
coolant recovery reservoir cap or radiator
cap is removed while system is hot. DO NOT
STEP 6
REMOVE RADIATOR CAP. To remove the cool-
Remove the engine block drain plug and open the radiator
ant recovery reservoir cap or radiator cap,
drain valve. Flush the system with clean water to remove
let system cool, turn cap to first notch, then
the radiator cleaner solution.
wait until all pressure is released. Scalding
Allow cleaning solution to drain into suitable containers.
can result from fast removal of radiator cap.
IMPORTANT: Dispose of the cleaning solution respon-
STEP 2
sibly. DO NOT pour on the ground or into a drain. Be
 responsible for the environment.

STEP 7
Inspect the hoses and fittings for damage and leaks.

STEP 8
Install the engine block drain plug, close radiator drain
valve and remove drain hose.

STEP 9
–– Fill the cooling system with the coolant solution as
specified on the next page.
–– Start the engine and run at low idle for approximately
Put a suitable container under the engine block drain plug 10 minutes.
(1) (located in the water inlet housing) and remove plug. –– Stop the engine and check the coolant level.
–– Replenish as required.
STEP 3

7

Put a hose on the radiator drain valve (2) and open valve.
Drain coolant into a suitable container.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of used drained coolant respon-

sibly. DO NOT pour on the ground or into a drain. Be
responsible for the environment.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-53

Maintenance
Precautions against freezing tem- STEP 45
peratures
Fuel system general inspection
The system is filled with a mixture of water and antifreeze.
Add the proportion of antifreeze given in the following Every 2000 hours of operation see your Dealer for an
table. inspection of the fuel system and fuel injection nozzles.
Moreover, have the engine checked for tuning-up.

Degrees °C - 8° - 15° - 25° - 35° To prevent dirt or water from reaching the injection parts
and causing damage and decreased performance, use
Antifreeze percentage by clean fuel, keep the fuel tank full, drain any water from the
20 30 40 50
volume, % fuel primary filter at regular intervals and service the filters.

This mixture can be permanently maintained in the circuit

for 1 year so long as you have not totalised 1000 hours
service during this period. In this case, the mixture must
be changed.

Flush out the system whenever you change from using

pure water to antifreeze mixtures and vice versa.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot water and
engine parts. [4.1.n]

SERVICE EVERY 3600 HOURS SERVICE OR EVERY 2 HOURS

STEP 46

Main filter of AdBlue™ or DEF sys-

tem.
The replacement of the main filter (2) of the AdBlue™ or
DEF injection system, located under the system control
unit, must be carried out by the specialised personnel of
your Dealer.

NOTE:During the second intervention (at 7200 hours),

change the prefilter (3).

IMPORTANT: Only use original parts; these parts have

been specifically designed to provide superior engine
protection.
1 - Controller of AdBlue™ or DEF injection system
IMPORTANT: Dispose of filter in accordance with local 2 - Main filter
law requirements. DO NOT drain fuel on the ground, into 3 - Prefilter
a drain or into a container that can leak. Be responsible
for the environment.

7-54 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Air conditioning system
WARNING: Never attempt to open the air conditioning system. Liquid refrigerant can cause severe and
painful frostbite. Contact your dealer, who is experienced in servicing and handling of refrigerants.

Air conditioned cab
Besides being able to provide an optimum temperature
in the cab, this system also lowers the degree of humid-
ity in the air.
Safety notes
The air conditioner is a safe system that is able to ensure
lasting and risk-free use. However, it is important to com-
ply with certain simple precautions (listed below) in order
to prevent possible accidents.
• Never work on the conditioning system yourselves.
Always contact the specialised technicians of the
Assistance Service.
• Coolant can freeze the skin and particularly the eyes.
Proceed in the following way if accidents occur:
– if coolant has splashed into the eyes, wash them out
immediately with a few drops of mineral oil, then
continue to wash them with a solution of boric acid
and water (one teaspoon of acid in 1/4 of a cup of
water) and immediately seek medical help;
– areas frozen by coolant fluid can be treated by pro-
gressively warming the injured zone with cold water
and then applying a greasy cream.
However, always seek medical help if such accidents
occur.
• Keep the air conditioning system well away from heat
sources as explosions could occur.

• Keep naked flames well away from the air conditioning

system (Fig.131) as leaking coolant could give rise to
a deadly gas: phosgene..
System check
The cab air conditioner is equipped with a system to
protect the compressor from high or low refrigerant
pressures.
7
Have your conditioning system checked once a year by
specialised personnel at your Dealer's.

DANGER: Always wear protective clothing in

case of leaks. Coolant can injury the eyes.
The coolant produces a toxic gas if it contacts
a flame.

• The mixture of oil and coolant in the air conditioning

system is under pressure.
Never ever loosen any unions or tamper with the
pipes.
For the same reason, you must never unscrew the
compressor's oil level check plug.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-55

Maintenance
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: service operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking brake
are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
Periodical inspections
At least once every three months:
– remove any foreign bodies from between the evapora-
tor and condenser fins;
– check the tension of the compressor belt;
– allow the engine to run at a rate of 1500 rpm. In the
meantime keep the dehydrator filter under observa-
tion: the glass should be clear, without any air bubbles
or white liquid.
– check the conditions of the pipes, unions and support-
ing brackets;
– make sure that the drain pipes are efficient and remove
the condensation from the evaporator;
– make sure that the screws and fixing nuts of the pul-
leys and compressor are well tightened.
Maintenance
If the conditioning system remains unused for a long pe-
riod of time, it must be turned on for a few minutes each
month to allow the oil to circulate around the circuit and
to keep the seals in an efficient condition.
Only operate the conditioner when the engine is hot and
the temperature in the cab has reached 20°C.
Yearly maintenance
Have your Dealer's specialized personnel carry out the
following operations at the beginning of the season:
– check the level of the oil in the compressor and top it
up if necessary;
– make sure that the system is tight by means of a leak
tester and top up the HFC 134a gas if necessary, or
– replace the dehydrator filter only if strictly necessary;
– carry out a functional test on the system.
General maintenance of the cab
After servicing the external parts of the cab, proceed with
the following inspections:
1. Periodically check to make sure that no water has col-
lected in the zones covered with mats or upholstery.
7-56
2. Protect the hinges and locks of the doors, sun roof
and openable windows with
water-repellent lubricating products.
3. Use special cleaning products to clean the windows,
or sulfuric ether, if necessary.
4. Detach the windscreen wiper and sprinkle talcum on
the rubber wiper.
5. Leave the doors or sun-roof partially open.
Cab upholstery
WARNING: Use water and a neutral detergent to clean
the coatings, the controls and the PU dashboard. Any
commercial product to clean car interiors may be used
DO NOT use any products deriving from hydrocar-
bons, ketonic or aromatic solvents, or cleaning spirits
of any kind.
Specifications
Coolant fluid..........................................................R 134 A
Air conditioning system reloading
- Quantity of gas to be loaded: 1750 g (+/- 25 g)
- - Keep the gas unit steady when filling the circuit, in
order to allow for a precise reading of the gas weight.
- Operating pressure (20 bar).
IMPORTANT: This tractor uses a R134 coolant that does
not damage the ozone layer. Never recharge the air con-
ditioning system with refrigerant other than HFC-134a as
this will result in loss of cooling and permanent damage
to all air conditioning components.
Check the tension of the compressor belt as indicated in
the Routine Maintenance chapter.
DANGER: Wear safety garments and goggles
in case of leaks. Coolant can injury the eyes.
The coolant produces a toxic gas if it contacts
a flame.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1
 Maintenance
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the operation concerned.
WARNING: service operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the parking brake
are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

Viscous fan drive DO NOT use any products deriving from hydrocar-
bons, ketonic or aromatic solvents, or cleaning spirits
of any kind.

Inspection and maintenance of safety

belts

WARNING: Always securely fasten your safety

–– During cleaning and maintenance of the engine and
radiator, be careful not to cause damage to the viscous
fan drive.
–– DO NOT restrict the fan blade rotation during engine
operation.
–– DO NOT remove the bi-metal coil (1) on the front of
the drive.
–– Check the fan and drive for external damage or erratic
operation. See your dealer if service is required.
Clean the Operator's Seat
Before removing stains, use a vacuum cleaner to remove
loose dirt.
Find what type and how old the stains are. Some stains
can be removed with water or soap solution.
belt. Your tractor is equipped with a ROPS cab
or frame for your protection. The seat belt
can help insure your safety if it is used and
maintained. Never wear a seat belt loosely or
with slack in the belt system. Never wear the
belt in a twisted condition or pinched between
the seat structural members.
- Keep sharp edges and items that can cause damage,
away from the belt.
- From time to time, check belt, buckles and mounting
bolts for damage.
- Replace all parts that are worn or damaged.
- Replace a belt that has cuts that can weaken the belt.
- Check that the bolts are tight on the seat bracket.
- Keep seat belt clean and dry.
- Clean belt only with a soap solution and warm water.
- Do not use bleach or dye on the belt because this can
make the belt weak.
Hosed and electric cables - General
overhaul of the tractor
Inspect the hoses and fittings for damage and leaks.

7
CLEANER FLUID - This type of cleaner can be used for Check all hoses for damage and that hose clamps are
grease or oil stains, follow manufactures instructions. tight, correct torque is about 3.4 Nm.

FOAM CLEANER: This type of cleaner is good for all Check all wiring for damage. If damaged, contact your
stains, follow manufactures instructions. Dealer for the genuine Argo Tractors spare parts.

WARNING: Never use petroleum spirit, naph-

tha or any other volatile material for any
cleaning purposes. These materials may be
toxic and/or flammable.

NOTE: Do not make the material wet or clean with a hard

brush. Clean with a damp cloth only. Immediately after the
material is clean, dry the material with dry cloth.

Dashboard and control coverings

WARNING: Use water and a neutral detergent to clean
the coatings, the controls and the PU dashboard. Any
commercial product to clean car interiors may be
used.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-57

Maintenance
Preparing for long idle periods WARNING: At the end of the idle period, when you
Take the following precautionary measures when your start the engine again, pay particular attention to the
tractor is not going to be used for a long period of time. instructions about starting the engine in the Opera-
tion chapter.
To carry out the operations described hereunder, see the
sections relative to the maintenance of the various parts.
Always use specific personal safety devices for each Removing the tractor from storage
service operation.
WARNING: At the end of the idle period, when you
- park the tractor in a dry, sheltered place start the engine again, pay particular attention to the
- deactivate the battery master disconnect switch; instructions about starting the engine in the Opera-
tion chapter.
- d rain, flush and fill the cooling system with the correct
antifreeze mixture to protect the tractor to the lowest
To carry out the operations described hereunder, see the
anticipated temperature.
sections relative to the maintenance of the various parts.
- grease all points provided with grease nipples Always use specific personal safety devices for each
- clean the fuel filter service operation.
- Open the fuel filter drain plug and remove contaminated
- remove the injectors and squirt a small quantity of
fuel. Close the drain plug.
engine oil into the cylinders. Turn the engine over by
- top up the level of oil in the engine crankcase.
hand, then fit the injectors back in place (have this done
- check the coolant level in the reservoir and radiator.
by an authorised workshop).
- check that the batteries are fully charged.
- generally clean the tractor, particularly the bodywork - connect the ground cable(s) (-) and tighten all terminals.
components. Protect the painted parts by applying - check the transmission/hydraulic fluid level and link-
silicone wax and the unpainted metal parts by applying ages.
protective lubricant. Park the tractor in a dry, sheltered - check the front (if equipped) and rear hitch.
and possibly ventilated place. - check and adjust the tension on all drive belts.
- make sure that all controls are in neutral (including the - inflate the tyres to the correct operating pressures.
electric switches and parking brake controls) - make sure that all shields and guards are in the correct
position.
- remove the ignition key from the ignition switch
- do not accelerate the engine rapidly, or operate at high
- make sure that the cylinder stems (of the power steer- RPM immediately after starting.
ing, hitch systems, etc.) are positioned
- empty the fuel tank and fill it with new diesel fuel until WARNING: Before starting the engine, be sure
the maximum level is reached all operating controls are in neutral and the
park brake applied. This will eliminate acci-
- the batteries do not need to be removed from the trac-
dental movement of the machine on start-up
tor, except for extended storage (more than 30 days)
or power driven equipment.
below freezing temperatures. The batteries must be
fully charged to prevent freezing. Disconnect the nega-
WARNING: Do not operate the engine in a
tive (-) ground cable at the batteries to prevent possible
closed building. Always make sure that there
discharge.
is adequate ventilation.
- for long idle periods, remove the battery, clean the cover
and spread Vaseline on the terminals and terminal caps.
Now place the battery in a ventilated place where the
temperature is not liable to drop below 10 ℃ and where
it is not exposed to direct sunlight
- check the battery charge with a voltmeter as described
in the battery part of this section. Recharge if it is neces-
sary
- store the tractor where there is protection from sunlight.
Clean the tyres.
- place stands or other supports under the axles in order
to take the weight off the wheels. When the tractor is
raised in this way, it is advisable to deflate the tyres. If
this is not possible, the tyre pressure must be periodi-
cally checked.
- cover the tractor with a tarpaulin (not plastic or water-
proof).

7-58 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Maintenance
Fire prevention

To carry out the operations described hereunder, see the

sections relative to the maintenance of the various parts.
Always use specific personal safety devices for each
service operation.

Fire risks can be minimised by frequent removal of accu-

mulated crop material, trash or debris from the machine.

Remove all crop material, trash or debris at the start of

each working day. Take extra care to make sure the engine
area and exhaust system are clean.

It is your responsibility to remove and/or clean your ma-

chine on a regular basis.

Fire risk can also be minimised by prompt repairing of

leaks and cleaning up fuel and oil spills.

Engine fuel is flammable and can cause a fire or an

explosion. DO NOT fill the fuel tank or service the fuel
system near an naked flame, welding, burning cigars,
cigarettes etc.

Sparks or flames can cause the hydrogen gas in a battery

to explode. To prevent an explosion, do the following:

- When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the

negative (-) cable first. When connecting the battery
cables, connect the negative (-) cable last.

- DO NOT connect jumper cables to start the engine. The

engine can be started ONLY by the ignition procedure
described in this manual.

- DO NOT short circuit the battery posts with metal

items.

- DO NOT solder or smoke near the battery.

Check the electrical system for loose, tampered with or

poorly insulated connections. Repair or replace the loose 7
or damaged parts.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 7-59

Maintenance

Page left intentionally blank.

7-60 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Electrical system

Section 8
Electrical system 8

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 8-1

Electrical system

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery Fig.IE1
With a maintenance free battery, it is normally not neces-
sary to frequently check the electrolyte and charge levels.
It is advisable, however, to periodically check the level of
battery acid and to add distilled water if required.
If you need to top up too often, have the battery charging
system checked.
Check the level of the electrolyte in each element. If top-
ping up is required, proceed as follows, with the engine
stopped, the battery at rest and cold, and the tractor
parked on level ground.
1 - Turn the battery disconnecting switch to the "battery
disconnected" position.
2 - Remove the clip (1) and the guard (2) to access the
battery.
3 - Remove the plugs and check the liquid level.
4 - Slowly pour in the distilled water, until the top edge
of the plates is completely covered. Fig.IE1
5 - Fit the plugs back and close the battery compartment.
WARNING: According to the Law it is mandato-
WARNING: Do not use acid to top up the bat- ry to dispose of batteries in suitable containers
tery. The electrolyte will boil over. Use only provided to this purpose at authorised centres.
deionised distilled water and top up to a level DO NOT dispose of them in the environment.
of 5/6 mm over the battery cells.

WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling.

Check the charge condition with a voltmeter. Do not use
quick battery chargers to recharge the batteries.
NOTE: if the battery must be topped up frequently or tends
to discharge, have the electrical system of your tractor
checked by your area Dealer's specialised personnel.
WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the
procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and
engine parts. [4.1.n]

WARNING: Remember to disconnect the wires

before you recharge the battery. It is advisable
to remove the battery from its housing and to
recharge it well away from the tractor.

WARNING: The place in which the battery is

recharged must be well ventilated. Do not
smoke or work with tools liable to produce
sparks or flames whilst the battery is being
recharged. [4.1.l]

8-2 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Electrical system

Removal and Installation of Batteries
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the op-
eration concerned.
NOTE: The batteries can be disconnected without any of
the information memorised in the digital instrument panel
being lost. When the batteries are connected again, the
instrument panel will have retained all the information
memorised, such as the tyre size code, etc.

STEP 1
WARNING: incorrect connection of the aux-
iliary batteries or battery charger may cause
the actual batteries to explode and/or damage
to parts of the electrical system. The positive
pole must be connected to the positive pole
and the negative pole to the negative pole. The
battery acid can cause burns or blindness and
is poisonous if swallowed.

Remove the clip (1) from the battery compartment cover,

then remove the cover (2).

STEP 2

To remove the batteries, disconnect the cables from the

negative and positive terminals, then remove the batter-
ies. When the batteries are fit back again, make sure the 8
cables are connected to the correct terminals. The electri-
cal system is 12 volt, negative ground. Both batteries are
connected in parallel.

Fit the protective cover back in place. Remount the tool

box and its bracket, if they had been removed.

IMPORTANT: Always disconnect the ground wire first

and connect it last in order to avoid sparks. Never start
or run the engine if the electrical system has not been
completely connected.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 8-3

Electrical system
Recommendations [4.1.l]
The following rules must be respected to preserve an
efficient battery:
- Keep the battery clean and dry, particularly on top.
- If the battery acid must be topped up, use distilled water
only,
- Make sure that the cable terminal nuts are well fixed to
the battery terminals.
- Always use a wrench and not pliers to tighten and
loosen the terminal nuts.
- Smear terminals with petroleum jelly (not grease) to
protect them from oxidation.
- Never let the battery run completely down. If possible,
recharge monthly.
WARNING: Battery electrolyte contains sul-
furic acid and can cause serious burns. The
following good practices are therefore recom-
mended.
- Wear leather heavy-duty gloves and protective
clothes. In case of contact with the skin, wash with
plenty of water.
- Batteries release flammable gases that can cause an
explosion.
- DO NOT go near the battery with naked flames or
cigarettes.
- In case of contact with the eyes, first flush with water,
then seek medical help.
- Keep batteries well out of children's reach.
- It contains lead: NEVER dispose of batteries in gen-
eral waste.
- Deliver and dispose of exhausted batteries only
in suitable containers provided to this purpose at
authorised centres, according to local rules.
NOTE: Proceed as described below when the old battery
must be replaced with a new one:
- deactivate the battery master disconnect switch;
- first disconnect the terminal with the negative (-) sign
and then the one with the positive (+) sign;
- fit the new battery into its housing without tightening
the fixing screws too much;
- clean the terminals and connect them to the battery
poles. Make sure you connect the positive (+) pole
first and the negative (-) pole last;
- fully tighten the terminal screws on to the poles and
protect them with Vaseline.
8-4
Battery system servicing
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
Follow these general rules to prevent damage to the
electrical system.
• Before working on the electrical system, disconnect
the battery cables, ground cable first, or turn off the
master switch and remove the key.
• Do not make a reverse battery connection.
• When you use an auxiliary battery for starting, connect
negative (-) to negative (-) and positive (+) to positive
(+). Use the auxiliary battery connections provided on
the tractor (if equipped).
• When charging the tractor batteries, use the auxiliary
battery connections on the tractor (if equipped). Do not
attach directly to the battery terminals. Do not use a
battery charging machine for starting the tractor.
• Never operate the tractor when the battery cables are
disconnected.
• When you carry out maintenance on the engine, cover
the alternator to prevent foreign material from entering.
• If electric welding is necessary, do the following to
protect the electrical components:
A. Disconnect the batteries or turn off the master
switch (if equipped).
B. Disconnect the instrument cluster harness.
C. Disconnect the alternator.
D. Disconnect all controllers and in particular the en-
gine controller.
Put the welding equipment ground cable as close as you
can to the weld area.
Do not put the ground cable where the current can flow
through bearings or along channels with wiring harnesses.
When batteries are no longer used
When the tractor is not used, the batteries should be
charged every six weeks to maintain their charges. The
battery will slowly discharge when it is not used. A dis-
charged battery may freeze at low temperatures, causing
damage to the tractor and to the battery itself.
NOTE: Do not discard batteries along with normal waste as
they damage the environment. Contact your local selective
waste collection centre or your dealer for information about
how to dispose of batteries in the correct way.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1
 Electrical system

Connection of a booster battery to

the positive battery terminal on the
tractor
IMPORTANT: When connecting a booster battery to the
tractor positive terminal, make sure the batteries are the
same voltage (i.e. 12 Volt) and the electrolyte is at the cor-
rect level. NEVER connect the cables of auxiliary batteries
to the terminals of the starter motor. Always start the engine
from the operator's seat.

WARNING: Always connect the ground cable

last and disconnect the ground cable first so
you do not cause a spark at the battery. A spark
can cause a battery explosion and cause injury.
Fig.IE2
Procedure
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.

STEP 1
Position the machine with the booster battery next to the
tractor so that the booster cables can be connected eas-
ily. MAKE SURE THE MACHINES ARE NOT TOUCHING.

STEP 2
Remove the red cap from the positive terminal (1).
Connect the booster battery positive (+) to the
tractor positive terminal (+) and the negative (-)
to a good ground on the tractor frame, not to the
tractor battery terminal.

STEP 3
Start the engine of the machine with the booster battery
and run the engine for approximately 2 minutes.

STEP 4
Start the tractor engine. See correct procedure in this
manual.

STEP 5
When the tractor engine has started, disconnect the nega-
tive booster cable from the tractor frame and the booster
battery negative first, then the positive cable from the
tractor terminal and the booster battery.
Install the red cap on the positive terminal after the start-
8
ing operation has been completed.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 8-5

Electrical system
Starter motor
The starter motor should be thoroughly cleaned after pe-
riods of 1000 hours or at least once a year. Particularly
check the condition of the brushes and collector.
Alternator
The alternator keeps the battery fully charged.
The alternator is a brushless model and requires no special
maintenance. However, the following precautions must
be observed.
1 - When fitting a battery, make sure that the positive
and negative terminals are connected to the same
leads as the alternator. If the battery terminals are
inverted, you will short circuit the battery through the
alternator diodes.
2 - When connecting the battery to a charger, make sure
that the positive (+) lead of the charger is connected
to the positive of the battery and the negative (-) to
the negative. Incorrect connection will damage the
diodes and the other circuit components.
3 - Never run the alternator unless it is properly con-
nected.
If the battery is not connected, high voltages can build
up inside the alternator that can be extremely danger-
ous if the output terminal is touched.
Make sure that all connections are firm and tight
before carrying out any inspections or tests on the
electrical system.
4 - Never short circuit or earth any of the alternator ter-
minals. This could damage the electrical system.
5 - Never invert the alternator connections. The battery
and alternator earths must be of the same sign or
the alternator diodes will be damaged.
6 - Always disconnect both alternator terminals before
undertaking any electric arc welding on the tractor.
CAUTION Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
A B
Fig. IE3
8-6
Electrical system - Warnings
It is absolutely forbidden to make changes or connections
to the data interconnecting lines between control units
(CAN-BUS lines). They are to be considered as INVIOLA-
BLE. All diagnostic and maintenance operations may only
be carried out by authorised technicians, with specific
appliances approved by Argo Tractors.
Use only fuses with the rated capacity for their specific
function. Do not ever use fuses with higher rated capacity.
Replace a blown fuse only after correcting the relative mal-
function and turn off any keys and users before replacing.
Please keep in mind that electrical systems made by un-
qualified persons might severely damage the systems on
board the tractor (control units, harnesses, sensors etc.),
and jeopardize the riding safety and good operation of
the tractor. Such damages ARE NOT COVERED BY OUR
CONTRACT WARRANTY.
Never disconnect control unit and sensor connectors
while the engine is running and the control units are
powered.
Negative conductors connected to a grounding point of
the system must be as short as possible and star con-
nected with each other.
As a principle, the grounding connections of the tractor
may not be changed.
If the creation of further grounding points is required, the
holes already provided on the frame must be used, taking
care of the following
- remove lacquer from the frame
- use a suitable highly conductive lacquer between frame
and cable terminal.
- connect the ground within 5 minutes from lacquer ap-
plication.
THE POINTS PROVIDED FOR ENGINE CONNECTION
TO GROUND MUST BE ABSOLUTELY AVOIDED FOR
GROUND CONNECTIONS - IE3.
1- Ground connection; A. Efficient grounding point; B.
Not efficient grounding point.
2 - Cable fastening: A. Screw; B. Cable terminal; C.
Washer; D. Nut.
3- Correctly grounded cable.
X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1
 Electrical system

Headlights
As you can use your tractor on public roads, the lighting
must comply with the applicable traffic and road regula-
tions. Periodically check headlight alignment in the fol-
lowing way:
Checking headlight alignment (Fig.IE5)

- Halt the tractor on level ground facing a shaded wall

(preferably white). The tractor must be unloaded and
the tyres correctly inflated. Mark two crosses on the
wall in front of the tractor headlight centres.

- Reverse the tractor 5 meters (16.4 ft) away from the

wall.

- Switch on the main beam. Fig.IE4 - Screws for headlight alignment.

The centre of each beam must be vertically aligned with
the crosses on the wall.
A maximum outward divergence of 130 mm (5 in) is
acceptable. WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the
procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
- Switch on the dipped beams.
The line separating the lighted area from the dark area WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
must fall below the crosses and must be separated tion concerned.
from their centres by at least 1/20th of the height of
the crosses from the ground. WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and
engine parts. [4.1.n]
- Adjust the headlight alignment screws to correct align-
ment as required (1 - Fig.IE4).

Fig.IE5 - Checking headlight alignment

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 8-7

Electrical system

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and
engine parts. [4.1.n]

How to replace the headlight bulbs

- Fig.IE6

1 - Remove the connector (3).

2 - Remove the rubber guard (2).
3 - Slacken off the retention spring (4).
4 - Remove the faulty bulb (1).
5 - Fit in a new bulb. Remember not to hold the bulb in
your hand. Use a cloth to handle the bulb whilst it is Fig. IE6
being fitted.
6 - Fit the parts back in place by proceeding through the
instructions in reverse order.

How to replace the bulbs in the front

side lights and hazard lights (Fig. IE7)

1 - Loosen the screws and remove the glass cover.

2 - Replace the faulty bulb.
3 - Fit the glass again with the screws removed earlier.

Fig. IE7

8-8 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Electrical system

FUSES AND RELAYS

(valid up to tractor with serial number ****R45249)

The tractor's electrical system is protected by fuses

against short circuits and excessive power draw. The
number of the fuses in the electrical system depends on
the tractor model.

NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,

equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be
ascertained and removed.

WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the first

gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking brake,
remove the ignition key and disconnect the battery.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [4.1.n]

PDU box fuses (Fig. IE8)

The PDU box is installed into the battery compartment.
Access the PDU fuses as follows:
A. Remove the clip (1) and the guard (2).
B. Push on the tabs and remove the cover (3) from the Fig. IE8
PDU box.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 8-9

Electrical system

(valid up to tractor with serial number ****R45249)

NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,

equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be
ascertained and removed.

WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the first

gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking brake
and remove the ignition key.

Fuse User - Fig. IE9 Amp.

FG1 Fuel heater 25
FG2 Engine control unit 30
FG3 DC / DC converter 30
FG4 Starting 30
FG5 Empty -
FG6 Empty -
FG7 Empty -
FG8 Empty -
F1 DCM controller 20
F2 NOx controller 5
F3 Empty -
F4 S16 power 7.5
F5 Empty -
F6 Alternator 200
F7 Cab power 150
F8 Glow plugs 100 Fig. IE9

Relays Function - Fig. IE9

K Glow plugs (Fig. IE10)
K1 Starter motor
K2 Start safeties
K3 Fuel heater
K4 NOx controller
S6 Disconnect switch

Fig. IE10

8-10 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Electrical system

Front fuses and relays (only with

front end PTO)
(Fig. IE11)
(valid up to tractor with serial number ****R45249)

Fuses FL1, FL2 and relay KL1 are installed in the front
end, on the right side near the radiator. The bonnet must
be opened to access them.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
Always wait for the engine to cool down before open-
ing the bonnet. Act very carefully.

Fig. IE11
Code Function - Fig. IE11 Amp.
Key-activated fuse for front auxiliary
FL1 25
socket
FL2 Fuse for front auxiliary socket 5
KL1 Front auxiliary socket relay -

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 8-11

Electrical system

Fuses and relays in cab

(valid up to tractor with serial number ****R45249)

Fuses and relays are housed in the console behind the

driver's seat. To access the fuses or relays, just lift the
cover (1) or (2) as required.

Fuse User - Fig. IE12 compartment 1 Amp.

FB1 A/C compressor 7,5
FB2 Ignition key 5
FB3 Outer front field lights 15
FB4 Inner front and bottom field lights 20
FB5 Outer rear field lights 15
FB6 Inner rear and bottom field lights 20
FB7 Driving beams 15
FB8 Revolving beacons 15
FB9 Arm rest 5
FB10 Suspended axle control unit 7.5
FB11 Key-operated armrest 3
FB12 Key operated power unit, suspended axle 7.5
FB13 Key-operated hitch controller 5
FB14 Transmission controller, key-operated 7,5
FB15 Key-operated instrument cluster 7.5
FB16 A/C controller power, key-operated 5
FB17 Key-operated engine control unit 7.5
FB18 Diagnostics 5 Fig. IE12
FB19 Hitch controller 10
FB20 Transmission controller 15
FE1 Dryer power 10 NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,
FE2 Front windscreen wiper/washer 7.5 equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be
FE3 Empty - ascertained and removed.
FE4 Empty -
WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the first
gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking brake
and remove the ignition key.
Relays Function - Fig. IE12 compartment 1
KB1 Auxiliary
KB2 Outer front field lights
KB3 Inner front field lights
KB4 Outer rear field lights
KB5 Inner rear field lights
KB6 Field lights on handgrips and bonnet
KD1 Reverse light
KD2 A/C compressor
KD3 Air braking system
KD4 Revolving beacons
KD5 Field lights on mudguards and 7-pin socket
KD6 Brake lights feed line

8-12 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Electrical system

(valid up to tractor with serial number ****R45249)

Fuse User - Fig. IE13 compartment 2 Amp.

FA1 Emergency power 15
FA2 Horn and flash coil 20
FA3 Radio 10
FA4 Seat. key-operated 15
FA5 Key-operated controller CAN/ISO 11786 10
FA6 Key-operated power to light switch 15
FA7 Auxiliary control valves 10
FA8 Key-operated front valve controller 7.5
FA9 Key-operated front valve controller 7.5
FA10 Dipped beams 10
FA11 Air braking system 7.5
FA12 Brake lights 10
FA13 Key-operated 7-pin power and front 7.5
auxiliary socket
FA14 Key-operated auxiliary socket 1 25
FA15 Right-hand side lights 5
FA16 5
Left-hand side lights and night lighting
FA17 Key-operated cigarette lighter 10
FA18 Key-operated power to right-hand so- 25
lenoid
FA19 Emergency, key-operated power 10
FA20 Key-operated auxiliary socket 2 25
FC1 Key-operated heated mirrors 7.5
FC2 Key-activated left-hand powering 25 Fig. IE13
FC3 Key-activated rear window wiper 7.5
FC4 Auxiliary socket 2 5
FC5 A/C controller power 5 NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,
equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be
FC6 Front control valves controller 3
ascertained and removed.
FC7 Auxiliary socket 1 5
FC8 Side lights circuit power 10 WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the first
gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking brake
and remove the ignition key.
Relays Function - Fig. IE13 compartment 2
KA1 Auxiliary
KA2 Auxiliary
KA3 Auxiliary
KA4
KA5
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
8
KA6 Auxiliary
KC1 Rear window wiper
KC2 Side lights power
KC3 Windscreen wiper
KC4 Light switch power (dipped + driving beams)
KE1 Dipped beams selection
KE2 -
KE3 -
KE4 Auxiliary
KE5 -
KE6 -

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 8-13

Electrical system

FUSES AND RELAYS

(valid for tractor with serial number after
****R45249)

The tractor's electrical system is protected by fuses

against short circuits and excessive power draw. The
number of the fuses in the electrical system depends on
the tractor model.

NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,

equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be
ascertained and removed.

WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the first

gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking brake,
remove the ignition key and disconnect the battery.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-
tion concerned.

WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and

engine parts. [4.1.n]

PDU box fuses (Fig. IE8B)

The PDU box is installed into the battery compartment. Fig. IE8B
Access the PDU fuses as follows:
A. Remove the clip (1) and the guard (2).
B. Push on the tabs and remove the cover (3) from the
PDU box.

8-14 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Electrical system

(valid for tractor with serial number after

****R45249)

NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,

equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be
ascertained and removed.

WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the first

gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking brake
and remove the ignition key.

Fuse User - Fig. IE9B Amp.

FG1 Fuel heater 25
FG2 Engine control unit 30
FG3 DC / DC converter 30
FG4 Starting 30
FG5 Empty -
FG6 Empty -
FG7 Empty -
FG8 Empty -
F1 DCM controller 20
F2 NOx controller 5
F3 Empty -
F4 S16 power 7.5
F5 Empty -
F6 Alternator 200
F7 Cab power 150 Fig. IE9B
F8 Glow plugs 100

Relays Function - Fig. IE9B

K Glow plugs (Fig. IE10B)
K1 Starter motor
K2 Start safeties
K3 Fuel heater
K4 NOx controller
S6 Disconnect switch

8
Fig. IE10B

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 8-15

Electrical system

Front fuses and relays (only with

front end PTO)
(Fig. IE11B)
(valid for tractor with serial number after
****R45249)

Fuse FL1 is mounted in the front on the rights side near the
alternator. The bonnet must be opened to access them.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under "How to open the bonnet".
Always wait for the engine to cool down before open-
ing the bonnet. Act very carefully.

Code Function - Fig. IE11B Amp.

Key-activated fuse for front auxiliary Fig. IE11B
FL1 25
socket

8-16 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Electrical system

Fuses and relays in cab

(valid for tractor with serial number after
****R45249)

Fuses and relays are housed in the console behind the

driver's seat. To access the fuses or relays, just lift the
cover (1) or (2) as required.

Fuse User - Fig. IE12 compartment 1 Amp.

FB1 A/C compressor 7,5
FB2 Ignition key 5
FB3 Outer front field lights 15
FB4 Inner front and bottom field lights 20
FB5 Outer rear field lights 15
FB6 Inner rear and bottom field lights 20
FB7 Driving beams 15
FB8 Revolving beacons 15
FB9 Arm rest 5
FB10 Suspended axle control unit 7.5
FB11 Key-operated armrest 3
FB12 Key operated power unit, suspended axle 7.5
FB13 Key-operated hitch controller 5
FB14 Transmission controller, key-operated 7,5
FB15 Key-operated instrument cluster 7.5
FB16 A/C controller power, key-operated 5
FB17 Key-operated engine control unit 7.5
Fig. IE12B
FB18 Diagnostics 5
FB19 Hitch controller 10
FB20 Transmission controller 15
NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,
FE1 Dryer power 10
equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be
FE2 Front windscreen wiper/washer 7.5 ascertained and removed.
FE3 Empty -
FE4 Empty - WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the first
gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking brake
and remove the ignition key.

Relays Function - Fig. IE12 compartment 1

KB1 Auxiliary
KB2 Outer front field lights
KB3 Inner front field lights
KB4
KB5
Outer rear field lights
Inner rear field lights 8
KB6 Field lights on handgrips and bonnet
KD1 Reverse light
KD2 A/C compressor
KD3 Air braking system
KD4 Revolving beacons
KD5 Field lights on mudguards and 7-pin socket
KD6 Brake lights feed line

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 8-17

Electrical system

(valid for tractor with serial number after

****R45249)

Fuse User - Fig. IE13B box 2 Amp.

FA1 Emergency power 15
FA2 Horn and flash 20
FA3 Radio 10
FA4 Seat. key-operated 15
FA5 Key-operated controller CAN/ISO 11786 10
FA6 Key-operated power to light switch 15
FA7 Auxiliary control valves 10
FA8 Key-operated front valve controller 7.5
FA9 Key-operated front valve controller 7.5
FA10 Low beams 10
FA11 Air braking system 7.5
FA12 Brake lights 10
FA13 Key-operated 7-pin power and front 7.5
auxiliary socket
FA14 Auxiliary socket 1 25
FA15 Right-hand parking lights 3
FA16 3
Left-hand parking lights and night lighting
FA17 Key-operated cigarette lighter 10
FA18 Key-operated power to right-hand so- 25
lenoid
FA19 Turn indicators, key-operated power 10
FA20 Auxiliary socket 2 25
FC1 Key operated, heated rear view mirrors and radio 7.5 Fig. IE13B
FC2 Key-activated left-hand powering 25
FC3 Key-activated rear window wiper 7.5
FC4 Key-operated auxiliary socket 2 5
FC5 A/C controller power 5
FC6 Front control valves controller 3
Relays Function - Fig. IE13B box 2
FC7 Key-operated auxiliary socket 1 5
KA1 Auxiliary
FC8 Parking lights circuit power 10
KA2 -
FH1 LED, rear brake lights 3
KA3 Auxiliary
FH2 Lh rear turn indicators, LED 3
KA4 Auxiliary
FH3 Rh rear turn indicators, LED 3
KA5 Auxiliary
FC8 Empty -
KA6 Auxiliary
FC8 Empty -
KC1 Rear window wiper
FC8 Empty -
KC2 Parking lights power
FC8 Empty -
KC3 Windscreen wiper
FC8 Empty -
KC4 Light switch power (dipped + High beams)
KE1 Low beams selection
NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new,
equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be KE2 -
ascertained and removed. KE3 Auxiliary
KE4 Auxiliary
WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the first
gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking brake
and remove the ignition key.

8-18 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Electrical system

7-pin power socket for trailer

A 7-pole power socket is installed on the rear of the trac-

tor (1 - Fig.IE14). This socket is used to connect the light
circuits of the trailer.

The pin (1A-Fig.IE14) - if equipped - is on the side of the

7-pin socket. By this pin it is possible to power a revolving
beacon mounted on a trailer.

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned. Beware of burns caused by hot tractor
and engine parts. [4.1.n]

Connections and correspondences for 7-pole

power socket according to ISO-SAE standards.
(Fig. IE15) Fig. IE14

1. Left turn indicator.

2. Not used (Fog lights - if equipped);
3. Ground.
4. Right turn indicator.
5. Rh rear side light;
6. Brake lights.
7. Lh rear side light.

1A. Trailer revolving beacon (pin not available on versions

for North America)

Connections in versions for North America:

1. Ground;
2. Rear field light;
3. Left turn indicator;
4. Battery positive;
5. Right turn indicator; Fig. IE15 View of 7-pin socket, cable insertion side
6. Parking lights;
7. 12 Volts key operated.

Auxiliary power sockets (3-pins 12

volts)
8
There are auxiliary power sockets. They are mounted:

–– In the cab behind the driver's seat on the right side

(1 - Fig. IE16A)

Fig. IE16A

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 8-19

Electrical system

–– Externally on the rear side, near 7-pin power socket for

trailer (2 - Fig. IE16B)

Fig. IE16B

The version with front end PTO and hitch feature a further
front auxiliary power socket (3 - Fig. IE16C).

Fig. IE16C

Electrical connections (Fig.IE17a)

1- Positive, key operated - Max. load 5A
2- Negative
3- Positive direct to battery - Max. load 25A

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Fig. IE17a

Connections in versions for North America

(Fig.IE17b)
1- Positive, key operated - Max. load 5A
2- Positive direct to battery - Max. load 25A
3- Negative

WARNING: Always use the specific PPE for the opera-

tion concerned.

Fig. IE17b

8-20 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1


Preparing for long idle periods
Take the following precautionary measures when your
tractor is not going to be used for a long period of time.
To carry out the operations described hereunder, see the
sections relative to the maintenance of the various parts.
Always use specific personal safety devices for each
service operation.
- park the tractor in a dry, sheltered place
- disconnect the battery master disconnect switch
- drain the coolant from the radiator and engine
- grease all points provided with grease nipples
- clean the fuel filter
- remove the injectors and squirt a small quantity of
engine oil into the cylinders. Turn the engine over by
hand, then fit the injectors back in place (have this
done by an authorised workshop).
- generally clean the tractor, particularly the bodywork
components. Protect the painted parts by applying
silicone wax and the unpainted metal parts by applying
protective lubricant. Park the tractor in a dry, sheltered
and possibly ventilated place.
- make sure that all controls are in neutral (including the
electric switches and parking brake controls)
- remove the ignition key from the ignition switch
- make sure that the cylinder stems (of the power steer-
ing, hitch systems, etc.) are positioned
- empty the fuel tank and fill it with new diesel fuel until
the maximum level is reached
- remove the battery, clean the cover and spread Vase-
line on the terminals and terminal caps. Now place the
battery in a ventilated place where the temperature
is not liable to drop below 10 ℃ and where it is not
exposed to direct sunlight
- check the battery charge with a voltmeter as described
in the battery part of this section. Recharge if it is
necessary
- place stands or other supports under the axles in order
to take the weight off the wheels. When the tractor is
raised in this way, it is advisable to deflate the tyres. If
this is not possible, the tyre pressure must be periodi-
cally checked.
WARNING: At the end of the idle period, when you
start the engine again, pay particular attention to the
instructions about starting the engine in the Opera-
tion chapter.
P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4
Electrical system
Removing the tractor from storage
WARNING: At the end of the idle period, when you
start the engine again, pay particular attention to the
instructions about starting the engine in the Opera-
tion chapter.
To carry out the operations described hereunder, see the
sections relative to the maintenance of the various parts.
Always use specific personal safety devices for each
service operation.
- Open the fuel filter drain plug and remove contami-
nated fuel. Close the drain plug.
- top up the level of oil in the transmission.
- check the coolant level in the reservoir and radiator.
- check that the batteries are fully charged.
- connect the ground cable(s) (-) and tighten all termi-
nals.
- check the transmission/hydraulic fluid level and link-
ages.
- check the front (if equipped) and rear hitch.
- check and adjust the tension on all drive belts.
- inflate the tyres to the correct operating pressures.
- make sure that all shields and guards are in the correct
position.
- do not accelerate the engine rapidly, or operate at high
RPM immediately after starting.
WARNING: Before starting the engine, be sure
all operating controls are in neutral and the
park brake applied. This will eliminate acci-
dental movement of the machine on start-up
or power driven equipment.
WARNING: Do not operate the engine in a
closed building. Always make sure that there
is adequate ventilation.
8
8-21
Electrical system

Page left intentionally blank.

8-22 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Specifications - Alphabetical index

Section 9
Specifications 9
Alphabetical index

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 9-1

Specifications

WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS OF TRACTOR

IMPORTANT: The dimensions and weights shown on the following pages are only approximate. They depend on many
factors, such as: tyre size, ballast, amount of fuel, tyre pressure etc.

Fig. DT1

General specifications of models X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460

With tyres:
Front 540/65 R28
Rear 650/65 R38
Weights
In running order, without ballast (with driver
and full levels and tanks)................................ kg 6350 ÷ 6450
Dimensions
A. Height to cab roof ................................... mm 2975 ÷ 3050
B. Wheelbase............................................... mm 2600
C. Max. length with front ballast and hitch
lower links................................................ mm 4760 ÷ 5170

D. Ground clearance (under front axle)........

mm 425 ÷ 500
E. Min. - max. - max*.................................... mm 2260 ÷ 2795
F. Front track................................................ mm
See tracks table on page 6-12
G. Rear track................................................. mm
* for road driving, see note hereunder

The above mentioned dimensions are rough values, as they may change according to tyres.

NOTE: Overall width of the tractor may change according to the type of axle and to the rear track width setting.

NOTE: (only for UE Member States): An overall width over 2500 mm (8 feet) MAY REQUIRE local authorization for use on
the highway. For an overall width over 3000 mm (10 feet) a local authorization is MANDATORY.

9-2 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Specifications

IMPORTANT: The dimensions and weights shown on the following pages are only approximate. They depend on many
factors, such as: tyre size, ballast, amount of fuel, tyre pressure etc.

Fig. DT2 - With front hitch

General specifications of models X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460

With tyres:
Front 540/65 R28
Rear 650/65 R38
Weights
In running order, without ballast (with driver
and full levels and tanks)................................ kg 6700 ÷ 6800
Dimensions
A. Height to cab roof ................................... mm 2975 ÷ 3050
B. Wheelbase............................................... mm 2600
C. Max. length with front ballast and hitch
lower links................................................ mm 4685 ÷ 5270

D. Ground clearance (under front axle)........

mm 425 ÷ 500
E. Min. - max. - max*.................................... mm 2260 ÷ 2975
F. Front track................................................ mm
See tracks table on page 6-12
G. Rear track................................................. mm
* for road driving 9
The above mentioned dimensions are rough values, as they may change according to tyres.

NOTE: Overall width of the tractor may change according to the type of axle and to the rear track width setting.

NOTE: (only for UE Member States): An overall width over 2500 mm (8 feet) MAY REQUIRE local authorization for use on
the highway. For an overall width over 3000 mm (10 feet) a local authorization is MANDATORY.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 9-3

Specifications

ENGINE
TIER 4 INTERIM / STAGE 3B

X7.440
Type...................................................................................................... ß-Power (24 valves), 6 cyl. - Turbo Intercooler air/air
Maximum power..........................................................................................................................................143 HP / 105 kW
Rated engine speed...............................................................................................................................................2200 RPM
Max. torque (with Power Plus).............................................................................................................................590 Nm ( - )
Max. torque rating..................................................................................................................................................1500 RPM

X7.450
Type...................................................................................................... ß-Power (24 valves), 6 cyl. - Turbo Intercooler air/air
Maximum power..........................................................................................................................................160 HP / 118 kW
Rated engine speed...............................................................................................................................................2200 RPM
Max. torque (with Power Plus).............................................................................................................................676 Nm ( - )
Max. torque rating..................................................................................................................................................1500 RPM

X7.460
Type...................................................................................................... ß-Power (24 valves), 6 cyl. - Turbo Intercooler air/air
Maximum power..........................................................................................................................................166 HP / 122 kW
Rated engine speed...............................................................................................................................................2200 RPM
Max. torque (with Power Plus)...................................................................................................................680 Nm (700 Nm)
Max. torque rating..................................................................................................................................................1500 RPM

Air intake system

Type......................................................................................Air filter with turbolators, two-stage dry filter with dust ejector

Engine cooling system

Type........................................................................Pressure system, thermostat controlled bypass, centrifugal type pump
Radiator........................................................................................................................................................ Tube and fin type
Thermostat Operation.................................................................... starts to open at approximately 83°C, fully open at 95°C
Radiator Cap Pressure..................................................................................................................................................1,1 bar
Fan drive...................................................................................................................................................................... Viscous

Engine lubrication system

Oil Pressure (At Rated Speed) .....................................................................................................................................3,5 bar
Oil filter . .................................................................................................................full flow, bypass valve in oil cooler cover
Oil heat exchanger.........................................................................................................................Cooled by Engine Coolant

Engine fuel system

Injection system............................................................................................................................ Electronic - Common Rail
Fuel injection pump........................................................................................................................................................Bosch
Fuel injectors..................................................................................................................................................................Bosch
Regulator................................................................................................................governed by Electronic Control Unit (ECI)
Fuel filter.....................................................................................................................................................................full flow
AdBlue™ or DEF injection system.................................................................................................................................Bosch

Cold starting device .........................................................................................................................................Thermostarter

Fuel cooling radiator.

9-4 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Specifications

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

General Specifications
Type of system...................................................................................................................................... 12 V, negative ground
Standard battery (DIN specifications)........................................2 12 V batteries, 850 Ah (peak value) 105 Ah (rated value)
Main battery disconnecting switch
Alternator...............................................................................................................................................................12 V, 200 A
Voltage regulator.................................................................................................................................. 12 V, part of alternator
Starter motor, with solenoid switch..................................................................................................................... 12 V, 4.2 kW

Auxiliary sockets
7-pin trailer socket:..................................................................equipped for directional turn lamps, brake lamps, tail lamps
1 3-pin cab socket: . .........................................................................................................................................................12 V
1 3-pin rear end: . .............................................................................................................................................................12 V
1 3-pin front end (with installed front hitch - optional) ....................................................................................................12 V

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 9-5

Specifications

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

WARNING: The technical specifications given here are only of a general kind. For technical specifications of each
market, please refer to the information material supplied by your Dealer.

Brakes
Type of brakes.......................................................................................................... hydraulic, self-adjusting, five wet plates
Trailer brake...................................................................................................... hydraulic or air system with one or two lines

Rear differential lock

Type of locking.........................................................................................................................................................Multi Disc
Control...........................................................................................................................................................Electro-hydraulic

Hydrostatic Power Steering

Type....................................................................................................................Priority on Demand from Axial Piston Pump
Steering Pump......................................................................................... Hydrostatic Type, Actuated by the Steering Wheel
Steering cylinder............................................................................................................................................... Double acting

Front axle differential and planetaries

Type of axle.............................................................................................................Hypoid with planetary reduction in hubs
Inter axle ratio
- X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460......................................................................................................................................... 1:1,3120

Transmission
Transmission options...............................................................................30, 40 or 50 Kph (according to market availability)
Variant................................................................................................................................................................... Electronics
Speed gears........................................................................................................................................24 forward, 24 reverse
Creeper speeds (if equipped) ............................................................................................................40 forward, 40 reverse
Oil cooler.................................................................................................................................... Transmission/hydraulic fluid

Front hitch (if equipped)

Valve type.................................................................................................................. Four position: float, lift, hold and lower
Type of lower links........................................................................................................................................ Claw ends, fixed
Type of connection......................................................................................................................... Three point, Category IIIN
Lift capacity:
- at 610 mm mm in front of lift point......................................................................................................................... 3,500 kg

Rear hitch [4.2.g]

Type of sensing......................................................................................................................................................Lower links
Type of lower links..................................................................................................... Eye or claw ends, fixed or telescoping
Type of connection....................................................................................................................Three point, Category lllN / III

Lifting capacity........................................................................................................................................................... 9,300 kg

9-6 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Specifications

Auxiliary hydraulic control valves

Pump.................................................................................................... Axial piston pump, pressure and flow compensated
Auxiliary control valves.............................................................................................................................. Closed-center type
Valve type.......................................................................................................... Four position - Raise, Hold, Lower and Float
Pump capacity at 2200 RPM..............................................................................................................................123 litres/min
Maximum system pressure.........................................................................................................................................206 bar
NOTE: Ask your Dealer for complete setups of auxiliary control valves.

Front power takeoff (if equipped)

Type..............................................................................................................................................................independent PTO
Clutch type............................................................................................................................................hydraulically actuated
Rotation
- depending upon market requirements............................................clockwise or counter-clockwise (from front of tractor)
Output shaft size.......................................................................................................................... 6 splines, 35 mm diameter
Speed............................................................................................................................................................. 1000 RPM PTO
Engine speed for 1000 PTO speed......................................................................................................................... 1920 RPM

Rear Power Take-Off

Type............................................................................................................................................................. independent PTO
Clutch type..........................................................................................................................Multi disc, hydraulically actuated
Rotation...............................................................................................Clockwise or counter-clockwise (from rear of tractor)
Output shaft size.......................................................................................................................... 6 splines, 35 mm diameter
- Optional.....................................................................................................................................21 splines, 35 mm diameter
Engine speed
- 540 PTO speed...................................................................................................................................................... 2005 RPM
- 540E (Economy) PTO speed................................................................................................................................. 1608 RPM
- 1000 PTO speed.................................................................................................................................................... 1995 RPM
- 100E (Economy) PTO speed................................................................................................................................. 1600 RPM

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 9-7

Specifications

Radio specifications

MP3/WMA player Radio (MW AM)

Signal/noise ratio > 55 dB Frequency range 520 kHz- 1,710 kHz
Channel separation > 55 dB (1 kHz) Sensitivity ≤30 dB µV (S/N=26dB)
Frequency response 20 Hz- 20 kHz
Compatible formats MP3/WMA - ID3 Front AUX-IN input
Frequency response 20 Hz- 20 kHz
Radio (FM) Sensitivity 775 mV
Frequency range 65 MHz- 108 MHz Impedance 20 kOhm
Sensitivity ≤12 dB µV (S/N=26dB)
Stereo separation ≥25 dB (1 kHz) General information
Signal/noise ratio ≥50 dB Power 12V cc (10.8V - 15.6V)
Channel spacing 50 kHz Speaker impedance 4 Ohm - 8 Ohm
Output power 40W x 4 channels
Radio (Weatherband - USA only) Fuse 15 A
Frequency ranges Band of 162.4-162.55 Mhz
Sensitivity ≤10 dB µV

FM / MHz AM / MHz
Area Spacing / Notes
Start Start Start Start Spacing
kHz
Europe 87.5 108 50 522 1620 9 -
USA 87.5 107.9 200 530 1710 10 WB available
Oirt 65 74 10 522 1620 9 -
Japan 76 90 100 522 1629 9 -
Middle East 87.5 108 100 531 1602 9 -
Latin America 87.5 108 100 520 1620 10 -
Australia 87.5 108 100 522 1710 9 -
Asia 87.5 108 100 531 1602 9 -
FM only 87.5 108 50 - -

9-8 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Specifications

Noise levels as perceived by the operator [4.3]

THE FOLLOWING TABLES GIVE THE NOISE LEVEL VALUES,

MEASURED FROM THE DRIVER'S SEAT IN INSTANTANEOUS CONDITIONS
IN COMPLIANCE WITH EEC STANDARDS (dBA) - ANNEX II (without load) -
AND WHEN DRIVING BY IN COMPLIANCE WITH EEC STANDARD (dBA).

Tractors with cabs

Noise level in the cockpit Noise level when driving
EEC standards - dBA by
Commercial model
EEC standards
Closed doors Open doors dBA

X7.440 75 85 82

X7.450 75 85 82

X7.460 75 85 82

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 9-9

Specifications

INFORMATION PAGE ON VIBRATION LEVELS OF THE TRACTOR

DANGERS RELATIVE TO EXPOSITION TO VIBRATIONS [4.4] [4.1.a]

WARNING: The vibration level transmitted IMPORTANT: More information on Whole Body Vibra-
to the body as a whole depends on different tion (WBV) on agricultural tractors can be found in more
parameters, some of them relating to the ma- specific publications. In order to correctly estimate values
chine, others to the terrain, others to the type based on your daily work on the tractor, a specific measure
of work and to any connected machine and instrument is required, such a three-axis accelerometer
many specific for the operator. The prevailing applied to the seat.
parameters are the type of terrain or work sur-
face, the ground speed and the type of work. NOTE: Visit the dedicated Internet web sites for further
information and documentation on risks of whole body
WARNING: vibration.
Machine vibrations are transmitted to the
operator, who in some cases may undergo
risks for his/her health and safety. Therefore
you must:
- Make sure that the tractor is in good condi-
tion and that all routine servicing is correctly
and regularly carried out.
- Check that the operator's seat and adjust-
ment systems are in good condition, then ad-
just the seat to the operator's weight and size.
- Evaluate the vibration level transmitted to
the operator from the tractor or from the
tractor-machine assembly and schedule work
hours so as to alternate suitable rest periods
concerning exposure to vibrations.

In compliance to EU Directive 78/764/CE the following table shows vibration levels measured on seats, in aws.

Vibrations * m/s2 at the (applied test weights)

Seat type
Light-weight operator Heavy-weight operator
Grammer MSG95EL
aws* = 1.13 m/s2 aws* = 1.00 m/s2
(Air suspension)
Grammer MSG95GL
aws* = 1.21 m/s2 aws* = 1.05 m/s2
(Air suspension)
* aws = correct weighted value of the vibration acceleration (m/s2).

9-10 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Specifications

'CE' DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Every tractor is accompanied by a CE Declaration of Conformity to Directive 2006/42/CE that you should receive in original
along with the tractor.
This Declaration indicates with which European Directive the machine complies.

The following picture is a fac-simile copy of such CE Declaration of Conformity.

Argo Tractors S.p.A.

42042 Fabbrico [RE] Italy
via G. Matteotti, 7
t. +39.0522.656111
E
IL
f. +39.0522.656476
IM

webmaster@argotractors.com
www.argotractors.com
S
C
FA

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 9-11

Specifications

Issue of authorization
To install any type of mounted or semi-mounted equipment not provided for by road traffic laws, it is mandatory to request
the express written authorization of the vehicle manufacturer.
We insist at any rate on our recommendation to mount always exclusively CE marked equipment complying with the
Machinery Directive 2006/42/CE.

Grounds [4.2.h]
Maximum weight declared by manufacturer for road circulation
IMPORTANT: DO NOT exceed the maximum load bearing capacity of the tyres used. Consult the payloads and inflation
pressures suggested by the type manufacturers for further details.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT exceeds the load on the axles and the maximum weight of the tractor established by the pertinent
laws when driving the tractor on public roads.

Maximum weight permitted for the tractor

MAXIMUM WEIGHT permitted for the tractor, including the tractor itself, the implements and ballast.

The MAXIMUM WEIGHT allowed for each axle includes the tractor, the implements, the ballast and any implements
coupled to the three-point hitch.

Model Front kg Rear kg Total kg

X7.440 - X7.450 - X7.460 4000 7200 9000

DO NOT use the tractor with a load on the front axle that is less than 25% or more than 55% of the total weight.

9-12 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Specifications

LUBRICANTS AND FUELS

Q.ty litres
AMBIENT
X7.440 SPECIFICA-
COMPONENT TEMPERA- AGROLUBE SPECIFICATIONS
X7.450 TIONS
TURE
X7.460
Degrees -8° -15° -25° -35°
Cooling AGROLUBE MUREX Concentrated antifreeze to be used °C
29
COOLING in the following percentages.
% 20 30 40 50
Viscosity
TANK CAPACITY Viscosity at
280 at
FUEL (about) 100°C, cSt
40°C cSt

RESERVOIR AdBlue™ or DIN70070 ANY TEMPERA- AGROLUBE

38 — —
DEF (3) ISO22241 TURE AdBlue® (3)

ACEA E9 ANY TEMPERA- AGROLUBE

ENGINE 10 API CJ-4 67 11,7
TURE LD9 15W40
CAT ECF-3

POWER STEERING CIRCUIT ANY TEMPERA- VELA F6

AND TRANSMISSION CEN- 92 API GL - 4 57 9,5
TURE (4)
TRAL HOUSING (2)

REAR FINAL DRIVES (each API GL - 4 ANY TEMPERA- CARINA 80W-90

9,5 57 9,5
side) API GL - 5 TURE

RIGID FRONT AXLE - MID- API GL - 4 ANY TEMPERA- CARINA 80W-90

6 174 16,8
DLE BODY (1) API GL - 5 TURE

FRONT AXLE WITH API GL - 4 ANY TEMPERA- CARINA 80W-90

SUSPENSIONS - MIDDLE 4 174 16,8
API GL - 5 TURE
BODY (1)

FRONT AXLE FINAL DRIVES API GL - 4 ANY TEMPERA- CARINA 80W-90

1,5 174 16,8
(each side) (1) API GL - 5 TURE

ANY TEMPERA- GENA GREASE

GREASING POINTS — — — —
TURE EP

FRONT POWER TAKEOFF (if ANY TEMPERA-

2,7 API GL - 4 VELA C+ 56 9,8
equipped) TURE

(1) Argo Tractors specifications define additives and anti-noise properties. The use of different types of oil, or mixing other types of oil
into the oil supplied with the tractor can lead to increased noise.
(2) With front hitch (if equipped) + max. 12 litres.
(3) Use ONLY synthetic products such as AGROLUBE AdBlue® or equivalent products, complying with the relevant international
standards as indicated by the chart, with the AdBlue® mark on their labels. If dissolved products are used (urea prills dissolved in
demineralised water), the guarantee on the injection system of AdBlue-DEF system and its components will become null and void. 9
Such system is identified in the European markets as AdBlue fluid injection system, in the USA ad DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid), in
Brazil as ARLA32.
(4) VELA F6 was developed in cooperation with ZF and is suitable for the mentioned use. Use exclusively the original product Argo
Tractors.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 9-13

Specifications
Implement attachment points X7.440-X7.450-X7.460 - Dimensions in mm [4.5.1.2]
The installation of frames to support and reinforce equipment must be carried out using the attachment points provided on the tractor,
as given in the Operation and Maintenance manual. In case of particularly demanding combined front and rear installation, it is manda-
tory to have a connection by means of suitable reinforcing struts between the relative support frames.

REAR POWER
TAKE-OFF
ENGINE AXIS

SCALE 1:5
DET. D

18 HOLES M12
DET. D

2+2 HOLES M20

18 HOLES M18x1.5
PART. SECT. AA

2+2 HOLES M20

SCALE 1:5
DET. C
REAR POWER TAKE-OFF
ENGINE AXIS

REAR WHEEL AXIS

6 HOLES M20
PART. SECT. BB

PART. FRONT VIEW E - SCALE 1:5

DETAIL C

4 HOLES
M16

ENGINE AXIS
4 HOLES
M16

FRONT INTERFLANGE 1940

8 STUDS

REAR INTERFLANGE 1720

10 STUDS M20x1.5
ENGINE AXIS

SCALE 1:5

- L=41
SCALE 1:5

REAR WHEEL AXIS

9-14 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Alphabetical index

A G
Additional cab features.............................................. 3-48 General information.............................................. 1-2, 1-9
Alphabetical index........................................................ 9-1
Armrest controls........................................................ 3-32 H
Auto Hitch.................................................................. 5-30 Headland Management Function (HMF).................... 4-57
Auto PTO.................................................................... 5-50 Headlights.................................................................... 8-7
Auxiliary control valves (AVC)..................................... 5-75 Height adjustable hitch.............................................. 5-25
Highway Code regulations......................................... 2-21
B Hitch locking latches.................................................. 5-30
Ballast.................................................................. 6-1, 6-25 How to transport the tractor...................................... 5-18
Battery maintenance.................................................. 7-31
Battery master disconnect switch............................... 5-7 I
Implements, dimensions of towing [...]..................... 5-32
C Indicator lights............................................................. 4-5
Cab............................................................................... 3-2 Instrument panel.......................................................... 4-2
Cab controls........................................................ 3-1, 3-20 Instruments.................................................................. 4-2
Cab ventilation........................................................... 3-36 Instruments and Programming.................................... 4-1
CE Declaration of Conformity.................................... 9-11
Check your equipment................................................. 2-8 J
Cleaning....................................................................... 2-9 Joystick...................................................................... 3-34
Cold temperature operation......................................... 5-4
Controls........................................................................ 3-1 L
Controls, joystick........................................................ 3-34 Lights, replacement..................................................... 8-8
Cooling......................................................................... 7-2 Load capacity of tyres.................................................. 6-4
Lubricants................................................................... 9-13
D Lubricants and fuels................................................... 9-13
Dangerous operations................................................ 2-18
Decal positions, WEO countries................................ 2-32 M
Diff lock control.......................................................... 5-42 Maintenance......................................................... 2-9, 7-1
Drawbar...................................................................... 5-20 Maintenance, 10 hours or daily service..................... 7-13
Maintenance, every 50 hours.................................... 7-20
E Maintenance, every 100 hours.................................. 7-25
Electrical system.......................................................... 8-1 Maintenance, every 250 hours.................................. 7-28
Electrical system - Battery........................................... 8-2 Maintenance, every 500 hours.................................. 7-32
Electronic Climate Control......................................... 3-38 Maintenance, every 1000 hours................................ 7-40
Engine, maintenance................................................... 7-2 Maintenance, every 1500 hours................................ 7-52
Engine oil, level check and replacement..................... 7-2 Maintenance, every 2000 hours................................ 7-53
Equipment, check........................................................ 2-8 Maintenance, every 3600 hours................................ 7-54
External controls on fenders...................................... 3-50 Maintenance, general information............................... 7-6
External PTO controls................................................ 5-49 Maintenance, running-in period................................... 7-6

F O
Front hitch.................................................................. 5-67 Operating the transmission......................................... 5-8
Front PTO................................................................... 5-51 Operation..................................................................... 5-1
Front suspension use................................................. 5-39 Operation of the four-wheel drive.............................. 5-40
Fuel............................................................................... 7-8
Fuel, bleeding the fuel system................................... 7-35
Fuses............................................................................ 8-9 9

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 9-15

Alphabetical index

P T
Parking the tractor........................................................ 5-6
Periodical maintenance guide...................................... 7-2
Precautions.................................................................. 2-5
Pre-delivery claims....................................................... 1-9
Protection from noise................................................ 2-31
Protective clothing....................................................... 2-5
PTO shaft replacement.............................................. 5-46
PTO speed.................................................................. 5-47
R Tyres............................................................................. 6-1
Radio.......................................................................... 3-42
Radio specifications..................................................... 9-8
Rear hitch................................................................... 5-59
Rear power take-off................................................... 5-44
Rear power take-off engagement.............................. 5-48
Rear Three-Point Hitch............................................... 5-52
Relay............................................................................. 8-9
Risk of overturning..................................................... 2-14
Risks from noise........................................................ 2-31
Road transport........................................................... 2-21
Routine maintenance table.......................................... 7-2
Running in.................................................................... 7-6
Running in of tractor.................................................... 5-2
Running in procedure................................................... 5-2
Technical specifications........................................ 9-1, 9-2
Tractor identification.................................................... 1-8
Tractor transport......................................................... 5-18
Tractor, turning off the engine...................................... 5-6
Transmission creeper operation................................ 5-17
Tyre Inflation Specifications......................................... 6-3
Tyre maintenance......................................................... 6-4
Tyre mounting.............................................................. 6-7
Tyre pressures.............................................................. 6-4
Tyre Size Combinations.............................................. 6-20
Tyres, wheels, ballasting.............................................. 6-1
U
Use of the tractor......................................................... 5-2
Use of the tractor on public roads............................. 2-21
W
Warning and caution.................................................... 2-1
Warranty....................................................................... 1-9
Weights and dimensions............................................. 9-2
Wheels......................................................................... 6-1
Working in safety....................................................... 2-12

S
Safety.................................................................. 1-10, 2-1
Safety - Cab.................................................................. 2-4
Safety decal locations - All markets........................... 2-32
Safety notes................................................................. 2-1
Safety, working in safety............................................ 2-12
Safe use of the tractor................................................. 2-1
Seat, adjustment.......................................................... 3-3
Seat belt..................................................................... 3-16
Speed tables................................................................ 5-8
Speed tables (limitations)............................................. 5-8
Starting procedure....................................................... 5-3
Starting the tractor....................................................... 5-3
Stationary................................................................... 5-36
Stationary button........................................................ 5-36
Stationary tractor........................................................ 5-36
Stopping the engine..................................................... 5-6
Suspended Cab.......................................................... 5-84
Systems, checks.......................................................... 2-7

9-16 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Contents Directive 2010/52/EU

Operator's manual X7.6 Series

N° 2010/52/EU Section
4.1 In particular, in addition to the requirements in standard ISO 3600:1996, the operator’s manual
shall cover the following:
a adjustment of the seat and suspension related to the ergonomic position of the operator with 9
respect to the controls and in order to minimise the risks from whole body vibration;
b use and adjustment of the system for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning, when provided; 3
c starting and stopping of the engine; 2, 5
d location and method of opening of emergency exits; 2
e boarding and leaving the tractor; 2
f the hazard area near to the pivot axis of articulated tractors; NA
g use of special tools, if any are provided; 2
h safe methods used for service and maintenance; 2
i information about the interval of inspection of hydraulic hoses; 2
j instructions about how to tow the tractor; 5
k instructions about the safe use of jacks and recommended jacking points; 2, 6
l hazards related to batteries and fuel tank; 2, 7, 8
m prohibited use of the tractor, where overturning hazards exist with mention that the list is not 2
exhaustive;
n residual risks, related to hot surfaces, such as filling of oil or coolant in hot engines or transmis- 2, 7, 8
sions;
or the level of protection of the Falling Objects Protective Structure, if applicable; 1
p the level of protection against hazardous substances, if applicable; 1, 2, 7
q the level of protection of the Operators Protection Structure, if applicable; 1, 2
4.2 Attaching, detaching and working with mounted machinery, trailers and interchangeable towed
machinery:
a a warning to strictly follow the instructions outlined in the operator’s manual of the mounted or 2
trailed machinery or trailer, and not to operate the combination tractor-machine or tractor-trailer
unless all instructions have been followed;
b a warning to stay clear from the area of the three-point linkage when controlling it; 2, 5
c a warning that mounted machinery must be lowered on the ground before leaving the tractor; 2
d speed of the power take-off drive shafts in function of the mounted machinery or trailed vehicle; 5
e a requirement to use only power take-off drive shafts with adequate guards; 2
f information about hydraulic coupling devices and their function; 5
g information about the maximum lift capacity of the three-point linkage; 9
h information about the determination of the total mass, the axle loads, the tyre load carrying capacity 6, 9
and the necessary minimum ballasting;
i information about the available trailer braking systems and their compatibility with the trailed vehicles; 5
j the maximum vertical load on the rear hitch, related to the rear tyre size and type of hitch; see 5

k
relevant approval documents
information about using implements with power take-off drive shafts and that the technically pos- 2
7
sible inclination of the shafts depend on the shape and size of the master shield and/or clearance
zone, including the specific information required in case of PTO type 3 with reduced dimension;

l a repeat of the data on the statutory plate about maximum allowed trailed masses; 5

m a warning to stay clear from the area between tractor and trailed vehicle. 2

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 9-17

Contents Directive 2010/52/EU

4.3 Noise declaration: 9

The operator’s manual shall give the value of the noise at the operator’s ear, measured according
to Directive 2009/76/CE of the European Parliament and of the Council and the noise of the tractor
in motion measured according to Annex VI to Directive 2009/63/CE of the European Parliament
and of the Council.
4.4 Vibration declaration: 9
The operator’s manual shall give the value of the vibration level measured according to Council
Directive 78/764/EEC;
4.5 Relevant operating modes of a tractor that can reasonably be expected and identified as containing
particular hazards are the following:
a work with front-end loader (risk of falling objects); 2

b forestry application (risk of falling and/or penetrating objects); 1

c work with crop sprayers, mounted or trailed (risk of hazardous substances). NA

4.5.1 Front-end loader:

4.5.1.1 The operator’s manual shall outline the hazards associated with front-end loader work, and explain 2
how to avoid those hazards.
4.5.1.2 The operator’s manual shall indicate the fixation points on the body of the tractor where the front- 9
end loader must be installed, together with the size and quality of the hardware to be used. If
no such attachment points are foreseen, the operator’s manual shall prohibit the installation of a
front-end loader.
4.5.1.3 Tractors fitted with programmable hydraulic sequencing functions shall provide information on how NA
to connect the loader hydraulics so that this function is inoperable.
4.5.2 Forestry application:

4.5.2.1 In case of use of an agricultural tractor in a forestry application, the identified hazards are the following: NA

a toppling trees, primarily in case a rear-mounted tree grab-crane is mounted at the rear of the trac- NA
tor;
b penetrating objects in the operator’s enclosure, primarily in case a winch is mounted at the rear NA
of the tractor.
4.5.2.2 The operator’s manual shall provide information about the following:

a the existence of the hazards described in point 4.5.2.1; NA

b any optional equipment that might be available to deal with those hazards; NA

c fixation points on the tractor where protective structures can be fixed, together with the size and NA
quality of the hardware to be used. When no means are foreseen to fit adequate protective struc-
tures, this shall be mentioned;
d protective structures may consist of a frame protecting the operating station against toppling NA
trees or (mesh) grids in front of the cab doors, roof and windows;
e the Falling Objects Protection System level, if provided; NA

4.5.3 Work with crop sprayers (risk of hazardous substances):

The protection level against hazardous substances, in accordance with EN 15695-1:2009, must be 1, 2
described in the operator’s manual".

NA: Not Applicable

9-18 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1

 Page left intentionally blank.

P/N 6521716M1 - X7.4 9-19

 To ensure
a correct and satisfactory
operation to
your tractor
only use

service parts and

lubricants recommended by the manufacturer.

9-20 X7.4 - P/N 6521716M1